Translated from the French.

If any misunderstanding or
misinterpretation arise herefrom, the original French text alone is valid.
In case the CD Rom content differs from the printed text,
the printed text alone is valid.

SECTION I : SUBSECTION Z
Design and Construction Rules for Mechanical
Components of PWR Nuclear Islands
Z I SUBSECTIONS A - GENERAL RULES

TECHNICAL APPENDICES
Z - TECHNICAL ANNEXES

2012 Edition afcen

RCC-M - 2012 Edition Subsection Z

SECTION I
SUBSECTION "Z"
TECHNICAL ANNEXES
Page

ANNEX Z I PROPERTIES OF MATERIALS

TO BE USED IN DESIGN.............................................................................. An Z I /1
Table Z I 1.0 ALLOWABLE BASIC STRESS INTENSITY VALUES Sm
ALLOWABLE STRESS VALUES S .............................................................................. /2

Table Z I 2.0 YIELD STRENGTH VALUES Sy .................................................................................... /19

Table Z I 3.0 TENSILE STRENGTH VALUES Su ............................................................................... /28

Table Z I 4.0 FATIGUE CURVES........................................................................................................... /36

Table Z I 5.0 CLASSIFICATION OF THE VARIOUS GRADES

USED IN THE RCC-M FOR PHYSICAL PROPERTIES ............................................ /40

Table Z I 6.0 a THERMAL CONDUCTIVITY ........................................................................................... /41

Table Z I 6.0 b THERMAL DIFFUSIVITY ................................................................................................. /42

Table Z I 7.0 COEFFICIENTS OF LINEAR EXPANSION.................................................................. /43

Table Z I 8.0 MODULUS OF ELASTICITY........................................................................................... /44

ANNEX Z II EXPERIMENTAL ANALYSIS ..................................................................... An Z II/1

Z II 100 INTRODUCTION ................................................................................................................... /1

Z II 110 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS ................................................................................................. /1

Z II 111 Use of experimental stress analysis

Z II 112 Discounting of corrosion allowance
Z II 113 Test report

Z II 120 TYPES OF EXPERIMENTAL TESTS .................................................................................... /2

Z II 200 TEST PROCEDURE .......................................................................................................... /2

Z II 210 STRAIN MEASUREMENT TEST PROCEDURE ................................................................. /2

Z II 211 Requirements for strain gauges

Z II 212 Use of models for strain or deformation measurements

 n° 137-2012 Z / 1
RCC-M - 2012 Edition Subsection Z

Z II 220 PHOTOELASTIC TEST TECHNIQUES ................................................................................ /3

Z II 230 LOCATION OF TEST GAUGES............................................................................................. /3

Z II 240 APPLICATION OF PRESSURE OR LOAD.......................................................................... /3

Z II 300 STRESS EVALUATION .................................................................................................. /4

Z II 310 DETERMINATION OF STRESSES........................................................................................ /4

Z II 320 EXTENT AND USE OF EXPERIMENTAL STRESS ANALYSIS ...................................... /4

Z II 330 EXPERIMENTAL STRESS ANALYSIS OF OPENINGS.................................................... /5

Z II 331 General requirements

Z II 332 Guidelines for use of available experimental data

Z II 400 LIMIT LOAD DETERMINATION ................................................................................. /6

Z II 410 TESTS FOR DETERMINING LIMIT LOAD........................................................................... /6

Z II 420 CRITERION OF LIMIT LOAD ................................................................................................. /6

Z II 500 EXPERIMENTAL FATIGUE ANALYSIS ................................................................. /7

Z II 510 USE OF FATIGUE TESTS FOR THE EVALUATION OF CYCLIC LOADING ............... /7

Z II 520 REQUIREMENTS FOR CYCLIC TESTING OF COMPONENTS...................................... /7

Z II 530 DETERMINATION OF FATIGUE STRENGTH REDUCTION FACTOR .......................... /10

Z II 531 Procedures

ANNEX Z III DETERMINATION OF ALLOWABLE

BASIC STRESS LIMIT .................................................................................. AnZ III/1

Z III 100 INTRODUCTION ................................................................................................................... /1

Z III 110 ORIGIN OF STRESS CRITERIA ............................................................................................ /1

Z III 120 TABLES: LOCATION AND APPLICATION......................................................................... /2

Z III 121 Location

Z III 122 Application

Z III 200 STRESS CRITERIA FOR CLASS 1 COMPONENTS ........................................ /2

Z III 210 ALLOWABLE BASIC STRESS INTENSITY ........................................................................ /2

Z III 211 Components other than bolting

Z III 212 Bolting materials

Z III 220 FATIGUE CURVES FOR ALL MATERIALS ........................................................................ /3

Z / 2  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition Subsection Z

Z III 300 STRESS CRITERIA FOR CLASS 2 AND 3 COMPONENTS ....................... /4

Z III 310 COMPONENTS OTHER THAN BOLTING MATERIALS................................................... /4

Z III 320 BOLTING MATERIALS............................................................................................................ /4

ANNEX Z IV DESIGN RULES FOR COMPONENTS

SUBJECTED TO EXTERNAL PRESSURE ............................ An Z IV/1

Z IV 100 DESIGN METHOD.............................................................................................................. /1

Z IV 110 GENERAL .................................................................................................................................. /1

Z IV 111 Requirements associated with the various criteria levels

Z IV 120 NOMENCLATURE .................................................................................................................... /2

Z IV 130 CYLINDRICAL, SPHERICAL AND CONICAL SHELLS,

AND TUBULAR PRODUCTS ................................................................................................. /3

Z IV 131 Cylindrical shells and tubular products

Z IV 132 Conical shells
Z IV 133 Spherical shells

Z IV 140 ELLIPTICAL AND TORISPHERICAL HEADS..................................................................... /6

Z IV 141 Elliptical heads

Z IV 142 Torispherical heads

Z IV 150 DESIGN OF STIFFENING RINGS.......................................................................................... /7

Z IV 151 Stiffening rings for cylindricals shells

Z IV 152 Stiffening rings for conical shells

Z IV 160 CYLINDERS UNDER AXIAL COMPRESSION.................................................................... /9

Z IV 200 EXTERNAL CHARTS FOR DETERMINING MAXIMUM

ALLOWABLE PRESSURE ............................................................................................ /9

ANNEX Z V DESIGN OF CIRCULAR BOLTED FLANGE

CONNECTIONS .................................................................................................... An Z V/1
Z V 100 INTRODUCTION ................................................................................................................. /1

Z V 110 GENERAL .................................................................................................................................. /1

Z V 120 FLANGES................................................................................................................................... /1

Z V 130 GASKETS................................................................................................................................... /2

Z V 131 Remarks

Z V 140 BOLTING .................................................................................................................................... /3

 n° 137-2012 Z / 3
RCC-M - 2012 Edition Subsection Z

Z V 200 CALCULATION (SIZING) OF BOLT SECTION .................................................. /5

Z V 210 NOMENCLATURE.................................................................................................................... /5

Z V 220 DETERMINATION OF BOLT TIGHTENING FORCES....................................................... /8

Z V 221 Principle
Z V 222 Evaluation of gasket-related forces
Z V 223 Evaluation of loading-related forces
Z V 224 Initial tightening force FSi

Z V 230 DETERMINATION OF MINIMUM BOLT CROSS-SECTION............................................. /11

Z V 231 Principle
Z V 232 Check in design conditions
Z V 233 Check in operating conditions
Z V 234 Check in test conditions
Z V 235 Allowable bolt stresses

Z V 240 REMARKS ................................................................................................................................. /12

Z V 300 CALCULATION OF FLANGE STRESSES ............................................................ /13

Z V 310 GENERAL .................................................................................................................................. /13

Z V 320 FORCES TO BE CONSIDERED ............................................................................................ /13

Z V 321 Evaluation principle

Z V 322 Evaluation of forces in the connection

Z V 330 CALCULATION OF THE MOMENT ARM ............................................................................ /15

Z V 340 CALCULATION OF BENDING MOMENTS ......................................................................... /15

Z V 341 Principle
Z V 342 Determination of bending moment components
Z V 343 Maximum moment acting on the flange
Z V 344 Bolt spacing

Z V 350 STRESS ANALYSIS................................................................................................................. /18

Z V 360 DETERMINATION OF STRESSES........................................................................................ /19

Z V 370 ALLOWABLE STRESS LIMITS ............................................................................................. /20

Z V 371 Design condition requirements

Z V 372 Checks to be performed under operating conditions
Z V 373 Test conditions

ANNEX Z VI DESIGN RULES FOR LINEAR TYPE SUPPORTS .......... An Z VI/1

Z VI 1000 GENERAL .............................................................................................................................. /1

Z VI 1100 INTRODUCTION ................................................................................................................. /1

Z VI 1110 SCOPE........................................................................................................................................ /1

Z / 4  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition Subsection Z

Z VI 1120 METHODS OF ANALYSIS ...................................................................................................... /1

Z VI 1121 Elastic analysis

Z VI 1122 Limit analysis

Z VI 1130 CONDITIONS OF APPLICATION............................................................................................ /2

Z VI 1200 NOMENCLATURE ............................................................................................................. /2

Z VI 2000 ELASTIC ANALYSIS ........................................................................................................ /6

Z VI 2100 GENERAL............................................................................................................................... /6

Z VI 2110 LEVEL O, A AND B CRITERIA .............................................................................................. /6

Z VI 2120 LEVEL C CRITERIA ................................................................................................................. /6

Z VI 2130 LEVEL D CRITERIA ................................................................................................................. /6

Z VI 2200 DESIGN RULES APPLICABLE TO MEMBERS MADE FROM

ROLLED, FORGED OR CAST PRODUCTS......................................................... /6

Z VI 2201 General

Z VI 2210 RULES RELATING TO STRESS LIMITATION ................................................................... /7

Z VI 2211 General
Z VI 2212 Limits applicable to stress in tension
Z VI 2213 Limits applicable to stress in shear
Z VI 2214 Limits applicable to stress in compression
Z VI 2215 Limits applicable to stress in bending
Z VI 2216 Combined stresses
Z VI 2217 Limits applicable to bearing stresses

Z VI 2220 STABILITY AND SLENDERNESS RATIOS......................................................................... /18

Z VI 2221 General requirements

Z VI 2222 Rules for determining buckling lengths
Z VI 2223 Maximum slenderness ratios
Z VI 2224 Thickness conditions for compression members
Z VI 2225 Compression members which do not comply with the thickness
conditions of Z VI 2224

Z VI 2230 SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS APPLICABLE TO WEBS,

FLANGES AND STIFFENERS ............................................................................................... /24

Z VI 2231 Webs
Z VI 2232 Flanges
Z VI 2233 Stiffeners

 n° 137-2012 Z / 5
RCC-M - 2012 Edition Subsection Z

Z VI 2240 GROSS AND NET SECTIONS................................................................................................. /29

Z VI 2241 Determination of gross and net sections

Z VI 2242 Use of gross and net section
Z VI 2243 Determination of net section

Z VI 2250 SPECIAL CONSTRUCTIONAL PROVISIONS .................................................................... /31

Z VI 2251 General
Z VI 2252 Beam connections
Z VI 2253 Rules relating to local slenderness ratios

Z VI 2300 RULES FOR FATIGUE ANALYSIS........................................................................... /32

Z VI 2310 INTRODUCTION ....................................................................................................................... /32

Z VI 2311 Scope
Z VI 2312 Principle of fatigue analysis rules

Z VI 2320 DETERMINATION OF EQUIVALENT NUMBER OF CYCLES......................................... /32

Z VI 2330 STRESS CATEGORIES .......................................................................................................... /33

Z VI 2340 ALLOWABLE STRESS RANGES ......................................................................................... /33

Z VI 2400 RULES APPLICABLE TO MECHANICAL CONNECTIONS

AND WELDED JOINTS ................................................................................................... /33

Z VI 2410 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS ................................................................................................. /33

Z VI 2411 Types of connections permitted

Z VI 2412 Rules for the positioning of connections
Z VI 2413 Rules for the positioning of bolts and welds

Z VI 2420 CONNECTION DESIGN........................................................................................................... /34

Z VI 2421 General requirement

Z VI 2422 Connections for unrestrained members
Z VI 2423 Connections for restrained members
Z VI 2424 Rules for the connection of structural members
Z VI 2425 Rules applicable to the bearing joints of compression members

Z VI 2430 RULES APPLICABLE TO LAP JOINTS............................................................................... /36

Z VI 2440 JOINT COMBINATIONS.......................................................................................................... /36

Z VI 2441 Combinations of welds

Z VI 2442 Bolts in combination with welds

Z VI 2450 DESIGN RULES APPLICABLE TO WELDED JOINTS ...................................................... /37

Z VI 2451 General
Z VI 2452 Fillet welds
Z VI 2453 Plug and slot welds
Z VI 2454 Groove welded joints

Z / 6  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition Subsection Z

Z VI 2460 REQUIREMENTS APPLICABLE TO BOLTED JOINTS ..................................................... /40

Z VI 2461 Allowable stresses

Z VI 2462 Minimum distances between bolts and free edges of connected parts
Z VI 2463 Maximum distances between bolt and edge of connected part
Z VI 2464 Minimum spacing of bolts
Z VI 2465 Special rules for anchor bolts

Z VI 2470 SPECIAL RULES APPLICABLE TO COLUMN OR PILLAR BASES............................... /44

Z VI 2471 Transfer of loads and moments

Z VI 2472 Alignment
Z VI 2473 Finishing of bearing surfaces

Z VI 3000 LIMIT ANALYSIS ................................................................................................................ /44

Z VI 3100 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS ........................................................................................ /44

ANNEX Z A RULES FOR DETERMINING REINFORCEMENTS

OF OPENINGS IN CLASS 1 VESSELS ..................................... An Z A/1

Z A 100 GENERAL RULE FOR CORROSION ALLOWANCES

AND TOLERANCES ......................................................................................................... /1

Z A 200 REQUIREMENTS APPLICABLE TO REINFORCEMENT

OF OPENINGS ..................................................................................................................... /1

Z A 210 OPENINGS IN SHELLS AND FORMED HEADS ................................................................ /1

Z A 220 REQUIREMENTS APPLICABLE TO REINFORCEMENT

OF OPENINGS IN FLAT HEADS........................................................................................... /2

Z A 300 REINFORCEMENT LIMITS ........................................................................................... /2

Z A 310 REINFORCEMENT LIMITS ALONG VESSEL WALL ........................................................ /2

Z A 320 REINFORCEMENT LIMITS NORMAL TO THE VESSEL WALL ..................................... /3

Z A 400 METAL AVAILABLE FOR REINFORCEMENT ................................................... /4

Z A 500 STRENGTH OF THE REINFORCING MATERIAL ............................................ /4

 n° 137-2012 Z / 7
RCC-M - 2012 Edition Subsection Z

ANNEX Z D ANALYSIS OF THE FATIGUE BEHAVIOUR OF

ZONES WITH GEOMETRIC DISCONTINUITIES................... An Z D/1
Z D 1000 INTRODUCTION ................................................................................................................. /1

Z D 2000 METHOD OF ANALYSIS USING CALCULATED STRESSES

AT A CHARACTERISTIC DISTANCE d FROM
THE DISCONTINUITY ...................................................................................................... /1

Z D 2100 GENERAL .................................................................................................................................. /1

Z D 2200 PROCEDURE ............................................................................................................................ /2

Z D 2210 Definitions
Z D 2220 Evaluation method for the fatigue initiation factor

Z D 2300 INITIATION CURVES ............................................................................................................... /4

Z D 3000 USE OF THE S/N CURVES IN ANNEX Z I ............................................................ /4

ANNEX Z E OTHER RULES ACCEPTABLE FOR ANALYZING

CLASS 1 PIPING UNDER CONDITIONS REQUIRING
COMPLIANCE WITH LEVEL A CRITERIA ................................. An Z E/1
Z E 100 GENERAL .............................................................................................................................. /1

Z E 110 ACCEPTABILITY OF THE ANALYSIS ................................................................................. /1

Z E 120 GENERAL PRINCIPLES ......................................................................................................... /1

Z E 121 Review of the simplified method

Z E 122 Mixed method
Z E 123 Alternative simplified method

Z E 200 MIXED ANALYSIS METHOD ....................................................................................... /2

Z E 210 BASIC ASSUMPTIONS AND REQUIREMENTS ................................................................ /2

Z E 215 Correction of the detailed analysis results

Z E 220 LOAD SET SELECTION.......................................................................................................... /3

Z E 230 REQUIREMENTS APPLICABLE TO RANGES OF THE SUM OF

THE PRIMARY AND SECONDARY STRESSES................................................................ /4

Z E 240 REQUIREMENTS APPLICABLE TO TOTAL STRESS RANGE...................................... /4

Z E 250 SIMPLIFIED ELASTOPLASTIC ANALYSIS ........................................................................ /5

Z / 8  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition Subsection Z

Z E 260 PROCEDURE FOR CALCULATING THE USAGE FACTOR ........................................... /6

Z E 270 THERMAL RATCHET .............................................................................................................. /10

Z E 300 SIMPLIFIED ALTERNATIVE METHOD................................................................... /11

Z E 310 BASIC ASSUMPTIONS AND REQUIREMENTS ................................................................ /11

Z E 320 LOAD SET SELECTION.......................................................................................................... /11

Z E 330 REQUIREMENTS APPLICABLE TO THE RANGE OF THE SUM OF

THE PRIMARY AND SECONDARY STRESSES ................................................................ /13

Z E 340 REQUIREMENTS CONCERNING THE TOTAL STRESS RANGE.................................. /13

Z E 350 SIMPLIFIED ELASTOPLASTIC ANALYSIS ........................................................................ /14

Z E 360 PROCEDURE FOR CALCULATING THE USAGE FACTOR ........................................... /14

Z E 370 THERMAL RATCHET .............................................................................................................. /15

ANNEX Z F RULES ASSOCIATED WITH LEVEL D CRITERIA ................ An Z F/1

Z F 1100 SCOPE ..................................................................................................................................... /1

Z F 1200 PURPOSE............................................................................................................................... /1

Z F 1210 INTENT OF THE LEVEL D CRITERIA .................................................................................. /1

Z F 1220 FURTHER PROVISIONS ......................................................................................................... /1

Z F 1300 RULES ASSOCIATED WITH LEVEL D CRITERIA........................................... /2

Z F 1310 GENERAL .................................................................................................................................. /2

Z F 1320 DESIGN ANALYSIS ................................................................................................................. /2

Z F 1321 Terms related to analysis

Z F 1322 Methods for analysis
Z F 1323 Elastic analysis of the system method for evaluating primary stresses
in the component
Z F 1324 Inelastic system analysis methods for evaluating primary stresses
in the component
Z F 1325 Stability requirements

Z F 1330 VESSELS.................................................................................................................................... /8

Z F 1340 PUMPS........................................................................................................................................ /8

Z F 1350 VALVES ...................................................................................................................................... /8

Z F 1360 PIPING ........................................................................................................................................ /9

Z F 1370 COMPONENTS SUPPORTS .................................................................................................. /9

 n° 137-2012 Z / 9
RCC-M - 2012 Edition Subsection Z

ANNEX Z G FAST FRACTURE RESISTANCE ....................................................... An ZG/1

Z G 1000 INTRODUCTION ................................................................................................................... /1

Z G 1100 SCOPE....................................................................................................................................... /1

Z G 1200 METHODOLOGY ................................................................................................................. /1

Z G 1210 APPROACH ................................................................................................................................ /1

Z G 1220 GENERAL ANALYSIS PRINCIPLES...................................................................................... /2

Z G 1230 CRITERIA .................................................................................................................................... /2

Z G 2000 SCREENING CRITERIA ................................................................................................... /4

Z G 2100 GENERAL ................................................................................................................................ /4

Z G 2200 FERRITIC COMPONENTS .............................................................................................. /4

Z G 2210 VESSELS..................................................................................................................................... /4

Z G 2220 PIPING ......................................................................................................................................... /4

Z G 2230 CAST MATERIALS .................................................................................................................... /4

Z G 2300 AUSTENITIC OR AUSTENITIC-FERRITIC COMPONENTS ......................... /4

Z G 2310 VESSELS..................................................................................................................................... /4

Z G 2320 PIPING ......................................................................................................................................... /5

Z G 2330 CAST MATERIALS .................................................................................................................... /5

Z G 2400 DISSIMILAR WELDS ......................................................................................................... /5

Z G 3000 CONVENTIONAL FAST FRACTURE ANALYSIS............................................... /5

Z G 3100 GENERAL ................................................................................................................................ /5

Z G 3110 SELECTION OF ZONES ANALYZED .................................................................................... /5
Z G 3120 SELECTION OF TRANSIENTS ............................................................................................... /5
Z G 3130 CONSIDERATION OF CLADDING ......................................................................................... /6

Z G 3200 FERRITIC VESSELS .......................................................................................................... /6

Z G 3210 CONVENTIONAL DEFECTS.................................................................................................... /6

Z G 3220 CALCULATION METHOD ........................................................................................................ /6

Z G 3230 CRITERIA .................................................................................................................................... /7

Z G 3231 General
Z G 3232 Level A and B Criteria
Z G 3233 Level C criteria
Z G 3234 Level D criteria
Z G 3235 Level T criteria

Z / 10  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition Subsection Z

Z G 3300 FERRITIC PIPING ................................................................................................................ /10

Z G 3400 AUSTENITIC AND AUSTENITIC-FERRITIC VESSELS................................... /10

Z G 3410 CONVENTIONAL REFERENCE DEFECTS .......................................................................... /10

Z G 3420 CALCULATION METHOD ........................................................................................................ /10

Z G 3430 CRITERIA..................................................................................................................................... /10

Z G 3431 General
Z G 3432 Level A and B Criteria
Z G 3433 Level C criteria
Z G 3434 Level D criteria
Z G 3435 Level T criteria

Z G 3500 AUSTENITIC AND AUSTENITIC-FERRITIC PIPING ........................................ /12

Z G 3600 OTHER COMPONENTS ................................................................................................... /12

Z G 4000 DETAILED FAST FRACTURE ANALYSIS METHOD ....................................... /12

Z G 4100 GENERAL ................................................................................................................................ /12

Z G 4110 SCOPE ......................................................................................................................................... /12

Z G 4120 APPROACH................................................................................................................................. /12

Z G 4200 VESSELS ................................................................................................................................. /12

Z G 4300 PIPING ....................................................................................................................................... /13

Z G 5000 METHODS FOR DETERMINING ANALYSIS PARAMETERS...................... /13

Z G 5100 DETERMINATION OF STESS INTENSITY FACTORS K................................ /13

Z G 5110 GENERAL.................................................................................................................................... /13

Z G 5120 INFLUENCE FUNCTIONS ........................................................................................................ /14

Z G 5200 DETERMINATION OF THE CRACK-EXTENSION FORCE J ....................... /16

Z G 5210 GENERAL.................................................................................................................................... /16

Z G 5220 DETERMINATION OF THE CRACK-EXTENSION FORCE CURVE................................. /16

Z G 5230 PIPING ANALYSIS..................................................................................................................... /16

Z G 6000 MATERIAL PROPERTIES ............................................................................................... /16

Z G 6100 TOUGHNESS PROPERTIES OF FERRITIC MATERIAL ................................ /16

Z G 6110 KIC TOUGHNESS CURVE......................................................................................................... /16

 n° 137-2012 Z / 11
RCC-M - 2012 Edition Subsection Z

Z G 6120 AGEING EFFECTS .................................................................................................................... /18

Z G 6121 General
Z G 6122 Irradiation Effects
Z G 6123 Thermal Ageing Effects
Z G 6124 Strain Ageing Effects

Z G 6130 APPLICATION OF KIC CURVE TO OTHER

FERRITIC COMPONENTS ....................................................................................................... /20

Z G 6140 DUCTILE TEARING TOUGHNESS OF FERRITIC MATERIALS ...................................... /20

Z G 6141 Resistance to Onset of Crack-Extension

Z G 6142 Crack-Extension Resistance Curves

Z G 6200 TOUGHNESS PROPERTIES OF AUSTENITIC MATERIALS ...................... /22

ANNEX Z H ACCEPTABLE RULES FOR DETERMINING

USAGE FACTOR .............................................................................................. An Z H/1
Z H 100 FIRST METHOD: TRANSIENT COMBINATIONS ............................................. /1

Z H 110 FIXED DIRECTIONS OF PRINCIPAL STRESSES ............................................................. /1

Z H 111 First alternative method

Z H 112 Second alternative method
Z H 113 Third alternative method

Z H 120 VARIABLE DIRECTIONS OF PRINCIPAL STRESSES .................................................... /4

Z H 200 SECOND METHOD: COMBINATIONS OF TIMES ........................................... /4

Z H 210 FIRST ALTERNATIVE METHOD ........................................................................................... /4

Z H 220 SECOND ALTERNATIVE METHOD ..................................................................................... /6

Z H 230 THIRD ALTERNATIVE METHOD .......................................................................................... /6

ANNEX Z M ALTERNATIVE DESIGN RULES FOR

NICKEL-BASED ALLOY TUBES SUBJECTED
TO EXTERNAL PRESSURE ................................................................... An ZM/1
Z M 100 GENERAL .............................................................................................................................. /1

Z M 200 REQUIREMENTS ASSOCIATED WITH THE VARIOUS

CRITERIA LEVELS ........................................................................................................... /1

Z M 300 DESIGN METHOD.............................................................................................................. /1

Z M 310 NOMENCLATURE.................................................................................................................... /1

Z / 12  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition Subsection Z

Z M 320 SCOPE OF THE METHOD ...................................................................................................... /2

Z M 330 DETERMINATION OF THE ALLOWABLE PRESSURE.................................................... /2

ANNEX Z S CONSTRUCTIVE REQUIREMENTS LINKED

TO IN-SERVICE INSPECTIONS (FOR
MECHANICAL COMPONENTS OF
PWR PLANT NUCLEAR ISLANDS) ................................................. An ZS/1
Z S 100 INTRODUCTION ................................................................................................................. /1

Z S 200 DESIGN.................................................................................................................................... /1

Z S 210 GENERAL .................................................................................................................................. /1

Z S 220 CONSTRUCTIVE REQUIREMENTS LINKED TO COMPONENTS ................................. /2

Z S 221 General requirements linked to in-service inspections

Z S 222 Special requirements linked to periodic retests

Z S 230 CONSTRUCTIVE REQUIREMENTS LINKED TO TAPERING

(TAPERS, PROFILE CHANGES)........................................................................................... /3

Z S 300 MANUFACTURE ................................................................................................................. /3

Z S 310 SCOPE OF AREAS TO BE CHECKED ................................................................................ /3

Z S 320 IDENTIFICATION - MARKING ............................................................................................... /3

Z S 321 General
Z S 322 Identification number
Z S 323 Reference
Z S 324 Marking drawing

Z S 330 RECORDING OF WELD BEADS ........................................................................................... /5

Z S 340 SURFACE CONDITION ........................................................................................................... /5

Z S 341 External surfaces

Z S 342 Internal surfaces
Z S 343 Special requirements

Z S 350 REPAIRS .................................................................................................................................... /6

Z S 360 REFERENCE PARTS............................................................................................................... /6

Z S 400 GENERAL INSTALLATION (ERECTION) ............................................................. /6

Z S 410 CLEARANCES .......................................................................................................................... /6

Z S 411 General
Z S 412 Direct visual examination

 n° 137-2012 Z / 13
RCC-M - 2012 Edition Subsection Z

Z S 413 Remote visual examination

Z S 414 Surface examination - liquid penetrant and magnetic particle
Z S 415 Manual volumetric examination
Z S 416 Mechanical volumetric examination

Z S 420 ACCESSIBILITY, HEALTH PHYSICS................................................................................... /9

Z S 430 SCAFFOLDING AND FIXED CATWALKS........................................................................... /9

Z S 440 SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS FOR PIPING ........................................................................... /9

Z S 441 General
Z S 442 Clearances
Z S 443 Erection

Z S 500 HEAT INSULATION .......................................................................................................... /13

Z S 510 SCOPE........................................................................................................................................ /13

Z S 520 PRINCIPLES.............................................................................................................................. /13

Z S 530 SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS FOR PIPING ........................................................................... /13

Z S 600 PUMPS AND VALVES ..................................................................................................... /15

Z S 610 GENERAL .................................................................................................................................. /15

Z S 620 SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS APPLICABLE TO PRIMARY PUMPS................................ /15

Z S 700 SUPPORTS............................................................................................................................ /15

Annex ZY PROVISIONS APPLICABLE BY WAY OF ANNEX 1

OF DIRECTIVE 97/23/CE AND ITS TRANSPOSITION
INTO FRENCH LAW (DECREE 99-1046
DATED 13/12/1999) .............................................................................................. An ZY/1
ZY 100 PURPOSE .................................................................................................................................... /1

ZY 200 CORRESPONDENCE BETWEEN THE ESSENTIAL REQUIREMENTS

OF THE ORDER DATED 12/12/2005 AND THE RCC-M..................................... /2

ZY 210 CORRESPONDENCE BETWEEN THE ESSENTIAL REQUIREMENTS OF ANNEX 1

OF THE ORDER DATED 12/12/2005 AND THE SECTIONS OF THE RCC-M ................... /2

ZY 220 CORRESPONDENCE BETWEEN THE ESSENTIAL REQUIREMENTS OF ANNEX 2

OF THE ORDER DATED 12/12/2005 AND THE SECTIONS OF THE RCC-M ..................... /7

ZY 230 CORRESPONDENCE BETWEEN THE ESSENTIAL REQUIREMENTS OF ANNEX 3

OF THE ORDER DATED 12/12/2005 AND THE SECTIONS OF THE RCC-M ..................... /9

ZY 240 CORRESPONDENCE BETWEEN THE ESSENTIAL REQUIREMENTS OF ANNEX 4

OF THE ORDER DATED 12/12/2005 AND THE SECTIONS OF THE RCC-M ..................... /10

Z / 14  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition Subsection Z

ZY 300 HAZARDS ANALYSIS ........................................................................................................... /11

ZY 400 ACTIONS BY NOTIFIED BODIES, ACCEPTED BODIES,

ACCEPTED ORGANIZATIONS AND RECOGNIZED
THIRD PARTY ORGANIZATIONS .................................................................................. /11

ZY 500 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS .......................................................................................... /12

ZY 600 IDENTIFICATION OF EQUIPMENT ................................................................................ /12

ZY 700 EQUIPMENT AND ASSEMBLIES ................................................................................... /12

ZY 800 MATERIALS ................................................................................................................................ /13

ZY 900 SMALL COMPONENTS........................................................................................................ /13

ZY 1000 RADIATION PROTECTION ................................................................................................. /13

Annex ZZ PROVISIONS APPLICABLE BY WAY OF ANNEX 1

OF DIRECTIVE 97/23/CE AND ITS TRANSPOSITION
INTO FRENCH LAW (DECREE 99-1046
DATED 13/12/1999)................................................................................................. An ZZ/1

ZZ 100 PURPOSE .................................................................................................................................... /1

ZZ 200 CORRESPONDENCE BETWEEN THE ESSENTIAL

REQUIREMENTS OF ANNEX 1 OF DIRECTIVE 97/23/CE
AND ITS TRANSPOSITION INTO FRENCH LAW
(Decree 99-1046 dated 13/12/1999)
AND THE SECTIONS OF THE RCC-M. ...................................................................... /2

ZZ 300 HAZARDS ANALYSIS ........................................................................................................... /22

ZZ 400 ACTION BY NOTIFIED BODIES AND RECOGNIZED THIRD

PARTY ORGANIZATIONS .................................................................................................. /22

ZZ 500 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS .......................................................................................... /23

ZZ 600 IDENTIFICATION OF EQUIPMENT ................................................................................ /24

ZZ 700 EQUIPMENT AND ASSEMBLIES ................................................................................... /25

ZZ 710 GENERAL ........................................................................................................................................ /25

ZZ 720 FINAL CHECK ................................................................................................................................ /25

ZZ 721 Test pressures

 n° 137-2012 Z / 15
RCC-M - 2012 Edition Subsection Z

ZZ 800 MATERIALS................................................................................................................................ /27

ZZ 900 SMALL COMPONENTS ....................................................................................................... /27

Z / 16  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition Subsection Z

ANNEX Z I

PROPERTIES OF MATERIALS
TO BE USED IN DESIGN

Tables Z I 1.0 ALLOWABLE BASIC STRESS INTENSITY VALUES Sm

ALLOWABLE BASIC STRESS VALUES S

Table Z I 1.1 Allowable basic stress intensity values Sm for ferritic steels
Table Z I.1.2 Allowable basic stress intensity values Sm for stainless steels
and Ni-Cr-Fe alloys
Table Z I.1.3 Allowable basic stress intensity values Sm for bolting materials
Table Z I.1.4 Allowable basic stress values S for ferritic steels
Table Z I.1.5 Allowable basic stress values S for stainless steels
and Ni-Cr-Fe alloys
Table Z I.1.6 Allowable basic stress values S for bolting materials

Tables Z I 2.0 YIELD STRENGTH VALUES Sy

Table Z I 2.1 Yield strength values Sy for ferritic steels

Table Z I.2.2 Yield strength values Sy for stainless steels
and Ni-Cr-Fe alloys
Table Z I.2.3 Permanent strain limiting factors

Tables Z I 3.0 TENSILE STRENGTH VALUES Su

Table Z I 3.1 Tensile strength values Su for ferritic steels

Table Z I.3.2 Tensile strength values Su for stainless steels
and Ni-Cr-Fe alloys

Figures Z I 4.0 FATIGUE CURVES

Figure Z I 4.1 Fatigue curves for carbon and low alloy steels
Figure Z I.4.2 Fatigue curves for austenitic steels and nickel alloys
Figure Z I.4.3 Fatigue curves for steel bolting

Table Z I 5.0 CLASSIFICATION OF THE VARIOUS GRADES USED IN

THE RCC-M FOR PHYSICAL PROPERTIES
Table Z I 6.0 a THERMAL CONDUCTIVITY
Table Z I 6.0 b THERMAL DIFFUSIVITY
Table Z I 7.0 COEFFICIENTS OF LINEAR EXPANSION
Table Z I 8.0 MODULUS OF ELASTICITY

 n° 137-2012 Annex ZI / 1
 MIN Re MIN Rm Sy Su ALLOWABLE BASIC STRESS INTENSITY VALUES Sm IN MPa
PRODUCT AFNOR DIMENSION
TPS* in MPa in MPa at at
FORM GRADE (mm)
at 20°C at 20°C 20°C 20°C 50°C 100°C 150°C 200°C 250°C 300°C 340°C 350°C 360°C 370°C

Annex ZI / 2
M 1111 Casting 20 MN 5M 275 485 276 483 161 161 161 158 151 139 134 133 133 132
20 MN 5M 275 485 276 483 161 161 161 158 151 139 134 133 133 132
M 1112 Casting
20 M 5M 235 470 212 470 141 141 141 139 133 122 117 117 117 117
RCC-M - 2012 Edition

M 1114 Casting 20 MN 5M 275 485 276 483 161 161 161 158 151 139 134 133 133 132
23 M 5M 345 550 345 550 183 183 183 - - - - - - -
M 1115 Casting
20 CD 4M 345 550 345 550 183 183 183 - - - - - - -
P 245 GH
P 265 GH 215 410 215 410 137 134 127 124 117 105 96 95 - -
Forging
M 1122
(0) P 280 GH
P 295 GH 255 460 255 470 157 157 153 147 144 131 121 117 - -

M 1122 Forging A 42 215 410 215 410 137 134 127 124 117 105 96 95 - -
bis (0) A 48 255 470 255 470 157 157 153 147 144 131 121 117 - -
Rolled
M 1124 P 280 GH 275 470 275 470 157 157 157 157 144 124 - - - -
or Forging
Forging
M 1125 P 280 GH 275 470 275 470 157 157 157 157 144 124 - - - -
elbow
TABLE Z I 1.1

e  30 225 360 225 360 120 120 120 111 98 85 79 79 - -

P 235 GH
e > 30 185 360 185 360 120 120 111 105 98 85 79 79 - -
FOR FERRITIC STEELS

e  30 245 410 245 410 137 137 137 127 117 105 96 95 - -
P 265 GH
M 1131 e > 30 215 410 215 410 137 134 127 124 117 105 96 95 - -
Plate
M 1132 e  30 285 470 285 470 157 157 157 157 144 131 121 117 - -
P 295 GH
e > 30 255 470 255 470 157 157 153 147 144 131 121 117 - -
e  30 335 510 335 510 170 170 170 170 157 144 138 137 - -
P 355 GH
e > 30 305 510 305 510 170 170 170 170 157 144 138 137 - -
ALLOWABLE BASIC STRESS INTENSITY VALUES Sm

S 235 3  e  30 235 340 235 340 113 113 113 113 103 91 - - - -


M 1134 Plate S 275 3  e  30 275 400 275 400 133 133 133 133 120 107 - - - -
S 355 3  e  30 355 470 355 470 163 163 163 163 155 137 - - - -
M 1144 Pipe P 280 GH 275 470 275 470 157 157 157 157 144 124 - - - -
M 1152 Pipe P 280 GH 275 470 275 470 157 157 157 157 144 124 - - - -
Notes : (0) The values indicated cover thicknesses up to 110 mm
* TPS : Technical Procurement Specification

n° 137-2012
Subsection Z

MIN Re MIN Rm Sy Su ALLOWABLE BASIC STRESS INTENSITY VALUES Sm IN MPa
PRODUCT AFNOR DIMENSION
TPS* in MPa in MPa at at
FORM GRADE (mm)
at 20°C at 20°C 20°C 20°C 50°C 100°C 150°C 200°C 250°C 300°C 340°C 350°C 360°C 370°C

M 2111
M 2111 Bis
M 2112

n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition

M 2112 Bis
M 2113
M 2114
M 2115
M 2116 Forging 16 MND 5 400 550 345 552 184 184 184 184 184 184 184 184 184 184
M 2117
M 2119
M 2131
M 2135
M 2141
M 2142
M 2143
M 2121
M 2122
M 2125 Plate 16 MND 5 400 550 345 552 184 184 184 184 184 184 184 184 184 184
M 2126
M 2127
M 2115
TABLE Z I 1.1 (Cont. 1)

FOR FERRITIC STEELS

M 2131 Forging 18 MND 5 420 580 420 580 193 193 193 193 193 193 193 193 193 193
M 2143
M 2119
Forging 18 MND 5 450 600 450 600 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 200
M 2134
> 125 420 580 420 580 193 193 193 193 193 193 193 193 193 193
M 2133 Forging 18 MND 5
ALLOWABLE BASIC STRESS INTENSITY VALUES Sm

 125 450 600 450 600 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 200
M 2125 > 125 420 580 420 580 193 193 193 193 193 193 193 193 193 193
M 2126
Plate 18 MND 5
M 2127
M 2128  125 (1) 450 600 435 600 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 200

Notes : (1) This limit can be increased up to 160 mm by special agreement in the purchase order.
* TPS : Technical Procurement Specification

Annex ZI / 3
Subsection Z
Annex ZI / 4
RCC-M - 2012 Edition

MIN Re MIN Rm Sy Su ALLOWABLE BASIC STRESS INTENSITY VALUES Sm IN MPa

PRODUC AFNOR DIMENSION
TPS* in MPa in MPa at at
T FORM GRADE (mm)
at 20°C at 20°C 20°C 20°C 50°C 100°C 150°C 200°C 250°C 300°C 340°C 350°C 360°C 370°C

M 2115 Bis
M 2131 Bis Forged 20 MND 5 420 620 420 620 207 207 207 207 207 207 207 207 207 207
M 2143 Bis
M 2119 Bis
Forged 20 MND 5 450 620 450 620 207 207 207 207 207 207 207 207 207 207
M 2134 Bis

 125 450 620 450 620 207 207 207 207 207 207 207 207 207 207
M 2133 Bis Forged 20 MND 5
>125 420 620 450 620 207 207 207 207 207 207 207 207 207 207
 125 450 620 450 620 207 207 207 207 207 207 207 207 207 207
M 2126 Bis Plate 20 MND 5
TABLE Z I 1.1 (Cont. 2)

FOR FERRITIC STEELS

>125 420 620 420 620 207 207 207 207 207 207 207 207 207 207
M 2132 Forged 30 M 5 280 550 280 550 183 183 - - - - - - - -
M 2321 Plate 20 NDC 14.07 600 750 600 750 250 250 - - - - - - - -

* TPS : Technical Procurement Specification

ALLOWABLE BASIC STRESS INTENSITY VALUES Sm


n° 137-2012
Subsection Z

MIN Re MIN Rm Sy Su ALLOWABLE BASIC STRESS INTENSITY VALUES Sm IN MPa
PRODUCT AFNOR DIMENSION
TPS* in MPa in MPa at at
FORM GRADE (mm)
at 20°C at 20°C 20°C 20°C 50°C 100°C 150°C 200°C 250°C 300°C 340°C 350°C 360°C 370°C

M 3203 Plate Z10 C13 400 550 400 550 183 183 180 176 175 170 166 165 163 161
M 3205 Forging Z12 CN13 620 760 620 758 253 252 247 244 240 233 229 229 229 229

n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition

Z5 CND 13.04 550 760 552 758 253 252 247 242 238 234 229 228 226 225
M 3208 Casting Z5 CN 12.01 380 540 in preparation
Z6 CNU 17.04 720 900 in preparation
  150 520 517 138 138 138 130 122 115 111 111 111 110
Z6 CN 18.10 210 207
 > 150 485 483 138 138 138 130 122 115 111 111 111 110
  150 520 517 138 138 138 130 122 115 111 111 111 110
Z5 CN 18.10 210 207
 > 150 485 483 138 138 138 130 122 115 111 111 111 110
  150 490 483 114 114 114 109 102 97 94 94 94 93
Z2 CN 18.10 175 173
 > 150 450 448 114 114 114 109 102 97 94 94 94 93
Z2 CN 19.10   150 520 517 138 138 138 130 122 115 111 111 111 110
controlled 210 207
TABLE Z I 1.2

nitrogen content  > 150 485 483 138 138 138 130 122 115 111 111 111 110
M 3301 Forging
(1) (2)   150 540 517 138 138 138 138 137 134 131 130 129 128
Z6 CNNb 18.11 220 207
 > 150 490 483 138 138 138 138 137 134 131 130 129 128
M 3306 Rolled bar
(1) (2)   150 540 517 138 138 138 130 122 115 112 111 111 110
Z8 CNT 18.11 220 207
 > 150 490 483 138 138 138 130 122 115 112 111 111 110
  150 520 517 138 138 138 134 126 119 115 114 113 112
FOR STAINLESS STEELS AND Ni-Cr-Fe ALLOYS

Z6 CND 17.12 210 207

 > 150 485 483 138 138 138 134 126 119 115 114 113 112
ALLOWABLE BASIC STRESS INTENSITY VALUES Sm

  150 520 517 138 138 138 134 126 119 115 114 113 112
Z5 CND 17.12 210 207
 > 150 485 483 138 138 138 134 126 119 115 114 113 112
  150 490 483 115 115 115 108 100 95 91 90 90 89
Z2 CND 17.12 175 173
 > 150 450 448 115 115 115 108 100 95 91 90 90 89
* TPS : Technical Procurement Specification

Annex ZI / 5
Subsection Z
 MIN Re MIN Rm Sy Su ALLOWABLE BASIC STRESS INTENSITY VALUES Sm IN MPa
PRODUCT AFNOR DIMENSION
TPS* in MPa in MPa at at
FORM GRADE (mm)
at 20°C at 20°C 20°C 20°C 50°C 100°C 150°C 200°C 250°C 300°C 340°C 350°C 360°C 370°C

Annex ZI / 6
Z2 CND 18.12   150 520 207 517 138 138 138 134 126 119 115 114 113 112
Forging controlled nitrogen 220
content  > 150 485 207 483 138 138 138 134 126 119 115 114 113 112
M 3301 (1) (2)
RCC-M - 2012 Edition

  150 540
M 3306 Z8 CNDT 18.12 230 in preparation
Rolled bar  > 150 490
M 3317
(1) (2)   150 540
Z8 CND Nb 18.12 230 in preparation
 > 150 490
Forging Z3 CN 18.10
M 3302 controlled nitrogen 205 485 207 483 138 138 130 120 112 107 104 104 103 102
(2) content
Z5 CN 18.10 210 520 207 517 138 138 138 130 122 115 111 111 111 110
Z5 CND 17.12 210 520 207 517 138 138 138 134 126 119 115 114 113 112
Z2 CN 19.10
controlled nitrogen 210 520 207 517 138 138 138 130 122 115 111 111 111 110
M 3303 Pipe content
M 3319 (2) Z2 CN 18.10 175 490 173 483 115 115 115 109 103 96 94 94 93 93
Z2 CND 18.12
controlled nitrogen 220 520 207 517 138 138 138 134 126 119 115 114 113 112
content
Z2 CND 17.12 175 490 173 483 115 115 115 108 100 95 91 90 90 89
TABLE Z I 1.2 (Cont. 1)

Z6 CN 18.10
210 520 207 517 138 138 138 130 122 115 111 111 111 110
Z5 CN 18.10
Z6 CND 17.12
210 520 207 517 138 138 138 134 126 119 115 114 113 112
Z5 CND 17.12
M 3304 Z2 CN 19.10
FOR STAINLESS STEELS AND Ni-Cr-Fe ALLOYS

Pipe controlled nitrogen 210 520 207 517 138 138 138 130 122 115 111 111 111 110
ALLOWABLE BASIC STRESS INTENSITY VALUES Sm

M 3320 content
(2)


M 3317 Z2 CN 18.10 175 490 173 483 115 115 115 109 103 98 94 94 93 93
Z2 CND 18.12
controlled nitrogen 220 520 207 517 138 138 138 134 126 119 115 114 113 112
content
Z2 CND 17.12 175 490 173 483 115 115 115 108 100 95 91 90 90 89

* TPS : Technical Procurement Specification

n° 137-2012
Subsection Z

MIN Re MIN Rm Sy Su
PRODUCT AFNOR DIMENSION ALLOWABLE BASIC STRESS INTENSITY VALUES Sm IN MPa
TPS* in MPa in MPa at at
FORM GRADE (mm) 50°C 100°C 150°C 200°C 250°C 300°C 340°C 350°C 360°C 370°C
at 20°C at 20°C 20°C 20°C
Z2 CND 18.12
controlled nitrogen   30 450 655 448 654 218 216 206 200 198 198 198 198 198 198
Bar
M 3308 content
(1) (2) Z2 CND 17.12

n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition

Z6 CND 17.12 30<  50 450 590 448 586 195 195 185 178 177 177 177 177 177 177

Z6 CN 18.10
Z5 CN 18.10 210 520 207 517 138 138 138 130 122 115 111 111 111 110
Z2 CN 19.10
controlled nitrogen 210 520 207 517 138 138 138 130 122 115 111 111 111 110
M 3307 content
Z6 CND 17.12
M 3312 Z5 CND 17.12 210 520 207 517 138 138 138 134 126 119 115 114 113 112

Plate Z2 CND 18.12

M 3314 controlled nitrogen 220 520 207 517 138 138 138 134 126 119 115 114 113 112
(2)
content
M 3315 Z2 CN 18.10 173 483 115 115 115 109 103 98 94 94 93 93
175 490
M 3317 Z2 CND 17.12 173 483 115 115 115 108 100 95 91 90 90 89
Z6 CNNb 18.11 220 540 207 517 138 138 138 138 137 134 131 130 129 128
Z8 CNT 18.11 220 540 207 517 138 138 138 129 120 115 111 111 110 110
Z8 CNDT 18.12 230 540 in preparation
Z8 CNDNb 18.12 230 540 in preparation
TABLE Z I 1.2 (Cont. 2)

Forging
M 3309 Z6 CNNb 18.11 210 480 207 483 138 138 138 132 128 126 125 125 125 125
(2)

Plate Z2 CN 19.10
M 3310 controlled nitrogen 210 520 207 517 138 138 138 130 122 115 111 111 111 110
(2) content
FOR STAINLESS STEELS AND Ni-Cr-Fe ALLOYS

X2 CrNiMo 18.12
controlled nitrogen
ALLOWABLE BASIC STRESS INTENSITY VALUES Sm

Forging content
M 3321 X2 CrNi 19.10 210 510 207 483 138 138 138 134 126 119 115 114 113 112
(2)
controlled nitrogen
content
Casting
M 3401 Z3 CN 20.09 M 210 480 207 483 138 138 137 122 114 110 105 105 104 104
(2)
* TPS : Technical Procurement Specification

Annex ZI / 7
Subsection Z
 MIN Re MIN Rm Sy Su ALLOWABLE BASIC STRESS INTENSITY VALUES Sm IN MPa
PRODUCT AFNOR DIMENSION
TPS* in MPa in MPa at at
FORM GRADE (mm)

Annex ZI / 8
at 20°C at 20°C 20°C 20°C 50°C 100°C 150°C 200°C 250°C 300°C 340°C 350°C 360°C 370°C

M 3402 Casting Z3 CND 19.10 M 210 480 207 483 138 138 138 132 124 118 114 113 112 112
M 3403 (2)
RCC-M - 2012 Edition

Z3 CN 20.09 M 210 480 207 483 138 138 137 122 114 110 105 105 104 104
M 3406 Pipe (2) Z3 CN 20.09 M 210 480 207 483 138 138 138 130 122 115 111 111 111 110
NC 15 Fe 240 550 241 552 161 161 161 161 161 161 161 161 161 161
M 4102
Forged
or NC15FeTNbA 655 1070 655 1070 357 357 357 357 356 350 347 347 346 345
M 4104
Rolled
M 4106 (2)
M 4108 NC 30 Fe 240 550 241 552 161 161 161 161 161 161 161 161 161 161
M 4109
345 NC 15 Fe
Pipe (2) 240 550 241 552 161 161 161 161 161 161 161 161 161 161
161 NC 30 Fe
M 4105 Pipe (2) NC 30 Fe 275 630 276 630 183 183 183 183 183 183 183 183 183 183
X6 CrNiCu 17.04 790 (3) 960 793 965 320 320 320 313 307 302 (5) - - - -
Rolled or
M 5110 X5 CrNiCuMo 15-06 790 960 793 965 320 320 320 313 307 302 299 298 - -
forged bar
TABLE Z I 1.2 (Cont. 3)

(4) (5)
X6 CrNiCuMo 15.04 720 930 724 931 310 310 310 303 296 292 - - - -

Notes : (1) In certain cases "dia" signifies thickness.

(2) At temperatures above 38°C, allowable basic stress intensity values may exceed 2/3 (66%) and may even reach 90% of the 0.2% yield strength for a given temperature.
This may result in permanent strain of 0.1%. If this amount of deformation in unacceptable, the allowable basic stress intensity value should be reduced so as to obtain
FOR STAINLESS STEELS AND Ni-Cr-Fe ALLOYS

an intensity value which will result in lower levels of permanent strain.

ALLOWABLE BASIC STRESS INTENSITY VALUES Sm

(3) For class A parts. Note 3 applies to the whole line.


(4) For class B parts. Note 4 applies to the whole line.
(5) For use at temperature  300°C for short time periods.

* TPS : Technical Procurement Specification

n° 137-2012
Subsection Z

MIN Re MIN Rm Sy Su ALLOWABLE BASIC STRESS INTENSITY VALUES Sm IN MPa
PRODUCT AFNOR DIMENSION
TPS* in MPa in MPa at at
FORM GRADE (mm)
at 20°C at 20°C 20°C 20°C 50°C 100°C 150°C 200°C 250°C 300°C 340°C 350°C 360°C 370°C

Forged
M 2311 40 NCDV 07.03  300 900 1000 896 1000 295 284 276 268 261 251(4) 241(4) 239(4) 236(4) 232(4)
bar
40 NCDV 07.03
 300 900 1000 896 1000 295 284 276 268 261 251(4) 241(4) 239(4) 236(4) 232(4)

n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition

40 NCD 07.03 Class B

M 2312 40 NCD 07.03 Class A  300 830 930 827 931 273 262 254 248 241 232 222 220 217 217(4)
Forged
or
rolled 40 NCD 07.03 Class C  300 965 1070 965 1069 318 306 297 288 280 271(4) 261(4) 258(4) 254(4) 250(4)
bar
M 4102
NC15FeTNbA 655 1070 655 1070 212 210 206 203 200 199 197 197 196 196
M 4104

 65 720 860 724 862 236 224 216 211 204 198 191 189 187 185(4)
42 Cr Mo 4 65<105 650 790 655 793 214 202 195 190 185 179 173 171 170 168
105<180 520 690 517 689 168 160 154 150 146 142 137 136 134 132
TABLE Z I 1.3

Rolled  65 725 865 724 862 239 233 228 224 220 210 205 204 204 203(4)
or
42 CDV 4 65<105 655 790 655 793 217 211 207 203 200 195 189 188 185 183
forged bar
FOR BOLTING MATERIALS

(5) 105<180 585 690 586 689 194 189 185 181 178 174 169 168 166 164
X12 CrNi 13
M 5110  100 590 760 586 758 193 185 180 174 170 166 163 163 161 161
X12 Cr 13
X6 CrNiMo 16-04 700 900 700 900 231 226 222 217 212 208(2) 203(2) 200(2) - -
ALLOWABLE BASIC STRESS INTENSITY VALUES Sm

X5 CrNiCuMo 15-06  150 790 960 793 965 258 243 234 226 220 217 212 210 - -
(6)
X6 CrNiCuMo 15-04
 200 790 960 793 965 258 243 234 226 220 217(2) 212(2) 210(2) - -
X6 CrNiCu 17-04
Z6 CN 18.10
210 520 207 517 67 58 50 46 43 41 39 39 39 39
Z5 CN 18.10
Z6 CND 17.12
210 520 207 517 67 58 54 50 47 44 42 42 41 41
Z5 CND 17.12
* TPS : Technical Procurement Specification

Annex ZI / 9
Subsection Z
Annex ZI / 10
MIN Re MIN Rm Sy Su ALLOWABLE BASIC STRESS INTENSITY VALUES Sm IN MPa
PRODUCT AFNOR DIMENSION
RCC-M - 2012 Edition

TPS* in MPa in MPa at at

FORM GRADE (mm)
at 20°C at 20°C 20°C 20°C 50°C 100°C 150°C 200°C 250°C 300°C 340°C 350°C 360°C 370°C

20 655 760 655 758 214 199 190 182 176 173 171 170 170 168
Z6 CN 18.10
Z5 CN 18.10 20<25 550 690 552 689 180 168 160 153 149 146 144 143 143 142
(1)
M 5110 Z6 CND 17.12 25<35 450 655 448 654 147 137 130 125 121 119 117 117 116 115
Z5 CND 17.12
35<40 350 620 345 620 113 105 100 96 93 91 90 90 89 89

(6) X6 NiCrTiMoVB 25-15-2 590 900 586 896 194 190 188 188 187 186 185 185 185 185
Rolled
M 4104 NC 15 Fe TNbA 655 1070 in preparation
bar
Notes : (1) Bars work-hardened after solution heat treatment.
(2) For use at temperature  300°C for short time period.
TABLE Z I 1.3 (Cont.)

(3) Note not used

FOR BOLTING MATERIALS

(4) These stress values may result in relaxation of the bolting materials after prolonged service at temperature and the designer is to investigate the effect of this relaxation upon
the application.
(5) Carbon steels according to Standard NF EN 10083-1.
Stress values may be indicated in table ZI 1.3 for these types of steels at the user's request.
ALLOWABLE BASIC STRESS INTENSITY VALUES Sm

(6) Solution-treated and precipitation hardened.


* TPS : Technical Procurement Specification

n° 137-2012
Subsection Z

MIN Re MIN Rm Sy Su ALLOWABLE BASIC STRESS VALUES S IN MPa
PRODUCT AFNOR DIMENSION
TPS* in MPa in MPa at at
FORM GRADE (mm)
at 20°C at 20°C 20°C 20°C 50°C 100°C 150°C 200°C 250°C 300°C 340°C 350°C 360°C 370°C

20 MN 5M 275 485 276 483 138 138 138 138 138 138 134 133 133 133
M 1112 Casting
20 M 5M 235 470 212 470 134 134 134 134 133 122 117 117 117 117

n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition

M 1114 Casting 20 MN 5M 275 485 276 483 138 138 138 138 138 138 134 133 133 133
A 42 215 410 215 410 117 117 117 117 117 105 96 95 - -
M 1121 Forging
A 48 255 470 255 470 134 134 134 134 134 131 121 117 - -
P 245 GH
Forging P 265 GH 215 410 215 410 117 117 117 117 117 105 96 95 - -
M 1122 P 280 GH
(0) 255 460 255 470 134 134 134 134 134 131 121 117 - -
P 295 GH
M 1122 Forging A 42 215 410 215 410 117 117 117 117 117 105 96 95 - -
bis (0) A 48 255 470 255 470 134 134 134 134 134 131 121 117 - -
Rolled or
M 1124 P 280 GH 275 470 275 470 134 134 134 134 134 134 - - - -
forging
Forging
M 1125 P 280 GH 275 470 275 470 134 134 134 134 134 134 - - - -
elbow
M 1131 e  30 225 360 225 360 103 103 103 103 98 85 79 79 - -
TABLE Z I 1.4

P 235 GH
M 1132 e > 30 185 360 185 360 103 103 103 103 98 85 79 79 - -
FOR FERRITIC STEELS

M 1133 e  30 245 410 245 410 117 117 117 117 117 105 96 95 - -
M 1145 P 265 GH
e > 30 215 410 215 410 117 117 117 117 117 105 96 95 - -
M 5130 Plate
e  30 285 470 285 470 134 134 134 134 134 131 121 117 - -
ALLOWABLE BASIC STRESS VALUES S

M 5131 P 295 GH
e > 30 255 470 255 470 134 134 134 134 134 131 121 117 - -
e  30 335 510 335 510 146 146 146 146 146 144 138 137 - -
P 355 GH
e > 30 305 510 305 510 146 146 146 146 146 144 138 137 - -
S 235 3  e  30 235 340 235 340 97 97 97 97 97 91 - - - -
M 1134 Plate S 275 3  e  30 275 400 275 400 114 114 114 114 114 106 - - - -
S 355 3  e  30 355 470 355 470 134 134 134 134 134 134 - - - -

NOTE : (0) The values indicated cover thicknesses up to 110 mm

Annex ZI / 11
Subsection Z

* TPS : Technical Procurement Specification

Annex ZI / 12
MIN Re MIN Rm Sy Su ALLOWABLE BASIC STRESS VALUES
RCC-M - 2012 Edition

PRODUC AFNOR DIMENSION

S IN MPa
TPS* in MPa in MPa at at
T FORM GRADE (mm)
at 20°C at 20°C 20°C 20°C 50°C 100°C 150°C 200°C 250°C 300°C 340°C 350°C 360°C 370°C

TU 42C 235 410 235 410 117 117 117 117 117 105 99 98 - -
M 1141 Pipe
TU 48C 275 470 275 470 134 134 134 134 134 124 114 111 - -

P 235 GH 235 360 235 360 103 103 103 103 97 81 - - - -

M 1142 Pipe
P 265 GH 265 410 265 410 117 117 117 117 113 99 - - - -
P 235 GH 235 360 235 360 103 103 103 103 97 81 - - - -
M 1143 Pipe
P 265 GH 265 410 265 410 117 117 117 117 113 99 - - - -

M 1143 ≤ 30 345 490 345 490 - 138 135 129 129 129 - 126 - -
Pipe P 355 NH
Bis 30 < e ≤ 50 335 490 335 490 - 132 129 123 123 123 - 119 - -
M 1144 Pipe P 280 GH 275 470 275 470 134 134 134 134 134 124 114 111 - -
TABLE Z I 1.4 (Cont.)

FOR FERRITIC STEELS

M 1147 Pipe P 265 GH 265 410 265 410 117 117 117 117 117 105 99 98 - -
TS 42C 255 410 255 410 117 117 117 117 117 105 - - - -
M 1148 Pipe
TS 48C 275 470 275 470 134 134 134 134 134 124 - - - -
ALLOWABLE BASIC STRESS VALUES S

M 1152 Pipe P 280 GH 275 470 275 470 134 134 134 134 134 124 - - - -

* TPS : Technical Procurement Specification


n° 137-2012
Subsection Z

Sy Su
MIN Re MIN Rm ALLOWABLE BASIC STRESS VALUES S IN MPa
PRODUCT DIMENSION at at
TPS* AFNOR GRADE in MPa in MPa
FORM (mm) 20° 20°
at 20°C at 20°C 50°C 100°C 150°C 200°C 250°C 300°C 340°C 350°C 360°C 370°C
C C
Z5 CND 16.04 635 780 635 785 in preparation
M 3204 Forging
Z5 CND 13.04 685 780 in preparation

n° 137-2012
Z5 CND 13.04 550 760 552 758 216 216 212 207 204 200 196 195 194 193
RCC-M - 2012 Edition

M 3208 Casting Z5 CN 12.01 380 540 in preparation

Z6 CNU 17.04 720 900 in preparation
Z5 CN 18.10  ≤ 150 520 207 517 140 139 130 127 121 115 112 112 111 110
210
Z6 CN 18.10  > 150 485 207 483 134 129 121 119 117 115 112 112 111 110
 ≤ 150 490 173 483 117 117 117 109 102 97 94 94 93 92
Z2 CN 18.10 175
 > 150 450 173 448 117 117 111 108 102 97 94 94 93 92
Z2 CN 19.10  ≤ 150 520 207 517 140 139 130 127 121 115 112 112 111 110
controlled 210
nitrogen content  > 150 485 207 483 134 129 121 119 117 115 112 112 111 110
 ≤ 150 540 207 517 146 140 130 123 119 117 116 116 115 115
Z6 CNNb 18.11 220
 > 150 490 207 483 137 131 122 114 111 110 108 108 107 107
 ≤ 150 540 207 517 147 144 137 129 120 115 111 110 109 108
Forging Z8 CNT 18.11 220
 > 150 490 207 483 138 134 127 126 120 113 111 110 109 108
TABLE Z I 1.5

M 3301 (1) (2)

 ≤ 150 520 207 517 140 140 140 133 124 118 115 114 113 112
M 3306 Z6 CND 17.12 210
Rolled bar  > 150 485 207 483 138 138 135 132 124 118 115 114 113 112
M 3317
(1) (2)  ≤ 150 520 207 517 140 140 140 133 124 118 115 114 113 112
Z5 CND 17.12 210
 > 150 485 207 483 138 138 135 132 124 118 115 114 113 112
 ≤ 150 490 173 483 117 117 116 107 100 94 90 89 89 88
ALLOWABLE BASIC STRESS VALUES S

Z2 CND 17.12 175

 > 150 450 173 448 117 117 116 107 100 94 90 89 89 88
Z2 CND 18.12
FOR STAINLESS STEELS AND Ni-Cr-Fe ALLOYS

 ≤ 150 520 207 517 140 140 140 133 124 118 115 114 113 112
controlled 220
nitrogen content  > 150 485 207 483 138 138 135 132 124 118 115 114 113 112
 ≤ 150 540 in preparation
Z8 CNDT 18.12 230
 > 150 490 in preparation
 ≤ 150 540 in preparation
Z8 CNDNb 18.12 230
 > 150 490 in preparation

** TPS : Technical Procurement Specification

Annex ZI / 13
Subsection Z
 MIN Re MIN Rm Sy Su ALLOWABLE BASIC STRESS VALUES S IN MPa
PRODUCT AFNOR DIMENSIO
TPS* in MPa in MPa at at
FORM GRADE N (mm)
at 20°C at 20°C 20°C 20°C 50°C 100°C 150°C 200°C 250°C 300°C 340°C 350°C 360°C 370°C
Z5 CN 18.10 210 520 207 517 140 139 130 127 121 115 112 112 111 110

Annex ZI / 14
Z2 CN 18.10 175 490 173 483 117 117 117 109 102 97 94 94 93 92
Z2 CN 19.10
controlled 210 520 207 517 140 139 130 127 121 115 112 112 111 110
RCC-M - 2012 Edition

M 3303 Pipe nitrogen content

M 3319 (2) Z5 CND 17.12 210 520 207 517 140 140 140 133 124 118 115 114 113 112
Z2 CND 17.12 175 490 173 483 117 117 116 107 100 94 90 89 89 88
Z2 CND 18.12
controlled 220 520 207 517 140 140 140 133 124 118 115 114 113 112
nitrogen content
Z6 CN 18.10
Z5 CN 18.10 210 520 207 517 140 139 130 127 121 115 112 112 111 110
Z2 CN 18.10 175 490 173 483 117 117 117 109 102 97 94 94 93 92
Z2 CN 19.10
M 3304 controlled 210 520 207 517 140 139 130 127 121 115 112 112 111 110
Pipe nitrogen content
M 3317 (2) Z6 CND 17.12
Z5 CND 17.12 210 520 207 517 140 140 140 133 124 118 115 114 113 112
M 3320
Z2 CND 17.12 175 490 173 483 117 117 116 107 100 94 90 89 89 88
Z2 CND 18.12
controlled 220 520 207 517 130 130 127 125 124 120 115 114 113 112
nitrogen content
Z6 CN 18.10
210 520 207 517 140 139 130 127 121 115 112 112 111 110
TABLE Z I 1.5 (Cont. 1)

Z5 CN 18.10
Z2 CN 18.10 175 490 173 483 117 117 117 109 102 97 94 94 93 92
Z2 CN 19.10
controlled 210 520 207 517 140 139 130 127 121 115 112 112 111 110
nitrogen content
ALLOWABLE BASIC STRESS VALUES S

M 3307
Z6 CNNb 18.11 220 540 207 517 146 140 130 123 119 117 116 116 115 115
M 3312
FOR STAINLESS STEELS AND Ni-Cr-Fe ALLOYS

Plate Z5 CND 17.12

Z6 CND 17.12 210 520 207 517 140 140 140 133 124 118 115 114 113 112
M 3314 (2)
Z8 CNT 18.11 220 540 207 517 147 144 137 129 120 115 111 110 109 108


M 3315
M 3317 Z8 CNDT 18.12 230 540 in preparation
Z8 CNDNb 18.12 230 540 in preparation
Z2 CND 18.12
controlled 220 520 207 517 140 140 140 133 124 118 115 114 113 112
nitrogen content
Z2 CND 17.12 175 490 173 483 117 117 116 107 100 94 90 89 89 88
* TPS : Technical Procurement Specification

n° 137-2012
Subsection Z

n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition

MIN Re MIN Rm Sy Su ALLOWABLE BASIC STRESS VALUES S IN MPa

PRODUCT AFNOR DIMENSION
TPS* in MPa in MPa at at
FORM GRADE (mm)
at 20°C at 20°C 20°C 20°C 50°C 100°C 150°C 200°C 250°C 300°C 340°C 350°C 360°C 370°C
Z2 CN 18.10 175 490 173 483 117 117 111 108 102 97 95 94 93 92
M 3311 Forging
Z2 CND 17.12 175 490 173 483 117 117 116 107 100 94 90 89 89 88
Casting Z3 CND 19.10 M 210 480 207 483 137 137 126 121 113 108 106 105 104 103
M 3402
(3) Z3 CN 20.09 M 210 480 207 483 137 137 137 133 125 119 114 114 113 112
NC 15 Fe 240 550 241 552 157 157 157 157 157 157 157 157 157 157
M 4102
Rolled NC15FeTNbA 655 1070 655 1070 306 306 306 306 305 300 298 297 297 296
M 4104 or forged
M 4106 (2)
M 4108 NC 30Fe 240 550 241 552 157 157 157 157 157 157 157 157 157 157
M 4109
M 4103 Plate NC 15 Fe
240 550 241 552 137 133 130 127 127 127 127 127 127 127
TABLE Z I 1.5 (Cont. 2)

M 4107 (2) NC 30 Fe

M 4301 Casting UA9N 5 Fe Y200 240 630 in preparation

ALLOWABLE BASIC STRESS VALUES S

X6 CrNiCu 17-04 790 (4) 960 793 965 274 274 274 269 263 259(6) - - - -
Rolled
FOR STAINLESS STEELS AND Ni-Cr-Fe ALLOYS

M 5110 or forged X6 CrNiCuMo 15-04 720 (5) 930 724 931 266 266 266 259 254 251(6) - - - -
bar
X5 CrNiCuMo 15-06 790 960 793 965 274 274 274 269 263 259 256 256 - -

Annex ZI / 15
Subsection Z
Annex ZI / 16
Notes (1) In certain cases, "dia" signifies thickness.
(2) At temperature above 38°C, the allowable basic stress values may exceed 62.5% and may also reach 90% yield strength (0.2% offset) at temperature. This may result
in a permanent strain of as much as 0.1%. When this amount of deformation is not acceptable, the designer should reduce the allowable basic stress value to obtain an
RCC-M - 2012 Edition

acceptable deformation. Table ZI.2.4 lists multiplying factors which, when applied to the yield strength values shown on table ZI.2.2 will give an allowable basic
stress which will result in lower levels of permanents strain.
(3) Statically and centrifugally cast products, pipe fittings, pumps and valves with inlet piping connections nominally  51 mm shall receive a casting quality factor of
1.00. Other casting quality factors shall be in accordance with the following :

Method of examination Quality Factor

(a) Visual 0.80

(b) Magnetic Particle 0.85
(c) Liquid Penetrant 0.85
(d) Radiography 1.00
(e) Ultrasonic 1.00
(f) Magnetic Particle or Liquid Penetrant + Ultrasonic or Radiography 1.00

(4) For class A parts - Note 4 applies to the whole line

(5) For class B parts - Note 5 applies to the whole line
TABLE Z I 1.5 (Cont. 3)

(6) For use at temperature ≥ 300°C for short time periods

* TPS : Technical Procurement Specification

ALLOWABLE BASIC STRESS VALUES S
FOR STAINLESS STEELS AND Ni-Cr-Fe ALLOYS


n° 137-2012
Subsection Z

MIN Re MIN Rm Sy Su ALLOWABLE BASIC STRESS VALUES S IN MPa
PRODUCT AFNOR DIMENSION
TPS* in MPa in MPa at at
FORM GRADE (mm)
at 20°C at 20°C 20°C 20°C 50°C 100°C 150°C 200°C 250°C 300°C 340°C 350°C 360°C 370°C

n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition

M 4102 Forged
or NC15FeTNbA 655 1070 655 1070 164 164 164 164 164 164 164 164 164 164
M 4104 rolled
Rolled or  ≤ 65 720 860 724 862 172 172 172 172 172 172 172 172 172 172
forged bar
(4) (7)** 42 Cr Mo 4 65 <  ≤ 105 720 860 724 862 159 159 159 159 159 159 159 159 159 159
(5)
105 <   180 520 690 517 689 129 129 129 129 129 129 129 129 129 129

 ≤ 65 725 865 724 862 172 172 172 172 172 172 172 172 172 172

(5) 42 CDV 4 65 <  ≤ 105 655 790 655 793 152 152 152 152 152 152 152 152 152 152

105 <   180 585 690 586 689 138 138 138 138 138 138 138 138 138 138
M 5110
TABLE Z I 1.6

X12 Cr 13
X12 CrNi 13   100 590 760 586 758 146 146 146 146 146 146 146 146 146 146

X6 CrNiMo 16-04 700 900 700 900 175 175 175 175 175 175(8) 175(8) 175(8) - -
FOR BOLTING MATERIALS

X5 CrNiCuMo 15-06   150 790 960 793 965 193 193 193 193 193 193 193 193 - -
(3)
X6 CrNiCuMo 15-04
ALLOWABLE BASIC STRESS VALUES S

X6 CrNiCu 17-04   200 790 960 793 965 193 193 193 193 193 193(8) 193(8) 193(8) - -
Z6 CN 18.10
(6) Z5 CN 18.10 210 520 207 517 124 107 96 89 84 80 77 77 76 76
Z6 CND 17.12
(6) Z5 CND 17.12 210 520 207 517 125 110 101 92 87 82 80 79 78 78

* TPS : Technical Procurement Specification

** Notes (4) and (7) are applicable to all grades of specifiction M 5110.

Annex ZI / 17
Subsection Z
 MIN Re MIN Rm Sy Su ALLOWABLE BASIC STRESS VALUES S IN MPa
PRODUC AFNOR DIMENSION
TPS* in MPa in MPa at at
T FORM GRADE (mm)

Annex ZI / 18
at 20°C at 20°C 20°C 20°C 50°C 100°C 150°C 200°C 250°C 300°C 340°C 350°C 360°C 370°C

  20 655 760 655 758 152 152 152 152 152 152 152 152 152 152
RCC-M - 2012 Edition

Z6 CN 18.10 20 <   25 550 690 552 689 138 138 138 138 138 138 138 138 138 138
Z5 CN 18.10
(1) Z6 CND 17.12
Z5 CND 17.12 25 <   35 450 655 448 654 113 113 113 113 113 113 113 113 113 113
M 5110
35 <   40 350 620 345 620 88 88 88 88 88 88 88 88 88 88

(3) X6 NiCrTiMoVB 25-15-2 590 900 586 896 145 143 141 140 139 139 139 139 139 139

Z12 CNDV 12.02 650 850 in preparation

Notes (1) Bars work hardened after solution heat treatment.

(2) Note not utilised
(3) solution-treatment and precipitation hardened.
(4) These values are established from a consideration of strength only and will be satisfactory for average service. For bolted joints, where freedom from leakage
TABLE Z I 1.6 (Cont.)

over a long period of time without retightening is required, lower stress values may be necessary as determined from the relative flexibility of the flanges and
bolts and concomitant relaxation properties.
FOR BOLTING MATERIALS

(5) Between temperatures of – 30°C and + 200°C, stress values are set equal to the following : 20% of the specified minimum tensile strength at 20°C or 25% of
the specified minimum yield strength at 20°C.
ALLOWABLE BASIC STRESS VALUES S

(6) Theses stress values permitted only for material that has been carbide-solution treated.
(7) Carbon steels according to Standard NF EN 10083-1.
Stress values may be indicated in table ZI 1.6 at the users' request.


(8) For use at temperature  300°C for short time periods

* TPS : Technical Procurement Specification

** Notes (4) and (7) are applicable to all grades of specification M 5110.

n° 137-2012
Subsection Z

MIN Re MIN Rm Sy Su YIELD STRENGTH VALUES Sy IN MPa
PRODUCT AFNOR DIMENSION
TPS* in MPa in MPa at at
FORM GRADE (mm) 50°C 100°C 150°C 200°C 250°C 300°C 340°C 350°C 360°C 370°C
at 20°C at 20°C 20°C 20°C

M 1111 Casting 20 MN 5M 275 485 276 483 276 250 245 237 227 209 201 200 200 199
20 MN 5M 275 485 276 483 276 250 245 237 227 209 201 200 200 199
M 1112 Casting
20 M 5M 235 470 212 470 212 212 212 208 199 183 176 176 176 175

n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition

M 1114 Casting 20 MN 5M 275 485 276 483 In preparation - - - - - - - -

23 M 5M 345 550 345 550 330 315 300 - - - - - - -
M 1115 Casting
20 CD 4M 345 550 345 550 330 315 300 - - - - - - -
A 42 215 410 215 410 211 201 191 186 176 157 144 142 - -
M 1121 Forging
A 48 255 470 255 470 250 240 230 220 216 196 181 176 - -
P 245 GH
Forging P 265 GH 215 410 215 410 211 201 191 186 176 157 144 142 - -
M 1122 P 280 GH
(0) 255 460 255 470 250 240 230 220 216 196 181 176 - -
P 295 GH
M 1122 Forging A 42 215 410 215 410 211 201 191 186 176 157 144 142 - -
bis (0) A 48 255 470 255 470 250 240 230 220 216 196 181 176 - -
Rolled or
M 1124 275 470 275 470 259 251 244 237 216 186 - - - -
TABLE Z I 2.1

forging P 280 GH
Forging
M 1125 elbow P 280 GH 275 470 275 470 259 251 244 237 216 186 - - - -
FOR FERRITIC STEELS

M 1131 e  30 225 360 225 360 213 196 181 167 147 127 119 118 - -
YIELD STRENGTH VALUES Sy

P 235 GH
M 1132 e > 30 185 360 185 360 185 181 167 157 147 127 119 118 - -
M 1133
e  30 245 410 245 410 234 223 206 191 176 157 144 142 - -
M 1145 P 265 GH
e > 30 215 410 215 410 211 201 191 186 176 157 144 142 - -
M 5130 Plate
M 5131 e  30 285 470 285 470 274 260 245 230 216 196 181 176 - -
P 295 GH
e > 30 255 470 255 470 250 240 230 220 216 196 181 176 - -
e  30 335 510 335 510 328 304 284 260 235 216 207 206 - -
P 355 GH
e > 30 305 510 305 510 304 294 274 255 235 216 207 206 - -

NOTE : (0) The values indicated cover thicknesses up to 110 mm

* TPS : Technical Procurement Specification

Annex ZI / 19
Subsection Z
 MIN Re MIN Rm Sy Su YIELD STRENGTH VALUES Sy IN MPa
PRODUCT AFNOR DIMENSION
TPS* in MPa in MPa at at
FORM GRADE (mm)
at 20°C at 20°C 20°C 20°C 50°C 100°C 150°C 200°C 250°C 300°C 340°C 350°C 360°C 370°C

S 235 3  e  30 235 340 235 340 224 207 189 172 154 136 - - - -

Annex ZI / 20
M 1134 Plate S 275 3  e  30 275 400 275 400 263 242 221 201 180 160 - - - -
S 355 3  e  30 355 470 355 470 339 312 286 259 233 206 - - - -
RCC-M - 2012 Edition

TU 42 C 235 410 235 410 - - - - 186 157 148 147 - -

M 1141 Pipe
TU 48 C 275 470 275 470 - - - - 216 186 171 167 - -
P 235 GH 235 360 235 360 - - 176 165 145 122 - - - -
M 1142 Pipe
P 265 GH 265 410 265 410 - - 199 188 170 149 - - - -
P 235 GH 235 360 235 360 - - 176 165 145 122 - - - -
M 1143 Pipe
P 265 GH 265 410 265 410 - - 199 188 170 149 - - - -
 30 345 490 345 490 - 294 275 255 235 216 - 196 - -
M 1143 Bis Pipe P 355 NH
30 < e  50 335 490 335 490 - 294 275 255 235 216 - 196 - -
M 1144 Pipe P 280 GH 275 470 275 470 259 251 244 237 216 186 - - - -
M 1147 Pipe P 265 GH 265 410 265 410 - - - - 186 157 148 147 - -
TS 42 C 255 410 255 410 - - - - 186 157 - - - -
M 1148 Pipe
TS 48 C 275 470 275 470 - - - - 216 186 - - - -
TABLE Z I 2.1 (Cont. 1)

M 1152 Pipe P 280 GH 275 470 275 470 259 251 244 237 216 186 - - - -
FOR FERRITIC STEELS

M 2111
YIELD STRENGTH VALUES Sy

M 2111 bis
M 2112
M 2112 bis
M 2113
M 2114
M 2115
M 2116 Forging 16 MND 5 400 550 345 552 340 326 318 311 308 303 300 299 298 298


M 2117
M 2119
M 2131
M 2135
M 2141
M 2142
M 2143

n° 137-2012
Subsection Z

* TPS : Technical Procurement Specification


MIN Re MIN Rm Sy Su YIELD STRENGTH VALUES Sy IN MPa
PRODUC AFNOR DIMENSION
TPS* in MPa in MPa at at
T FORM GRADE (mm)
at 20°C at 20°C 20°C 20°C 50°C 100°C 150°C 200°C 250°C 300°C 340°C 350°C 360°C 370°C

M 2121
M 2122

n° 137-2012
M 2125 Plate 16 MND 5 400 550 345 552 340 326 318 311 308 303 300 299 298 298
RCC-M - 2012 Edition

M 2126
M 2127
M 2115
M 2131 Forged 18 MND 5 420 580 420 580 414 393 380 374 365 355 348 346 343 341
M 2143
M 2119
Forged 18 MND 5 450 600 450 600 444 421 407 400 391 380 372 370 367 365
M 2134
> 125 420 580 420 580 414 393 380 374 365 355 348 346 343 341
M 2133 Forged 18 MND 5
 125 450 600 450 600 444 421 407 400 391 380 372 370 367 365
M 2125
> 125 420 580 420 580 414 393 380 374 365 355 348 346 343 341
M 2126
Plate 18 MND 5
M 2127
 125 (1) 450 600 435 600 430 413 403 395 390 383 378 377 376 375
M 2128
M 2115 Bis
TABLE Z I 2.1 (Cont. 2)

FOR FERRITIC STEELS

M 2131 Bis Forged 20 MND 5 420 620 420 620 414 393 380 374 365 355 348 346 343 341
YIELD STRENGTH VALUES Sy

M 2143 Bis
M 2119 Bis
Forged 20 MND 5 450 620 450 620 444 421 407 400 391 380 372 370 367 365
M 2134 Bis
> 125 420 620 420 620 414 393 380 374 365 355 348 346 343 341
M 2133 Bis Forged 20 MND 5
 125 450 620 450 620 444 421 407 400 391 380 372 370 367 365

 125 450 620 450 620 444 421 407 400 391 380 372 370 367 365
M 2126 Bis Plate 20 MND 5
> 125 420 620 420 620 414 393 380 374 365 355 348 346 343 341
NOTE : (1) This limit can be increased up to 160 mm by special agreement in the purchase order.
* TPS : Technical Procurement Specification

Annex ZI / 21
Subsection Z
Annex ZI / 22
RCC-M - 2012 Edition

MIN Re MIN Rm Sy Su YIELD STRENGTH VALUES Sy IN MPa

PRODUCT AFNOR DIMENSION
TPS* in MPa in MPa at at
FORM GRADE (mm)
at 20°C at 20°C 20°C 20°C 50°C 100°C 150°C 200°C 250°C 300°C 340°C 350°C 360°C 370°C

M 2132 Forged 30 M 5 280 550 280 550 in preparation

M 2311 Forged 40 NCDV 7.03   300 900 1000 896 1000 885 852 828 804 783 753 723 717 708 696

40 NCD 7.03
830 930 827 931 819 786 762 744 723 696 660 660 651 651
Classe A
Forged 40 NCD 7.03
or 965 1070 965 1069 954 918 891 864 840 813 783 774 762 750
M 2312 Classe C   300
rolled
40 NCDV 7.03
40 NCD 7.03 900 1000 896 1000 885 852 828 804 783 753 723 717 708 696
TABLE Z I 2.1 (Cont. 3)

FOR FERRITIC STEELS

Classe B
YIELD STRENGTH VALUES Sy

M 2321 Plate 20 NCD 14.07 600 750 600 750 600 600 - - - - - - - -

* TPS : Technical Procurement Specification


n° 137-2012
Subsection Z

Re MIN in Rm MIN Sy Su YIELD STRENGTH VALUES Sy IN MPa
PRODUCT DIMENSION
TPS* AFNOR GRADE MPa in MPa to to
FORM (mm)
at 20°C at 20°C 20°C 20°C 50°C 100°C 150°C 200°C 250°C 300°C 340°C 350°C 360°C 370°C

M 3203 Plate Z10 C 13 400 550 400 550 396 365 352 348 345 339 331 329 326 324
M 3205 Forging Z12 CN 13 620 760 620 785 610 588 568 552 537 524 515 513 511 510

n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition

Z5 CN 12.01 380 540 in preparation

M 3208 Casting Z6 CNU 17.04 720 900 in preparation
Z5 CND 13.04 550 760 552 758 542 517 503 493 486 478 470 468 466 464
Z6 CN 18.10   150 520 517 195 171 155 143 134 128 124 124 123 122
210 207
Z5 CN 18.10  > 150 485 483 195 171 155 143 134 128 124 124 123 122
  150 490 483 165 145 131 121 113 108 105 104 103 102
Z2 CN 18.10 175 173
 > 150 450 448 165 145 131 121 113 108 105 104 103 102
Z2 CN 19.10   150 520 517 195 171 155 143 134 128 124 124 123 122
controlled 210 207
nitrogen content  > 150 485 483 195 171 155 143 134 128 124 124 123 122
  150 540 517 203 187 175 165 157 149 144 144 143 142
Z6 CNNb 18.11 220 207
 > 150 490 483 203 187 175 165 157 149 144 144 143 142
Forging   150 540 517 198 172 155 143 133 126 123 122 121 120
M 3301 (1) Z8 CNT 18.11 220 207
 > 150 490 483 198 172 155 143 133 126 123 122 121 120
TABLE Z I 2.2

M 3306
Bar Z6 CND 17.12   150 520 517 199 176 160 148 138 131 128 127 126 125
M 3317 210 207
(1) Z5 CND 17.12  > 150 485 483 199 176 160 148 138 131 128 127 126 125
  150 490 483 165 143 129 119 111 104 100 99 99 98
YIELD STRENGTH VALUES Sy

Z2 CND 17.12 175 173

 > 150 450 448 165 143 129 119 111 104 100 99 99 98
Z2 CND 18.12   150 520 517 199 176 160 148 138 131 128 127 126 125
controlled 220 207
nitrogen content  > 150 485 483 199 176 160 148 138 131 128 127 126 125
FOR STAINLESS STEELS AND Ni-Cr-Fe ALLOYS

  150 540 in preparation

Z8 CNDT 18.12 230
 > 150 490 in preparation
  150 540 in preparation
Z8 CNDNb 18.12 230
 > 150 490 in preparation
Z3 CN 18.10
M 3302 Forging controlled 205 485 207 483 181 159 144 133 124 119 115 115 114 113
nitrogen content
* TPS : Technical Procurement Specification

Annex ZI / 23
Subsection Z
 R MIN Rm MIN Sy Su YIELD STRENGTH VALUES Sy IN MPa
PRODUCT AFNOR DIMENSION e
TPS* in MPa in MPa to to
FORM GRADE (mm)
at 20°C at 20°C 20°C 20°C 50°C 100°C 150°C 200°C 250°C 300°C 340°C 350°C 360°C 370°C

Annex ZI / 24
M 3304 Z6 CN 18.10 520 207 517 195 171 155 143 134 128 124 124 123 122
Pipe 210
M 3320 Z6 CND 17.12 520 207 517 199 176 160 148 138 131 128 127 126 125
RCC-M - 2012 Edition

Z2 CN 18.10 175 490 173 483 165 145 131 121 113 108 105 104 103 102
Z2 CN 19.10
M 3303 controlled nitrogen
content 210 520 207 517 195 171 155 143 134 128 124 124 123 122
M 3304 Z5 CN 18.10
M 3317 Pipe Z5 CND 17.12 210 520 207 517 199 176 160 148 138 131 128 127 126 125
M 3319 Z2 CND 18.12
M 3320 controlled nitrogen 220 520 207 517 199 176 160 148 138 131 128 127 126 125
content
Z2 CND 17.12 175 490 173 483 165 143 129 119 111 104 100 99 99 98
X2 CrNiMo 18-12
controlled nitrogen
content
M 3321 forging X2 CrNi 19-10 210 510 207 483 199 176 160 148 138 131 128 127 126 125
controlled nitrogen
content
Z6 CN 18.10
Z5 CN 18.10 210 520 207 517 195 171 155 143 134 128 124 124 123 122
Z2 CN 19.10
TABLE Z I 2.2 (Cont. 1)

controlled nitrogen 210 520 207 517 195 171 155 143 134 128 124 124 123 122
content
YIELD STRENGTH VALUES Sy

Z6 CND 17.12
M 3307 Z5 CND 17.12 210 520 207 517 199 176 160 148 138 131 128 127 126 125
M 3312 Z2 CND 18.12
M 3314 Plate controlled nitrogen 220 520 207 517 199 176 160 148 138 131 128 127 126 125
content
FOR STAINLESS STEELS AND Ni-Cr-Fe ALLOYS

M 3315
Z2 CN 18.10 483 165 145 131 121 113 108 105 104 103 102
M 3317 175 490 173
Z2 CND 17.12 483 165 143 129 119 111 104 100 99 99 98


Z6 CNNb 18.11 220 540 207 517 203 187 175 165 157 149 144 144 143 142
Z8 CNT 18.11 220 540 207 517 198 172 155 143 133 126 123 122 121 120
Z8 CNDT 18.12 230 540 in preparation
Z8 CNDNb 18.12 230 540 in preparation
* TPS : Technical Procurement Specification

n° 137-2012
Subsection Z

Re MIN Rm MIN Sy Su YIELD STRENGTH VALUES Sy IN MPa
PRODUCT AFNOR DIMENSION
TPS* in MPa in MPa to to
FORM GRADE (mm)
at 20°C at 20°C 20°C 20°C 50°C 100°C 150°C 200°C 250°C 300°C 340°C 350°C 360°C 370°C
Z2 CND 18.12
controlled nitrogen   30 655 654 440 410 390 374 362 357 352 350 348 346
Bar
M 3308 content 450 448

n° 137-2012
(4)
RCC-M - 2012 Edition

Z2 CND 17.12 30 <   50 590 586 440 410 390 374 362 357 352 350 348 346
Z6 CND 17.12
M 3309 Forging Z6 CNNb 18.11 210 480 207 483 203 188 177 166 157 150 145 144 143 142
Z2 CN 19.10
M 3310 Plate controlled nitrogen 210 520 207 517 195 171 155 143 134 128 124 124 123 122
content
Z2 CN 18.10 175 490 173 483 165 145 131 121 113 108 105 104 103 102
M 3311 Forging
Z2 CND 17.12 175 490 173 483 165 143 129 119 111 104 100 99 99 98

M 3401 Casting Z3 CN 20.09 M 210 480 207 483 200 174 152 136 126 120 118 117 116 115

Z3 CND 19.10 M 210 480 207 483 200 176 159 148 139 132 127 127 126 125
M 3402
Casting
M 3403 Z3 CN 20.09 M 210 480 207 483 200 174 152 136 126 120 118 117 116 115

M 3406 Pipe Z3 CN 20.09 M 210 480 207 483 200 174 152 136 126 120 118 117 116 115
TABLE Z I 2.2 (Cont. 2)

NC 15 Fe 240 550 241 552 237 224 212 205 199 194 189 188 187 186
YIELD STRENGTH VALUES Sy

M 4102
Forged
or NC15FeTNbA 655 1070 655 1070 643 630 618 609 601 596 593 593 592 591
M 4104 rolled
(2)
FOR STAINLESS STEELS AND Ni-Cr-Fe ALLOYS

M 4106
M 4108 NC 30 Fe 240 550 241 552 237 224 212 205 199 194 189 188 187 186
M 4109
M 4103 NC 15 Fe
Plate 240 550 241 552 237 224 212 205 199 194 189 188 187 186
M 4107 NC 30 Fe

* TPS : Technical Procurement Specification

Annex ZI / 25
Subsection Z
 R MIN Rm MIN Sy Su YIELD STRENGTH VALUES Sy IN MPa
PRODUC AFNOR DIMENSION e
TPS* in MPa in MPa to to
T FORM GRADE (mm)

Annex ZI / 26
at 20°C at 20°C 20°C 20°C 50°C 100°C 150°C 200°C 250°C 300°C 340°C 350°C 360°C 370°C

M 4104 Rolled NC 15 Fe TNbA

bars 655 1070 in preparation
RCC-M - 2012 Edition

M 4105 Pipe NC 30 Fe 275 630 276 630 271 253 240 230 222 215 210 209 208 207

M 4301 UA9N5 Fe Y200 240 630 in preparation

casting
Rolled X6 CrNiMo 16-04 (5) (5) (5)
700 900 700 900 693 679 655 651 637 623 609 602
or forged
bar X5 CrNiCuMo 15-06   150 790 960 793 665 773 729 702 678 660 651 636 630 - -
(1)
(2) (5) (5) (5)
X6 CrNiCu 17-04 790 960 793 965 773 729 702 678 660 651 636 630 - -
X6 CrNiCuMo 15-04 (3) (5)
720 930 724 931 700 664 641 621 603 588 - - - -

M 5110   20 655 760 655 758 642 597 569 546 529 519 514 511 509 505
Z6 CN 18.10
Z5 CN 18.10 20 <   25 550 690 552 689 540 504 480 460 446 438 432 430 428 426
(4)
Z6 CND 17.12 25 <   35 450 655 448 654 440 410 390 374 362 357 352 350 348 346
TABLE Z I 2.2 (Cont. 3)

Z5 CND 17.12
35 <   40 350 620 345 620 338 315 300 287 279 274 271 270 268 266
YIELD STRENGTH VALUES Sy

X6 NiCrTiMoVB 25.15.2 590 900 586 896 582 570 564 564 561 558 555 555 555 555
FOR STAINLESS STEELS AND Ni-Cr-Fe ALLOYS

* TPS : Technical Procurement Specification


Notes (1) In certain cases "" signifies thickness
(2) For class A part
(3) For class B part
(4) Work-hardened
(5) For use at temperature  at 300°C for short time periods

n° 137-2012
Subsection Z
RCC-M - 2012 Edition Subsection Z

TABLE Z I 2.3
PERMANENT STRAIN
LIMITING FACTORS

STRAIN
FACTOR
PER CEN
0.10 0.90
0.09 0.89
0.08 0.88
0.07 0.86
0.06 0.83
0.05 0.80
0.04 0.77
0.03 0.73
0.02 0.69
0.01 0.63

 n° 137-2012 Annex ZI / 27
 MIN Re MIN Rm Sy Su TENSILE STRENGTH VALUES Su IN MPa
PRODUCT AFNOR DIMENSION
TRS* in MPa in MPa at at
FORM GRADE (mm)
at 20°C at 20°C 20°C 20°C 50°C 100°C 150°C 200°C 250°C 300°C 340°C 350°C 360°C 370°C

M 1111 Casting 20 MN 5M 275 485 276 483 483 483 483 483 483 483 483 483 483 483

Annex ZI / 28
20 MN 5M 275 485 276 483 483 483 483 483 483 483 483 483 483 483
M 1112 Casting
20 M 5M 235 470 212 470 470 470 470 470 470 470 470 470 470 470
RCC-M - 2012 Edition

M 1114 Casting 20 MN 5M 275 485 276 483 483 483 483 483 483 483 483 483 483 483
23 M 5M 345 550 345 550 550 550 550 - - - - - - -
M 1115 Casting
20 CD 4M 345 550 345 550 550 550 550 - - - - - - -
A 42 215 410 215 410 410 410 410 410 410 410 410 410 - -
M 1121 Forging
A 48 255 470 255 470 470 470 470 470 470 470 470 470 - -
P 245 GH 215 410 215 410 410 410 410 410 410 410 410 410 - -
Forging P 265 GH
M 1122
(0) P 280 GH 255 460 255 470 470 470 470 470 470 470 470 470 - -
P 295 GH
M 1122 Forging A 42 215 410 215 410 410 410 410 410 410 410 410 410 - -
bis (0) A 48 255 470 255 470 470 470 470 470 470 470 470 470 - -
Rolled or
M 1124 P 280 GH 275 470 275 470 470 470 470 470 470 470 - - - -
TABLE Z I 3.1

forging
Forging
M 1125 P 280 GH 275 470 275 470 470 470 470 470 470 470 - - - -
FOR FERRITIC STEELS

elbow
M 1131 e  30 225 360 225 360 360 360 360 360 360 360 360 360 - -
P 235 GH
TENSILE STRENGTH VALUES Su

M 1132 e> 30 185 360 185 360 360 360 360 360 360 360 360 360 - -
M 1133 e  30 245 410 245 410 410 410 410 410 410 410 410 410 - -
M 1145 P 265 GH
Plate e> 30 215 410 215 410 410 410 410 410 410 410 410 410 - -
M 1145 (0) e  30 285 470 285 470 470 470 470 470 470 470 470 470 - -


M 5130 P 295 GH
e> 30 255 470 255 470 470 470 470 470 470 470 470 470 - -
M 5131
e  30 335 510 335 510 510 510 510 510 510 510 510 510 - -
P 355 GH
e> 30 305 510 305 510 510 510 510 510 510 510 510 510 - -

NOTE : (0) The values indicated cover thicknesses up to 110 mm

* TPS : Technical Procurement Specification

n° 137-2012
Subsection Z

MIN Re MIN Rm Sy Su TENSILE STRENGTH VALUES Su IN MPa
PRODUCT AFNOR DIMENSION
TPS* in MPa in MPa at at
FORM GRADE (mm)

n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition

at 20°C at 20°C 20°C 20°C 50°C 100°C 150°C 200°C 250°C 300°C 340°C 350°C 360°C 370°C

S 235 3  e  30 235 340 235 340 340 340 340 340 340 340 - - - -
M 1134 Plate S 275 3  e  30 275 400 275 400 400 400 400 400 400 400 - - - -
S 355 3  e  30 355 470 355 470 470 470 470 470 470 470 - - - -
TU 42C 235 410 235 410 410 410 410 410 410 410 410 410 - -
M 1141 Pipe
TU 48C 275 470 275 470 470 470 470 470 470 470 470 470 - -
P 235 GH 235 360 235 360 360 360 360 360 360 360 - - - -
M 1142 Pipe
P 265 GH 265 410 265 410 410 410 410 410 410 410 - - - -
P 235 GH 235 360 235 360 360 360 360 360 360 360 - - - -
M 1143 Pipe
P 265 GH 265 410 265 410 410 410 410 410 410 410 - - - -

M 1143  30 345 490 345 490 - 484 473 451 451 451 - 440 - -
Pipe P 355 NH
TABLE Z I 3.1 (Cont. 1)

Bis
FOR FERRITIC STEELS

30 < e  50 335 490 335 490 - 462 451 429 429 429 - 418 - -
M 1144 Pipe P 280 GH 275 470 275 470 470 470 470 470 470 470 470 470 - -
TENSILE STRENGTH VALUES Su

M 1147 Pipe P 265 GH 265 410 265 410 410 410 410 410 410 410 410 410 - -
TS 42C 255 410 255 410 410 410 410 410 410 410 - - - -
M 1148 Pipe
TS 48C 275 470 275 470 470 470 470 470 470 470 - - - -
M 1152 Pipe P 280 GH 275 470 275 470 470 470 470 470 470 470 - - - -
* TPS : Technical Procurement Specification

Annex ZI / 29
Subsection Z
 MIN Re MIN Rm Sy Su TENSILE STRENGTH VALUES Su IN MPa
PRODUC AFNOR DIMENSION
TPS* in MPa in MPa at at
T FORM GRADE (mm)

Annex ZI / 30
at 20°C at 20°C 20°C 20°C 50°C 100°C 150°C 200°C 250°C 300°C 340°C 350°C 360°C 370°C
M 2111
M 2111Bis
RCC-M - 2012 Edition

M 2112
M 2112 Bis
M 2113
M 2114
M 2115
M 2116 Forged 16MND 5 400 550 345 552 552 552 552 552 552 552 552 552 552 552
M 2117
M 2119
M 2131
M 2135
M 2141
M 2142
M 2143
M 2121
M 2122
M 2125 Plate 16 MND 5 400 550 345 552 552 552 552 552 552 552 552 552 552 552
M 2126
M 2127
M 2115
M 2131 Forged 18 MND 5 420 580 420 580 580 580 580 580 580 580 580 580 580 580
TABLE Z I 3.1 (Cont. 2)

FOR FERRITIC STEELS

M 2143
M 2119
Forged 18 MND 5 450 600 450 600 600 600 600 600 600 600 600 600 600 600
TENSILE STRENGTH VALUES Su

M 2134
> 125 420 580 420 580 580 580 580 580 580 580 580 580 580 580
M 2133 Forged 18 MND 5
 125 450 600 450 600 600 600 600 600 600 600 600 600 600 600
M 2125


18 MND 5 > 125 420 580 420 580 580 580 580 580 580 580 580 580 580 580
M 2126
M 2127 Plate
M 2128 18 MND 5  125 (1) 450 600 435 600 600 600 600 600 600 600 600 600 600 600

NOTE : (1) This limit can be increased up to 160 mm by special agreement in the purchase order.
* TPS : Technical Procurement Specification

n° 137-2012
Subsection Z

n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition

MIN Re MIN Rm Sy Su TENSILE STRENGTH VALUES Su IN MPa

PRODUCT AFNOR DIMENSION
TPS* in MPa in MPa at at
FORM GRADE (mm)
at 20°C at 20°C 20°C 20°C 50°C 100°C 150°C 200°C 250°C 300°C 340°C 350°C 360°C 370°C
M 2115 Bis
M 2131 Bis Forged 20MND 5 420 620 420 620 620 620 620 620 620 620 620 620 620 620
M 2143 Bis
M 2119 Bis
M 2134 Bis Forged 20MND 5 450 620 450 620 620 620 620 620 620 620 620 620 620 620

> 125 420 620 420 620 620 620 620 620 620 620 620 620 620 620
M 2133 Bis Forged 20MND 5
 125 450 620 450 620 620 620 620 620 620 620 620 620 620 620

> 125 450 620 450 620 620 620 620 620 620 620 620 620 620 620
M 2126 Bis Plate 20MND 5
 125 450 620 450 620 620 620 620 620 620 620 620 620 620 620
TABLE Z I 3.1 (Cont. 3)

FOR FERRITIC STEELS

M 2132 Forget 30 M 5 280 550 280 550 550 550 - - - - - - - -

TENSILE STRENGTH VALUES Su

M 2321 Plate 20 NCD 14.07 600 750 600 750 750 750 - - - - - - - -

* TPS : Technical Procurement Specification

Annex ZI / 31
Subsection Z
 MIN Re MIN Rm Sy Su TENSILE STRENGTH VALUES Su IN MPa
PRODUC DIMENSION
TPS* AFNOR GRADE in MPa in MPa at at
T FORM (mm)
at 20°C at 20°C 20°C 20°C 50°C 100°C 150°C 200°C 250°C 300°C 340°C 350°C 360°C 370°C

Annex ZI / 32
M 3203 Plate Z10 C 13 400 550 400 550 550 550 540 529 524 511 497 494 488 483
M 3205 Forging Z12 CN 13 620 760 620 758 758 756 742 731 719 699 688 687 687 687
RCC-M - 2012 Edition

Z5 CND 13.04 550 760 552 758 758 757 742 726 714 701 687 683 679 674
M 3208 Casting Z5 CN 12.01 380 540 In preparation
Z6 CNU 17.04 720 900 In preparation
Z6 CN 18.10   150 520 517 511 485 455 444 438 438 438 438 438 438
210 207
Z5 CN 18.10  > 150 485 483 470 450 424 415 409 409 409 409 409 409
  150 490 483 476 450 424 404 400 395 390 389 388 387
Z2 CN 18.10 175 173
 > 150 450 448 443 419 390 377 370 367 364 363 362 361
Z2 CN 19.10   150 520 517 511 485 455 444 438 438 438 438 438 438
controlled nitrogen 210 207
content  > 150 485 483 470 450 424 415 409 409 409 409 409 409
  150 540 517 512 491 455 429 418 411 407 406 404 403
Z6 CNNb 18.11 220 207
 > 150 490 483 479 459 427 400 388 384 379 378 376 376
Forging   150 540 517 517 503 478 472 472 472 472 472 472 472
TABLE Z I 3.2

M 3301 (1) Z8 CNT 18.11 220 207

 > 150 490 483 482 469 446 441 441 441 441 441 441 441
M 3306
Bars Z6 CND 17.12   150 520 517 517 517 506 495 495 495 495 495 495 495
M 3317 210 207
(1) Z5 CND 17.12  > 150 485 483 483 483 472 462 462 462 462 462 462 462
TENSILE STRENGTH VALUES Su

  150 490 483 478 462 440 430 425 425 425 425 425 425
Z2 CND 17.12 175 173
 > 150 450 448 446 431 409 400 395 394 394 394 394 394
Z2 CND 18.12   150 520 517 517 517 506 495 495 495 495 495 495 495
FOR STAINLESS STEELS AND Ni-Cr-Fe ALLOYS

controlled nitrogen 220 207

content  > 150 485 483 483 483 472 462 462 462 462 462 462 462


  150 540 In preparation
Z8 CNDT 18.12 230
 > 150 490 In preparation
  150 540 In preparation
Z8 CNDNb 18.12 230
 > 150 490 In preparation

* TPS : Technical Procurement Specification

n° 137-2012
Subsection Z

MIN Re MIN Rm Sy Su TENSILE STRENGTH VALUES Su IN MPa
PRODUCT AFNOR DIMENSION
TPS* in MPa in MPa at at
FORM GRADE (mm)
at 20°C at 20°C 20°C 20°C 50°C 100°C 150°C 200°C 250°C 300°C 340°C 350°C 360°C 370°C
Z3 CN 18.10
M 3302 Forging controlled nitrogen 205 485 207 483 470 450 424 415 409 409 409 409 409 409
content
M 3304 Z6 CN 18-10 520 517 511 485 455 444 438 438 438 438 438 438
Pipe 210 207

n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition

M 3320 Z6 CND 17.12 520 517 517 517 506 495 495 495 495 495 495 495
Z2 CN 18.10 175 490 173 483 481 450 420 404 400 395 390 389 388 387
Z2 CN 19.10
M 3303 controlled nitrogen
content Z5 CN 210 520 207 517 511 485 455 444 438 438 438 438 438 438
M 3304 18.10
M 3317 Pipe Z5 CND 17.12 210 520 207 517 517 517 506 495 495 495 495 495 495 495
M 3319 Z2 CND 18.12
M 3320 controlled nitrogen 220 520 207 517 517 517 506 495 495 495 495 495 495 495
content
Z2 CND 17.12 175 490 173 483 446 431 409 400 395 394 394 394 394 394
X2 CrNiMo 18.12
controlled nitrogen 210 510 207 483 474 474 463 453 453 453 453 453 453 453
content
M 3321 Forging
X2 CrNi 19.12
controlled nitrogen 210 510 207 483 470 450 424 415 409 409 409 409 409 409
content
TABLE Z I 3.2 (Cont. 1)

Z6 CN 18.10
Z5 CN 18.10 210 520 207 517 511 485 455 438 438 438 438 438 438 438
TENSILE STRENGTH VALUES Su

Z2 CN 19.10
controlled nitrogen 210 520 207 517 511 485 455 444 438 438 438 438 438 438
M 3307 content
FOR STAINLESS STEELS AND Ni-Cr-Fe ALLOYS

M 3312 Z6 CND 17.12

Z5 CND 17.12 210 520 207 517 517 517 506 495 495 495 495 495 495 495
M 3314 Plate
Z2 CND 18.12
M 3315 controlled nitrogen 220 520 207 517 517 517 506 495 495 495 495 495 495 495
M 3317 content
Z2 CN 18.10 175 490 173 483 477 450 419 403 399 395 391 390 388 387
Z2 CND 17.12 175 490 173 483 480 464 440 430 425 425 425 425 425 425
Z6 CNNb 18.11 220 540 207 517 512 491 455 429 418 411 407 406 404 403

Annex ZI / 33
Subsection Z

* TPS : Technical Procurement Specification

 MIN Re MIN Rm Sy Su
PRODUCT AFNOR DIMENSION TENSILE STRENGTH VALUES Su IN MPa

Annex ZI / 34
TPS* in MPa in MPa at at
FORM GRADE (mm)
at 20°C at 20°C 20°C 20°C 50°C 100°C 150°C 200°C 250°C 300°C 340°C 350°C 360°C 370°C
M 3307
Z8 CNT 18.11 220 540 207 517 517 503 478 472 472 472 472 472 472 472
M 3312
RCC-M - 2012 Edition

M 3314 Plate Z8 CNDT 18.12 230 540 In preparation

M 3315
Z8 CNDNb 18.12 230 540 In preparation
M 3317
Z2 CND 18.12
Bar controlled   30 450 655 448 654 654 648 618 600 594 594 594 594 594 594
M 3308 (1) nitrogen content
(2) Z2 CND 17.12 30 <   50 450 590 448 586 585 585 555 534 532 532 532 532 532 532
Z6 CND 17.12
M 3309 Forging Z6 CNNb 18.11 210 480 207 483 479 459 427 400 388 384 379 378 377 376
Z2 CN 19.10
M 3310 Plate controlled 210 520 207 517 511 485 455 444 438 438 438 438 438 438
nitrogen content
Z2 CN 18.10 175 490 173 448 443 419 390 377 370 367 364 363 362 361
M 3311 Forging
Z2 CND 17.12 175 490 173 448 446 431 409 400 395 394 394 394 394 394
M 3401 Casting Z3 CN 20.09 M 210 480 207 483 In preparation 374
M 3402 Z3 CND 19.10 M 210 480 207 483 483 483 479 471 455 453 453 453 453 453
TABLE Z I 3.2 (Cont. 2)

Casting
M 3403 Z3 CN 20. 09 M 210 480 207 483 481 466 441 423 412 407 404 403 402 401
M 3406 Tube Z3 CN 20.09 M 210 480 207 483 481 466 441 423 412 407 404 403 402 401
TENSILE STRENGTH VALUES Su

NC 15 Fe 240 550 241 552 552 552 552 552 552 552 552 552 552 552
M 4102
Forged NC15FeNTbA 655 1070 655 1070 1070 1070 1070 1070 1068 1051 1042 1040 1038 1035
M 4104 or
FOR STAINLESS STEELS AND Ni-Cr-Fe ALLOYS

M 4106 rolled
M 4108 NC 30 Fe 240 550 241 552 552 552 552 552 552 552 552 552 552 552


M 4109
M 4103 NC 15 Fe
Plate 240 550 241 552 552 552 552 552 552 552 552 552 552 552
M 4107 NC 30 Fe

* TPS : Technical Procurement Specification

n° 137-2012
Subsection Z

MIN Re MIN Rm Sy Su TENSILE STRENGTH VALUES Su IN MPa
PRODUCT AFNOR DIMENSION
TPS* in MPa in MPa at at
FORM GRADE (mm)
at 20°C at 20°C 20°C 20°C 50°C 100°C 150°C 200°C 250°C 300°C 340°C 350°C 360°C 370°C

n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition

M 4104 Rolled bar NC 15 Fe TNbA 655 1070 In preparation

M 4105 Pipe NC 30 Fe 275 630 276 630 630 630 630 624 613 608 603 592 592 592

M 4301 Casting UA9N5 Fe Y200 240 630 In preparation

Rolled X6 CrNiMo 16-04 700 900 In preparation
or
forged X5 CrNiCuMo
  150 790 960 793 965 965 965 965 940 922 907 897 895 - -
bar 15-06

X6 CrNiCu 17-04 790 (3) 960 793 965 965 965 965 940 922 907 (4) - - - -
(1)
X6 CrNiCuMo 15-04 720 (5) 930 724 931 931 931 931 908 889 877 (4) - - - -
M 5110
  20 655 760 655 758 758 757 717 695 688 688 688 688 688 688
Z6 CN 18.10
Z5 CN 18.10 20 <   25 550 690 552 689 689 688 652 631 626 626 626 626 626 626
(2)
TABLE Z I 3.2 (Cont. 3)

Z6 CND 17.12 25 <   35 450 655 448 654 654 648 618 600 594 594 594 594 594 594
Z5 CND 17.12
35 <   40 350 620 345 620 620 619 586 569 563 562 562 562 562 562
TENSILE STRENGTH VALUES Su

* TPS : Technical Procurement Specification

FOR STAINLESS STEELS AND Ni-Cr-Fe ALLOYS

Notes (1) In certain cases"" signifies thickness

(2) Bars work hardened after solution heat treatment
(3) For class A parts - Note 3 applies to whole line
(4) for use at temperature > 300°C for short time periods
(5) For class B parts - Note 5 applies to whole line

Annex ZI / 35
Subsection Z
Annex ZI / 36
RCC-M - 2012 Edition

NUMBER OF CYCLES
FIG. CURVE 4
4 1.2. 10 4 4 5 5 5 6
10 20 50 100 200 500 1000 2000 5000 10 2. 10 5. 10 10 2. 10 5. 10 10
(3)
ZI.4.1. 790  Su  900 MPa 2900 2210 1590 1210 930 690 540 430 340 305 295 250 200 180 165 152 138
ZI.4.1 Su  550 MPa 4000 2830 1900 1410 1070 725 570 440 330 260 215 160 138 114 93 86
ZI.4.2. 4480 3240 2190 1655 1275 940 750 615 485 405 350 295 260 230 200 180
ZI.4.3. nom  2,7 Sm 7930 5240 3100 2205 1550 985 690 490 310 235 185 152 131 117 103 93
ZI.4.3. nom = 3 Sm 7930 5240 3100 2070 1410 840 560 380 230 155 103 72 58 49 41 37

Notes (1) The notes in figures ZI 4.1., ZI 4.2. and ZI 4.3. are applicable.
TABLE Z I 4.0

(2) When computed value Sa falls between two values Si and Sj given in the table (Si > Sa > Sj),
the number of admissible cycles N is determined by interpolation, as follows :
[log (Si/Sa) / log (Si/Sj)]
N = Ni  (Nj/Ni)
where Ni and Nj are the numbers of admissible cycles associated with stress variation amplitude Si and Sj.
OF FIGURES Z I.4.1, Z I.4.2, Z I.4.3 (1), (2)

(3) Coordinates of the point of intersection of the two parts of the curve.
TABLE GIVING, POINT BY POINT, THE STRESS CURVES


n° 137-2012
Subsection Z
RCC-M - 2012 Edition Subsection Z

FIGURE Z I 4.1
FATIGUE CURVES FOR CARBON AND LOW ALLOY STEELS
(for metal temperature not exceeding 370°C)

 n° 137-2012 Annex ZI / 37
RCC-M - 2012 Edition Subsection Z

FIGURE Z I 4.2
FATIGUE CURVES FOR AUSTENITIC STEELS
AND NICKEL ALLOYS

Annex ZI / 38  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition Subsection Z

FIGURE Z I 4.3

FATIGUE CURVES FOR STEEL BOLTING

 n° 137-2012 Annex ZI / 39
 Groups 1 2 3 4
Group Carbon steels, carbon manganese
definition
Chromium steels Austenitic stainless steels Nickel base alloys
steels and low alloy steels

Annex ZI / 40
Sub-groups 1.1 1.2 1.3 2.1 2.2 3.1 3.2 3.3 4.1 4.2
C steels and
C steels and
RCC-M - 2012 Edition

C-Mn
C-Mn
containing C-Mn-Ni-Mo Low Cr steels High Cr steels Type 18.10 Type 17.12 Mo Age hardened
Definition containing Ni-Cr-Fe Ni-Cr-Fe-Nb
at most steels ( 3%) (12 à 17%) steels steels steels
More than
0,30% C and
0,30% C
3,5% Ni
TS 37 B 2 C 45 or 16 MND 5 20 CD 4 M Z5 CN 13-04 Z2 CN 18-10 Z2 CND 17-12 Z6 NCTDV 25-15 NC 15 Fe NC 15 FeTNbA
TS 42 B 3 C 45 18 MND 5 42 Cr Mo 4 Z5 CN 16-04 Z2 CN 18-10 Z3 CND 17-12 NC 30 Fe NC 19 Fe Nb
TU 42 C 30 M 5 20 MND 5 42 CDV 4 Z6 CNUD 15-04 controlled controlled
TU 48 C 20 NCD 14-07 Z6 CNUD 17-04 nitrogen content nitrogen content
A 37 40 NCD 07-03 Z6 CNU 17-04 Z3 CN 18-10 Z4 CND 19-10 M
A 42 40 NCDV 07-03 Z6 CND 17-04 controlled Z6 CND 17-12
A 48 Z10 C 13 nitrogen content Z8 CNDT 18-12
A 52 Z12 C 13 Z3 CN 20-09 M Z8 CNDNb 18-12
Base
P 235 GH X5 CrNiCuMo Z4 CN 20-09 M Z5 CND 17-12
metal
P 265 GH 15-06 Z5 CN 18-10
P 295 GH Z6 CN 18-10
P 355 GH Z6 CNNb 18-11
TABLE ZI 5.0

P 355 NH Z8 CNT 18-11

2 C 22
20 M 5 M
20 MN 5 M
23 M 5 M

E 380B EF 2 X 5 CrNi 13-04 ER 308 L ER 316 L ER Ni-Cr 3

E 420 B E 70 T2 (W 19 9 L) (W 19 12 3 L) E Ni-Cr-Fe 3
ER 70 S6 E 7018 E 308 L E 316 L ER Ni-Cr-Fe 7
ER 70 S E 8018 (E 19 9 L) (E 19 12 3 L) E Ni-Cr-Fe 7
E 70 TI ER 308 L ER 316 L
FOR PHYSICAL PROPERTIES (TABLES Z I 6.0 to Z I 8.0)

E 70 EM12K (S 19 9 L) (S 19 12 3 L)


Deposited EQ 308 L
weld (S 19 9 L)
metal
CLASSIFICATION OF THE VARIOUS GRADES USED IN THE RCC-M

E 309 L
(E 23 12 L)
ER 309 L
(S 23 12 L)
EQ 309 L
(S 23 12 L)

n° 137-2012
Subsection Z

CARBON
TYPE 18-10 TYPE 17-12 Mo Z6 NCTDV 25-15 Ni-Cr-Fe et
STEELS AND HIGH Cr
C-Mn-Ni-Mo LOW Cr AUSTENITIC AUSTENITIC AUSTENITIC Ni-Cr-Fe-Nb
MATERIALS CARBONE STEELS
STEELS steel ( 3%) STAINLESS STAINLESS STAINLESS NICKEL BASE
MANGANESE (12 to 17%)
STEELS STEELS STEELS ALLOYS
STEELS

n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition

Sub-groups *
1.1 and 1.2 1.3 2.1 2.2 3.1 3.2 3.3 4.1 and 4.2
Temperatures
(°C)
20 54.6 37.7 32.8 22.7 14.7 14.0 12.9 14.5
50 53.3 38.6 32.7 23.1 15.2 14.4 13.6 15.0
100 51.8 39.9 32.5 23.9 15.8 15.2 14.4 15.7
150 50.3 40.5 32.3 24.7 16.7 15.8 15.2 16.5
200 48.8 40.5 32.2 25.5 17.2 16.6 16.0 17.3
250 47.3 40.2 32.0 26.3 18.0 17.3 16.7 18.0
300 45.8 39.5 31.9 27.1 18.6 17.9 17.4 18.8
350 44.3 38.7 31.7 27.9 19.3 18.6 18.1 19.4
TABLE ZI 6.0 a

400 42.9 37.7 31.6 28.7 20.0 19.2 18.9 20.3

450 41.4 36.6 31.4 29.5 20.5 19.9 21.2
500 39.9 35.5 31.3 30.3 21.1 20.6 22.0
-1

550 38.5 34.3 31.1 31.1 21.7 21.2 22.9

-1

600 37.0 33.0 31.0 31.9 22.2 21.8 23.8

THERMAL CONDUCTIVITY (W . m . K )

650 35.5 31.8 30.8 32.7 22.7 22.4 24.8

700 23.2 23.1 25.7
750 23.7 23.7 26.6
800 24.1 24.3 27.4

* See table ZI 5.0 CLASSIFICATION OF THE VARIOUS GRADES USED IN THE RCC-M

Annex ZI / 41
Subsection Z
 CARBON
TYPE 18-10 TYPE 17-12 Mo Z6 NCTDV 25-15 Ni-Cr-Fe et
STEELS AND HIGH Cr
C-Mn-Ni-Mo LOW Cr AUSTENITIC AUSTENITIC AUSTENITIC Ni-Cr-Fe-Nb
MATERIALS CARBONE STEELS
STEELS steel ( 3%) STAINLESS STAINLESS STAINLESS NICKEL BASE

Annex ZI / 42
MANGANESE (12 to 17%)
STEELS STEELS STEELS ALLOYS
STEELS

Sub-groups *
RCC-M - 2012 Edition

1.1 and 1.2 1.3 2.1 2.2 3.1 3.2 3.3 4.1 and 4.2
Temperatures
(°C)
20 14.70 10.81 8.83 6.24 4.08 3.89 3.46 3.66
50 14.07 10.75 8.69 6.19 4.06 3.89 3.50 3.72
100 13.40 10.57 8.57 6.13 4.05 3.89 3.57 3.80
150 12.65 10.31 8.16 6.09 4.07 3.94 3.67 3.89
200 11.95 9.91 7.90 6.04 4.13 3.99 3.76 3.98
250 11.27 9.42 7.66 5.99 4.22 4.06 3.86 4.08
300 10.62 8.93 7.42 5.96 4.33 4.17 3.94 4.18
350 10.00 8.41 7.15 5.94 4.44 4.26 4.02 4.28
400 9.33 7.86 6.83 5.90 4.56 4.37 4.10 4.39
TABLE ZI 6.0 b

450 8.63 7.26 6.52 5.85 4.67 4.50 4.49

500 7.92 6.63 6.18 5.82 4.75 4.64 4.61
2

550 7.23 6.03 5.83 5.85 4.86 4.75 4.72

-1

600 6.52 5.41 5.47 5.92 4.94 4.85 4.85

THERMAL CONDUCTIVITY (m . s ) (1)

650 5.80 4.78 5.08 6.09 5.01 4.95 4.97

700 5.06 5.04 5.11
750 5.11 5.11 5.24
The values in this table should be multiplied by 10-6

800 5.17 5.17 5.38


* See table ZI 5.0 CLASSIFICATION OF THE VARIOUS GRADES USED IN THE RCC-M

n° 137-2012
Subsection Z

CARBON
TYPE 18-10 TYPE 17-12 Mo Z6 NCTDV 25-15 Ni-Cr-Fe et
STEELS AND C-Mn-Ni-Mo HIGH Cr
AUSTENITIC AUSTENITIC AUSTENITIC Ni-Cr-Fe-Nb

n° 137-2012
MATERIALS CARBONE STEELS AND STEELS
RCC-M - 2012 Edition

STAINLESS STAINLESS STAINLESS NICKEL BASE

MANGANESE LOW Cr ( 3%) (12 to 17%)
STEELS STEELS STEELS ALLOYS
STEELS

Sub-groups* 1.1 and 1.2 1.3 and 2.1 2.2 3.1 3.2 3.3 4.1 and 4.2

Temperatures A B A B A B A B A B A B A B
(°C)
20 10.92 10.92 11.22 11.22 9.42 9.42 16.40 16.40 15.54 15.54 16.50 16.50 12.82 12.82
50 11.36 11.14 11.63 11.45 9.77 9.60 16.84 16.54 16.00 15.72 16.63 16.56 13.22 13.03
100 12.11 11.50 12.32 11.79 10.36 9.96 17.23 16.80 16.49 16.00 16.86 16.68 13.80 13.35
150 12.82 11.87 12.86 12.14 10.89 10.20 17.62 17.04 16.98 16.30 17.08 16.80 14.24 13.61
200 13.53 12.24 13.64 12.47 11.41 10.44 18.02 17.20 17.47 16.60 17.31 16.92 14.56 13.82
250 14.20 12.57 14.27 12.78 11.87 10.69 18.41 17.50 17.97 16.86 17.53 17.02 14.76 14.00
TABLE ZI 7.0

300 14.85 12.89 14.87 13.08 12.35 10.95 18.81 17.70 18.46 17.10 17.75 17.15 15.07 14.17
350 15.50 13.24 15.43 13.40 12.66 11.19 19.20 17.90 18.95 17.36 17.98 17.25 15.39 14.32
400 16.15 13.58 15.97 13.72 12.98 11.40 19.59 18.10 19.45 17.60 18.20 17.36 15.73 14.48
450 16.79 13.93 16.49 14.02 13.47 11.59 19.99 18.24 19.94 17.82 18.43 17.48 - 14.63
COEFFICIENTS OF LINEAR EXPANSION

Coefficient A is the instantaneous coefficient of thermal expansion  10-6 /°C or  10-6 /K

Coefficient B is the average coefficient of thermal expansion  10-6 /°C or  10-6 /K between 20°C and the considered temperature

* See table ZI 5.0 CLASSIFICATION OF THE VARIOUS GRADES USED IN THE RCC-M

Annex ZI / 43
Subsection Z
Annex ZI / 44
3
MODULUS OF ELASTICITY E = GIVEN VALUE  10 (MPa) AT A TEMPERATURE (°C) OF :

MATERIAUX Temp
RCC-M - 2012 Edition

(°C) 0 20 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 550 600
Sub-
groups*
- C and C-Mn steels 1.1 and 1.2
- C-Mn-Ni-Mo steels 1.3 205 204 203 200 197 193 189 185 180 176 171 166 160 155
- Low Cr steels (< 3%) 2.1

High Cr steels (12 to 17%) 2.2 216.5 215.4 213 209.4 206 201.8 197.5 193.5 189 184.5 179 173.5 167

3.1
Type 18.10 and 17.12 Mo
and 198.5 197 195 191.5 187.5 184 180 176.5 172 168 164 160 155.5 151.5
austenitic stainless steels
TABLE ZI 8.0

3.2

Z6 NCT DV 25-15
3.3 201.5 201 199 196 193 189.5 186 182.5 178.5 175 171 166.5 163 158.5
austenitic stainless steels

Nickel base alloys

4.1
Ni-Cr-Fe 219.7 218.2 216 212.9 210 207.3 204.7 202.1 198.9 194.8
4.2
Ni-Cr-Fe-Nb


* See table ZI 5.0 CLASSIFICATION OF THE VARIOUS GRADES USED IN THE RCC-M

n° 137-2012
Subsection Z
RCC-M - 2012 Edition Subsection Z

ANNEX Z II
EXPERIMENTAL ANALYSIS

Z II 100 INTRODUCTION

Z II 110 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

Z II 111 USE OF EXPERIMENTAL STRESS ANALYSIS

Loads or stresses may be evaluated by experimental stress analysis depending on the type of damage
under consideration (see B 3231.1) in component parts, for which theoretical stress analysis is
inadequate or for which design rules are unavailable.
Two approaches may be used:
- direct evaluation for a given type of damage, demonstrating prescribed safety margins,
- or measurement of stress / deformations values for use in analytical demonstrations.
A complete or partial justification may be obtained in accordance with the requirements of
Annex Z II, under the conditions given in Subsections B or C 3000.
Reevaluation is not necessary for configurations for which there are available detailed experimental
results that conform to the requirements of this annex.
Tests to destruction are not required except as provided for piping in B 3649.

Z II 112 DISCOUNTING OF CORROSION ALLOWANCE

The test procedures followed and the interpretation of the results shall be such as to discount the
effects of material added to the thickness of items, such as corrosion allowance, or of other material
which cannot be considered as contributing to the strength of the part, in order to be representative
of the component’s condition at the end of life.
The same approach is applicable for clad components, where cladding is not supposed to contribute
to pressure resistance of the component.

Z II 113 TEST REPORT

A detailed report of the test procedure and the results obtained shall be included with the stress
analysis report. The report shall also justify the selection of instrumentation used.

 No° 137-2012 Annex Z II / 1

RCC-M - 2012 Edition Subsection Z

Z II 120 TYPES OF EXPERIMENTAL TESTS

Experimental tests may be used for:
- stress, strain or deformation evaluations,
- fatigue evaluation,
- static or dynamic behaviour evaluation of the component,
- temperature measurements.
Stress evaluations are covered in Z II 300.
Limit loads determination is covered in Z II 400.
Experimental fatigue analyses are covered in Z II 500.

Z II 200 TEST PROCEDURE

Z II 210 STRAIN MEASUREMENT TEST PROCEDURE

Z II 211 REQUIREMENTS FOR STRAIN GAUGES

Strain gauges of any type capable of indicating relative strains to 0.00005 mm/mm may be used. It
is recommended that the gauge length be such that the maximum strain within the gauge length does
not exceed the average strain within the gauge length by more than 10%. Instrumentation shall be
such that principal stresses on each surface may be determined at each gauge location within the
range of material elastic behaviour at that gauge location.
A similar number and orientation of gauges at each gauge location are required to be used in tests
beyond the range of material elastic behaviour.
It shall be shown:
- that the strain gauges and cements which are used are reliable for use on the material surface
finish and configuration considered,
- that they are reliable to strain values at least 50% higher than those expected.

Z II 212 USE OF MODELS FOR STRAIN OR

DEFORMATION MEASUREMENTS

a) Except for tests made for the determination of limit load, strain gauge data may be obtained from
the actual component or from a model component of any scale that meets the gauge length
requirements of Z II 211. The model material need not be the same as the component material but
shall have an elastic modulus which is either known or has been measured at test conditions. The
requirements of dimensional similitude shall be met as closely as possible.

Annex ZII / 2  No° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition Subsection Z

b) In the case of limit load tests, only full scale models are permitted unless the experimenter can
clearly demonstrate the validity of the scaling laws used.

Z II 220 PHOTOELASTIC TEST TECHNIQUES

Either two or three dimensional techniques may be used in photoelastic testing as long as the model
represents the structural effects of the loading.

Z II 230 LOCATION OF TEST GAUGES

a) Sufficient locations on the component shall be investigated to ensure that the measurements are
taken at the most critical areas and to permit conservative determination of the bending and peak
stress components. The location of the critical areas and the optimum orientation of test gauges
may be determined by a brittle coating test.
b) In tests made for the measurement of limit load, sufficient measurements must be taken so that
all areas which have any reasonable probability of indicating a minimum collapse load are
adequately covered. If strain gauges are used to determine the limit load, particular care should
be taken to assure that strains (either membrane, bending or a combination) are actually
indicative of the load carrying capacity of the structure. If distortion measurement devices are
used, care should be taken to assure that the changes in cardinal dimensions or deflections which
are measured (such as diameter or length extension, or beam or plate deflections), are indicative
of the tendency of the structure to actually collapse.
c) The Manufacturer shall ensure that the tools and measuring devices he uses have the requisite
characteristics and are reliable, particularly with respect to the accuracy and calibration of the
following:
- direct read out manometers. These manometers shall satisfy the following requirements:
. the pressure scale range value shall be chosen close to twice the test pressure, but shall
under no circumstances be less than 1.5 times or greater than 3 times this pressure,
. the maximum tolerated relative error when measuring the test pressure must be no more
than 1%,
- pressure recorder (when used),
- temperature measurement device,
- devices for the measurement of deformation (comparators, displacement sensors, etc.) when
required.

Z II 240 APPLICATION OF PRESSURE OR LOAD

a) In tests for determining governing stresses (cf. B 3231.1), the internal pressure or mechanical
load shall be applied in such increments that the variation of strain with load can be plotted so as
to establish the ratio of stress to load in the elastic range.

 No° 137-2012 Annex Z II / 3

RCC-M - 2012 Edition Subsection Z

If the first loading results in strains which are not linearly proportional to the load, it is
permissible to unload and reload successively until the linear proportionality has been
established.
When photoelastic techniques are used, only one load value can be applied, in which case the
load shall not be so high as to result in deformations that invalidate the test results.
b) In tests made for the measurement of limit load, the proportional load shall be applied in
sufficiently small increments so that an adequate number or data points for each gauge are
available for statistical analysis in the linear elastic range of behaviour.
All gauge distortions should be evaluated prior to increasing the load beyond this value. A least
square fit analysis shall be used to obtain the best fit straight line, and the confidence interval
shall be compared to preset acceptance or rejection values of the strain gauge or other
instrumentation. Unacceptable instrumentation will be replaced and the replacement
instrumentation tested in the same manner.
c) After all instrumentation has been deemed acceptable, the test should be continued on a strain or
displacement-controlled basis with adequate time permitted between load changes for all metal
flow to be completed.

Z II 300 STRESS EVALUATION

Z II 310 DETERMINATION OF STRESSES

Permissible types of tests for the determination of governing stresses are strain measurement tests,
distortion measurement tests (as defined in Z II 230) or photoelastic tests. Brittle coating tests may
be used only for the purpose described in Z II 230.
The experimental results obtained shall be interpreted on an elastic basis to determine the stresses
corresponding to the design loads on the basis of the strain gauge data. The elastic constants used in
the evaluation of experimental data shall be those applicable to the test material at the test
temperature.

Z II 320 EXTENT AND USE OF EXPERIMENTAL STRESS ANALYSIS

The extent of experimental stress analysis shall be sufficient to determine the governing stresses for
which design values are unavailable (cf. Z II 111). When possible, combined analytical and
experimental methods shall be used to distinguish between primary, secondary and local stresses so
that each combination of categories can be compared with the applicable stress limit.

Annex ZII / 4  No° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition Subsection Z

Z II 330 EXPERIMENTAL STRESS ANALYSIS OF OPENINGS

Z II 331 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

If the requirements of B 3331 and Annex ZA are not met in openings, determination of stresses in
accordance with Z II 330 will be acceptable.
In accordance with Z II 111, reevaluation is not required for configurations for which there are
available detailed experimental results that are consistent with the requirements of this Annex.
In the case of slightly different configurations, Z II 332 provides guidelines in order to evaluate
whether available experimental data provide pertinent information or whether additional
investigations are required.

Z II 332 GUIDELINES FOR USE OF AVAILABLE EXPERIMENTAL DATA

Z II 332.1 Effect of d/D ratio

For an unreinforced opening or for an opening where the reinforcement is provided primarily by a
uniform increase in component wall thickness, the stresses around the opening will increase with
increasing d/D ratio of the opening (d = diameter of nozzle or opening; D = diameter of shell).
Therefore, available experimental data for a small d/D ratio cannot be safely applied to a larger d/D
ratio but can be applied to a smaller d/D ratio provided the experiments were made at a d/D ratio
less than 0.5.

Z II 332.2 Effect of D/T ratio

For an unreinforced opening or for an opening where the reinforcement is provided primarily by a
uniform increase in component wall thickness, the stresses around the opening will increase with
increasing D/T ratio (D = diameter of shell; T = nominal shell thickness not including
reinforcement).
Therefore, experimental data for a relatively small D/T ratio cannot be safely applied to a larger D/T
ratio but can be applied to a smaller D/T ratio.

Z II 332.3 Proximity to gross discontinuities

Generally, the stress data available in the literature are applicable only to single openings. Such data
shall be considered valid only for openings sufficiently remote from another nozzle, opening, flange
or other major discontinuity so that superposition of stresses will not produce an unacceptable value
of stress intensity.

 No° 137-2012 Annex Z II / 5

RCC-M - 2012 Edition Subsection Z

Z II 332.4 Rules applicable to geometrical transitions

Stresses at the outside juncture of a nozzle and shell are greatly influenced by the geometrical
transition at the juncture. Generally speaking, stress data available in the literature are for certain
specific transition radii. Other factors being equal, these stress data may be considered valid for
transition radii equal to or greater than those used in the test but shall not be considered valid for
smaller transition radii or for undefined transitions and transitions such as commonly used fillet
welds.

Z II 400 LIMIT LOAD DETERMINATION

Z II 410 TESTS FOR DETERMINING LIMIT LOAD

Strain measurement tests may be used for the determination of limit load.
Deformation measurement tests may also be used if it can be clearly shown that the test set up and
the instrumentation used will give valid results for the configuration on which the measurements are
made.
For deformation measurement tests, the loads are plotted as the ordinate and the measured
deflections are plotted as the abscissa. For strain gauge tests, the loads are plotted as the ordinate
and the maximum principal strains on the surface as the abscissa.

Z II 420 CRITERION OF LIMIT LOAD

The least square fit line, as determined from the data in the linear elastic range, is drawn on each
plot considered. The angle that this line makes with the ordinate is called . A second straight line,
hereafter called the "collapse limit line" is drawn through the intersection of the least square fit line
with the abscissa so that it makes an angle  with the ordinate such that tg  = 2 tg  (see fig.
Z II 420). The test collapse load is determined from the maximum principal strain or deflection
value at the last data point inside the angle  so that the next three data points lie outside this angle.
This point is called the "experimental limit load point". The test limit load is taken as the load on the
"collapse limit line" having the same abscissa as the "experimental limite load point".
The limit load used for design shall be the test limit load multiplied by the ratio of the material yield
strength at design temperature to the test material yield strength at the test temperature (tables
Z I 2.1 and Z I 2.2). Careful attention shall be given to the actual as-built dimensions of the test
model when correlating the limit load of the test model to that expected for the actual structure
being designed.

Annex ZII / 6  No° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition Subsection Z

Z II 500 EXPERIMENTAL FATIGUE ANALYSIS

Z II 510 USE OF FATIGUE TESTS FOR THE EVALUATION

OF CYCLIC LOADING
Fatigue tests as described in this paragraph may be used to evaluate the adequacy of a component or
portion thereof for cyclic loading, when the following conditions are met:
a) Experimental methods constitute a reliable means of evaluating the capability of components and
appurtenances to withstand cyclic loading. In addition, when it is desired to use higher peak
stresses than can be justified by the methods of Z II 300 to Z II 400 and the fatigue curves of
Z I 4.0, the adequacy of a component, appurtenance or portion thereof to withstand cyclic
loading may be demonstrated by means of a fatigue test. The fatigue test shall not be used,
however, as justification for exceeding the allowable values of primary or primary plus
secondary stresses.
b) When a fatigue test is used to demonstrate the adequacy of a component or portion thereof to
withstand cyclic loading, a description of the test shall be included in the stress report. This
description shall contain sufficient detail to show compliance with the above requirements.
c) The number of tests performed shall be justified with respect to the validity of the method
described in Z II 520.

Z II 520 REQUIREMENTS FOR CYCLIC TESTING OF COMPONENTS

The requirements of a) to g) below shall be met.
a) The test component or portion being tested shall be constructed of material having the same
composition and subjected to the same mechanical working and heat treating so as to produce
mechanical properties equivalent to those of the material in the prototype component.
Geometrical similarity must be maintained, at least in those portions whose ability to withstand
cyclic loading is being investigated, and in those adjacent areas which affect the stresses in the
portion under test.
b) The test component or portion thereof shall withstand the number of cycles as set forth in c)
below, before failure occurs. Failure is herein defined as a propagation of a crack through the
entire thickness, such as would produce a measurable leak in a pressure retaining member.
c) The minimum number of cycles (hereinafter referred to as test cycles), which the component
shall withstand and the magnitude of the loading (hereinafter referred to as the test loading) to be
applied to the component during test, shall be determined by multiplying the specified service
cycles by a factor KTN and the specified service loads by KTS. Values of these factors shall be
determined by means of the diagram, the construction of which is given below and is illustrated
in Fig. Z II 520.c.1.

 No° 137-2012 Annex Z II / 7

RCC-M - 2012 Edition Subsection Z

1) Project a vertical line from the specified service cycles ND on the abscissa of Fig. Z I 4.0 to an
ordinate value of Ks (see Z II 520 g) times SaD. Label this point A.
2) Extend a horizontal line through the point D until its length corresponds to an abscissa value
of Kn (see Z II 520 g) times ND. Label this point B.
3) Connect the points A and B. The segment AB embraces all the allowable combinations KTS
and KTN (see Z II 520 d) for accelerated testing). Any point C on this segment may be chosen
at the convenience of the tester. Referring to Fig. Z II 520 c.1, the factors KTS and KTN are
defined by:

Value of ordinate at point C

K TS 
Value of ordinate at point D
and
Value of abscissa at point C
K TN 
Value of abscissa at point D
then:
PT (test loading) = KTS × specified service loading,
NT (minimum number of test cycles) = KTN  specified service cycles.
4) It should be noted that, if the test article is not a full size component but a geometrically
similar model, then the value of PT shall be adjusted by the appropriate scale factor to be
determined from structural similitude principles if the loading is other than pressure. The
number of cycles that the component shall withstand during this test without failure shall not
be less than NT while subjected to a cyclic test loading PT (adjusted, if required, using model
similitude principles if the component is not full size).
5) In certain instances, it may be desirable in performing the test to increase only the loading or
number of cycles, but not both, in which event two special cases of interest result from the
above general case, as described in Z II 520 e) and f).
d) Accelerated fatigue testing (test cycles NT are less than specified service cycles ND) may be
conducted if the specified service cycles ND are greater than 104 and the testing conditions are
determined by the procedures of 1 through 3 below which are illustrated in Fig. Z II 520 c.2. In
this figure, the points A, B and D correspond to similar labelled points in Fig. Z II 520 c.1.
1) The minimum number of test cycles NTmin shall be NTmin = 102 N D . Project a vertical line
through NTmin on the abscissa of Sa versus N diagram such that it intersects and extends
beyond the fatigue design curve.
2) Construct a curve through the point A and intersect the vertical projection of NTmin
(Z II 520 d.1) by multiplying each point on the fatigue design curve by the factor Ks
(Z II 520 c.1). Label the intersection of this curve and the vertical projection of NTmin as A':

Annex ZII / 8  No° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition Subsection Z

3) Any point C on the segment A'AB determines the allowable combinations of KTS and KTN.
The factors KTS and KTN are obtained in the same manner as in Z II 520 c).
e) Case 1 (Factor applied to cycles only).
In this case, KTS = 1 , and
Value of abscissa at point B
K TN 
Value of abscissa at point D
The number of test cycles that the component shall withstand during this test shall not be less
than NT = KTN  specified service cycles, while subjected to the cyclic design service loading,
adjusted as required, if a model is used.
f) Case 2 (Factor applied to loading only)
In this case, KTN = 1 , and
Value of ordinate at point A
K TS 
Value of ordinate at point D

The component shall withstand a number of cycles at least equal to the number of specified
service cycles, while subjected to a cyclic test loading PN = KTS  specified service loading,
again adjusted as required, if a model is used.
g) The values of Ks and Kn are obtained from factors which account for the effects of size, surface
finish, temperature and the number of replicate tests performed.
They shall be determined as follows:
Ks = Ksl  Ksf  Kst  Kss ,but shall never be allowed to be less than 1.25, where
Kn = (Ks)4,3 , but shall never be allowed to be less than 2.6, where
Ksl = factor for the effect of size on fatigue life:
 LM 
 1.5  0.5  
 LP 
where LM/LP is the ratio of linear model size to prototype size.
KSF = factor for the effect of surface finish:
 SFM 
 1.175  0.175  
 SFP 
where SFM/SFP is the ratio of model surface finish to prototype surface finish, expressed in
microns (RMA: arithmetic average roughness).
KSt = factor to be used only when fatigue curves at various temperatures are available.
- If the test temperature is less than the maximum temperature of the transient under
consideration:
S a (N) or  a (N) at test température
K st 
S a (N) or  a (N) at maximum temperature of transient under consideration

- Otherwise, Kst = 1.

 No° 137-2012 Annex Z II / 9

RCC-M - 2012 Edition Subsection Z

Kss = factor for the statistical variation in test results

= 1.470 – (0.044  number of replicate tests)
No value of Ks1, Ksf, Kst or Kss less than 1 may be used in calculating Ks.

Z II 530 DETERMINATION OF FATIGUE STRENGTH REDUCTION

FACTOR
Z II 531 PROCEDURES

Experimental determination of fatigue strength reduction factors shall be in accordance with the
procedures of a) to f) below:
a) The test part shall be fabricated from a material similar to the actual component and shall be
subjected to the same heat treatment as the actual component (see SECTION IV - subsection S).
b) The stress level in the specimen shall be such that the stress intensity does not exceed the limit
prescribed in B 3234.2 and so that failure does not occur in less than 1000 cycles.
c) The configuration, surface finish and stress state of the specimen shall closely simulate those
expected in the component. In particular, the stress gradient shall not be more abrupt than that
expected in the component.
d) The cyclic rate shall be such that appreciable heating of the specimen does not occur.
e) The number of tests performed shall be justified with respect to the validity of this method.
f) The fatigue strength reduction factor shall preferably be determined by performing tests on
notched and unnotched specimens and calculated as the ratio of the nominal unnotched specimen
stress to the notched specimen stress [nom (unnotched)/ nom (notched)] resulting in the same
fatigue life.

Annex ZII / 10  No° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition Subsection Z

FIGURE Z II 420
DETERMINATION OF LIMIT LOAD

 No° 137-2012 Annex Z II / 11

RCC-M - 2012 Edition Subsection Z

FIGURE Z II 520 c.1

CONSTRUCTION OF THE TESTING PARAMETERS
RATIO DIAGRAM

Annex ZII / 12  No° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition Subsection Z

FIGURE Z II 520 c.2

CONSTRUCTION OF THE TESTING PARAMETERS RATIO DIAGRAM
FOR ACCELERATED TESTS

 No° 137-2012 Annex Z II / 13

RCC-M - 2012 Edition Subsection Z

Annex ZII / 14  No° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition Subsection Z

ANNEX Z III

DETERMINATION OF ALLOWABLE
BASIC STRESS LIMITS

Z III 100 INTRODUCTION

Z III 110 ORIGIN OF STRESS CRITERIA

This annex defines the rules for determining allowable basic stress limits.
The mechanical properties used in determining these limits shall be representative of those materials
of finished products in compliance with the provisions of M 122.
The allowable basic stress limits are obtained by applying reduction factors to the minimum
mechanical properties specified for 20°C and the mechanical properties at temperature:
a) either given in tables Z I 2.0 for Sy and Z I 3.0 for Su,

b) or determined by a statistical method based upon a sufficient number of tests on representative

samples, with the following definitions:
1) the yield strength at temperature, Sy, is the most probable value (*) of the yield strength at
temperature of a product whose yield strength at 20°C is equal to the specified minimum
value,
2) the tensile strength at temperature, Su, is the lowest of the following values:

. specified minimum tensile strength at 20°C,

. 110/100 of the most probable (*) value of the tensile strength of a product whose tensile
strength at 20°C is equal to the specified minimum value.

c) or, for a new product, equal to the minimum specified value at temperature, for the yield strength
at temperature and for the tensile strength respectively.
In the last case, the specified values shall be verified during acceptance testing.

_________________________
(*) The most probable value is defined as the median of the statistical distribution.

 n° 137-2012 Annex ZIII / 1

RCC-M - 2012 Edition Subsection Z

Z III 120 TABLES: LOCATION AND APPLICATION

Z III 121 LOCATION
All basic allowable stress intensity values for class 1, basic allowable stresses for classes 2 and 3,
and yield strength used in design in compliance with the rules in this Code are given in tables of
annex Z I; these values are given as a function of temperature. For each application of these values,
the temperature to be taken into account is the actual metal temperature.

Z III 122 APPLICATION

Z III 122.1 Allowable basic stress intensity values
Allowable basic stress intensity values are given in tables Z I 1.1, Z I 1.2 and Z I 1.3 for class 1
components.

Z III 122.2 Allowable basic stress values

The allowable basic stress values for class 2 and 3 components are given in table Z I 1.4, Z 1.5
and Z I 1.6.

Z III 122.3 Fatigue curves

Fatigue curves are given in figures Z I 4.0 for class 1 and 2 components.

Z III 200 STRESS CRITERIA FOR

CLASS 1 COMPONENTS

Z III 210 ALLOWABLE BASIC STRESS INTENSITY

Z III 211 COMPONENTS OTHER THAN BOLTING
The factors applied to mechanical properties when preparing tables Z I 1.1 and Z I 1.2 are given
below. The upper temperature limits in tables Z I 1.1 and Z I 1.2 correspond to values beyond which
creep damage shall be taken into account. The rules of SECTION I are not applicable for service
temperatures which exceed these limits.
For the materials listed in annex Z I, the values given in tables Z I 1.1 and Z I 1.2 are applicable.
a) The allowable basic stress intensity for ferritic steels and for non-ferrous alloys and metals, with
the exception of those covered by b) below, is the lowest of the following values, for each
temperature considered:
- 1/3 of the specified minimum tensile strength at room temperature Rm,
- 1/3 of the tensile strength at temperature Su,

Annex ZIII / 2  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition Subsection Z

- 2/3 of the specified minimum yield strength at room temperature Re,

- 2/3 of yield strength at temperature Sy.

b) The allowable basic stress intensity value for austenitic steels, nickel-chromium-iron and nickel-
iron-chromium alloys is the lowest of the following values
- 1/3 of Rm,
- 1/3 of Su,
- 2/3 of Re,
- 90 % of Sy.
Rm, Su, Re, Sy are defined in a) above.

Z III 212 BOLTING MATERIALS

For bolting materials, the stress values given in table Z I 1.3 correspond to the lower of the two
following values:
- 1/3 of Re,
- 1/3 of Sy.
Re and Sy are defined in Z III 211 a) above.

Z III 220 FATIGUE CURVES FOR ALL MATERIALS

The fatigue curves of figures Z I 4.0 are obtained from uniaxial strain cycling data. The imposed
strain amplitude (half range) is multiplied by the modulus of elasticity to convert values into stress
units. A best fit to the experimental data is obtained by applying the least squares method to the
logarithms of the stress values. When necessary, the curves are adjusted to take into account the
maximum effect of the average stress.
The fatigue curves in figures Z I 4.0 are established using the adjusted curves, taking the envelope
of the lowest stress intensity values obtained independently by:

a) reducing the stress by a factor of 2,

b) reducing the number of cycles by a factor of 20.

These factors are intended to cover various effects such as those of environment, size or dispersion
of results. As a result they do not correspond to safety margins.

 n° 137-2012 Annex ZIII / 3

RCC-M - 2012 Edition Subsection Z

Z III 300 STRESS CRITERIA FOR

CLASS 2 AND 3 COMPONENTS

The factors applied to the mechanical properties when preparing tables Z I 7.0 are given below.

Z III 310 COMPONENTS OTHER THAN BOLTING MATERIALS

a) The allowable basic stress value S, for ferritic steels shall be the lowest of the following values
for each temperature considered:
- 1/3.5 of the specified minimum tensile strength at room temperature Rm,
- 1/3.5 of the tensile strength at temperature Su,
- 2/3 of the specified minimum yield strength at room temperature Re,
- 2/3 of the yield strength at temperature Sy.

b) The allowable basic stress values S, for austenitic steels shall be the lowest of the following
values for each temperature considered:
- 1/3.5 of the specified minimum tensile strength at room temperature Rm,
- 1/3.5 of the tensile strength at temperature Su,
- 2/3 of the specified minimum yield strength at room temperature Re,
- 90% of the yield strength at temperature Sy.

Z III 320 BOLTING MATERIALS

Allowable basic stress values S for bolting materials shall be determined by the same method as for
other components, in accordance with Z III 310, with the following additional requirement for heat
treated components: the allowable basic stress at temperature shall not be greater than the lower of
the following values:
- 1/5 of the specified minimum tensile strength at room temperature Rm,
- 1/4 of the specified minimum yield strength at room temperature Re.

Annex ZIII / 4  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition Subsection Z

ANNEX Z IV

DESIGN RULES FOR COMPONENTS

SUBJECTED TO EXTERNAL PRESSURE

Z IV 100 DESIGN METHOD

Z IV 110 GENERAL
The rules given in this paragraph shall be used to determine the resistance of shells of revolution
subjected to external pressure, with or without stiffening rings, and governed by the provisions of
SECTION I.
The charts used in the application of this annex are given in Z IV 200 and are based on a Poisson
coefficient value  = 0.3.
Tolerances for deviation from true circular form are given in F 4217.
The possible corrosion allowance is excluded from the analysis (situation of a corroded component).

Z IV 111 REQUIREMENTS ASSOCIATED WITH THE VARIOUS CRITERIA LEVELS

Where compliance with criteria levels A, B, C, D is required, the maximum external pressure for the
situation considered shall not exceed the following values.
100 % : for the conditions associated with criteria level A,
110 % : for the conditions associated with criteria level B,
120 % : for the conditions associated with criteria level C,
150 % : for the conditions associated with criteria level D,
with respect to the allowable external pressure, determined in accordance with the procedure below
for the condition considered.
A single value may be computed, provided that evidence is given that the allowable external
pressure determined as per the following procedure remains lower than the pressures which would
have been obtained if the above rules had been applied.
The specified test pressure shall not exceed 135 % of the allowable external pressure associated with
criteria level A.

 n° 137-2012 Annex ZIV / 1

RCC-M - 2012 Edition Subsection Z

Z IV 120 NOMENCLATURE
The symbols used in this paragraph are defined as follows:
A : Factor determined from figure Z IV 220 or analytically in Z IV 130.
As : Cross-sectional area of the stiffening ring, in mm2.
B : Value determined using the diagrams in figure Z IV 220 or using the method described in
Z IV 130.
Do : Outside diameter of the cylindrical shell or tubular product under consideration or of the
equivalent cylinder in the case of a conical shell in mm.
D : Inside diameter of the shell considered, in mm.
E : Modulus of elasticity of the material at the maximum temperature of the condition under
consideration, in MPa.
h : Theoretical inside depth of the designed heads, mm (Z IV 141).
K1 : Factor which depends on the ratio D/2 h used for designing elliptical heads.
Is : Moment of inertia of the combined ring/shell section about its neutral axis parallel to the axis
of the shell, in mm4. The width of the shell which is taken as contributing to the combined
moment of inertia shall not be greater than 1.1 DoT and it shall be taken as lying one half
on each side of the centroid of the ring; portions of shells shall not be considered as
contributing area to more than one stiffening ring.
L : Design length of a shell section in mm, taken as the largest of the following:
a) for cylindrical shells:
1) the distance between head tangent lines plus 1/3 of the theoretical depth of each head if
there are no stiffening rings;
2) the greatest centre to centre distance between any two adjacent stiffening rings;
3) the distance from the centre of the first stiffening ring to the head tangent line plus
1/3 of the theoretical depth of the head.
b) for conical shells, refer to Z IV 131.

Ls : Half-sum of the distances between two lines of support on either side of the stiffening ring
in mm. These distances are measured along the shell axis from the centre of gravity of
stiffening ring cross-section.
A line of support is:
- a stiffening ring that meets the requirements of this paragraph.
- a circumferential line on a head at 1/3 of the depth of the head from the head tangent line.
- a circumferential connection to a jacket.

Annex ZIV / 2  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition Subsection Z

P : Maximum external pressure for the condition under consideration, in MPa.

Pa : Allowable external pressure for the condition under consideration in MPa.
R : Inside radius of curvature of the shell, in mm:
- inside radius for spherical or cylindrical shell,
- radius of the spherical dome for torispherical heads,
- radius of the equivalent sphere for elliptical heads (Z IV 141).

So : The smaller of the following:

0.5 times the ultimate tensile strength Su.
0.9 times the yield strength Sy.
Su and Sy are defined at the maximum temperature for the condition under consideration in
the tables of annex Z I or in accordance with annex Z III.
It should be noted that for class 3 components the coefficient value of 0.85 should not be
taken into account when applying this annex Z IV.

T : Minimum required thickness for the shell, excluding corrosion allowance; in mm.

Z IV 130 CYLINDRICAL, SPHERICAL AND CONICAL SHELLS,

AND TUBULAR PRODUCTS
Z IV 131 CYLINDRICAL SHELLS AND TUBULAR PRODUCTS
The minimum thickness of cylindrical shells and tubular products* is determined by selecting a wall
thickness, T, and then verifying it using the following procedure, depending on Do/T ratio.
* An alternative method is also proposed in Annex ZM for nickel-based alloy heat exchanger tubes meeting the
following conditions:
- medium thickness tubes, i.e. 14 < Dmean/T < 22,
- out-of-roundness, o, between 0 and 6%.

a) if Do/T  10
1) Determination of factor A
Factor A is determined using one of the following methods:
- graphically, using figure Z IV 210.
Factor A is read at the point where the curve Do/T intersects a line drawn parallel to the
ordinates axis from the value of L/Do.

 n° 137-2012 Annex ZIV / 3

RCC-M - 2012 Edition Subsection Z

- analytically, valid for values of L/Do  0.1

1.3 (T / Do )3 / 2
 0.23 (T / Do ) 2
(L / Do )  0.45 (T / Do )1 / 2
A  max

1.1 (T / Do ) 2

2) Determination of the value of B:

The value of B is calculated using one of the following methods:
- graphically, using diagrams Z IV 220.
The value of B is read at the point where the curve for the material used at the
maximum temperature for the condition under consideration intersects a line drawn
parallel to the ordinates axis from the value of A calculated above.
For the straight part of the curve, B = 1/2 AE.
- analytically:
. for ferritic steel:
Sy 1
if A  A1  0.80 B AE
E 2

Sy Sy A
if A1  0.80  A  A 2  0.01  B  0.4 Sy  
E E  A1 
Log (1.25)
where 
Log (A 2 / A1 )

Sy 1
if A  A 2  0.01  B Sy
E 2

. for austenitic steel:

Sy 1
if A  A1  0.60 B AE
E 2
0,37
Sy Sy A
if A1  0.60  A  A 2  1.8 B  0.3 Sy  
E E  A1 

Sy Sy  A 
if A 2  1.8  A  A 3  0.02  2 B  0.45 Sy  
E E  A2 
Log (1,11)
where 
Log (A3 / A 2 )

Sy 1
if A  A 3  0.02  2 B Sy
E 2

Annex ZIV / 4  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition Subsection Z

3) Compute the allowable external pressure by means of the formula:

4 B
Pa 
3 ( D o /T )

4) Compare Pa with P. If Pa is smaller than P, the procedure is repeated for a higher value of T
until Pa is at least equal to P.

b) Do/T < 10
1) Use the procedure defined in a) to compute A and B. For values of A greater than 0.1, the
value 0.1 shall be taken.
2) Calculate Pa1 by means of the following formula:

1  26 
Pa 1   
 ( D /T )  1  B
12  o 
3) Calculate Pa2 by means of the following formula:

2So  1 
Pa 2  1  
(D o / T)  (D o / T) 

4) The maximum allowable external pressure Pa is equal to the smaller value of Pa1 and Pa2.

5) Compare Pa with P.
If Pa is smaller than P the procedure is repeated for a higher value of T until Pa is at least
equal to P.

Z IV 132 CONICAL SHELLS (see figure Z IV 132)

The rules set for below are applicable to the conical shells whose half-apex angle does not
exceed 60°.
For larger angles, the conical shell is analyzed as a flat head. Stiffening rings can only be installed if
the half-apex angle does not exceed 45°.
The minimum wall thickness of the conical shell is determined according to the procedure set up for
the cylindrical shells, where:
De
Do  diameter of the equivalent cylinder
cos 

H  H  1 H  D 
L 1  tg    1  b 
cos   De  2 cos   De 
in these formulae:
De = Outside diameter of the conical shell at the large base.
Db = Outside diameter of the conical shell at the small base.
 = Half the apex angle.

 n° 137-2012 Annex ZIV / 5

RCC-M - 2012 Edition Subsection Z

H = Height of the conical shell measured along the axis of revolution:

- when the shell is stiffened by one or more rings, the measurement is taken from the neutral
axis of the stiffening ring;
- at the junction plane of the conical shell with a cylindrical shell or with a conical shell of
different angle, the measurement shall be taken at the external surface crossing point.

Z IV 133 SPHERICAL SHELLS

The minimum thickness of the spherical shells is determined by first assuming a wall thickness T
and then verifying it in accordance with the following procedure:
1) Determination of factor A:
1 1
A
8 (R / T )

2) Determination of the value of B:

The value of B is calculated using one of the methods described in Z IV 130.a.2).

3) Compute the allowable external pressure by means of the formula:

B
Pa 
(R / T)

4) Compare Pa with P. If Pa is smaller than P, the procedure is repeated for a higher value of T until
Pa is at least equal to P.

Z IV 140 ELLIPTICAL AND TORISPHERICAL HEADS

Z IV 141 ELLIPTICAL HEADS
The minimum thickness of a seamless or butt welded elliptical head is computed using the
procedure defined for spherical shells. The radius of curvature R is that of the equivalent sphere:

R = K1 Do where K1 is defined in the table below:

VALUES OF K1

(Interpolate for intermediate values)

D/2h - 3.0 2.8 2.6 2.4 2.2

K1 - 1.36 1.27 1.18 1.08 0.99
D/2 h 2.0 1.8 1.6 1.4 1.2 1.0
K1 0.90 0.81 0.73 0.65 0.57 0.50

Annex ZIV / 6  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition Subsection Z

Z IV 142 TORISPHERICAL HEADS

The minimum thickness of a seamless or butt welded torispherical head subjected to external
pressure is determined by means of the procedure defined for spherical heads. The radius of
curvature R is that of the head dome.

Z IV 150 DESIGN OF STIFFENING RINGS

ZIV 151 STIFFENING RINGS FOR CYLINDRICAL SHELLS
a) Connection of the stiffening ring with the shell is realized by welding on each side of the ring.
For class 1 components, these welds shall be continuous and conform with B 3354.
For class 2 and 3 components, these welds may be discontinuous, provided C 3354 provisions are
met.

b) The required moment of inertia of the stiffening ring shall be determined by the procedure
described in 1) to 6), and respecting the geometrical requirements of c) below.
1) Assuming that the shell has been designed and that Do. Ls and T are known, select a member
to be used for the stiffening ring and determine its cross-section area As and the value of Is
defined in Z IV 120. Then calculate B with the following formula:
3 PDo
B 
4 T  A s / Ls

2) Enter the chart of Z IV 220 corresponding to the material at the value of B determined in 1).
Different materials may be used for the shell and the stiffening ring, provided that the average
thermal expansion coefficients do not differ by more than 15%. The curve giving the greater
value of coefficient A defined below will be used.
The analytical method described in Z IV 130 a) may be used.

3) Move horizontally to the material/temperature curve corresponding to the maximum

temperature for the situation considered.

4) Move down vertically and read the value of A on the abscissa axis. For the values of B
located before the beginning of the curve as well as for the values concerning the linear part
of the charts, factor A may be calculated by the following formula:
A = 2 B/E

5) Calculate the required moment of inertia of the combined ring and shell section by the
following formula:

Do2 Ls (T  As / Ls ) A
Ir 
10.9

 n° 137-2012 Annex ZIV / 7

RCC-M - 2012 Edition Subsection Z

or calculate the moment of inertia required for the stiffening ring alone, by means of the
formula:

1  A 
I  Do2 Ls  T  s  A
14  Ls 

6) If the required moment of inertia Ir is greater than the computed moment of inertia Is for the
shell and stiffening ring combined section calculated in accordance with 1) a new section with
a greater moment of inertia shall be selected and the new moment of inertia determined. If the
required moment of inertia Ir is smaller than the computed moment of inertia Is the
corresponding section is deemed to be satisfactory.

c) The stiffening ring shall meet the following geometrical requirements:

- the height of a stiffening ring made of flat iron shall not exceed 16 times its thickness,
- a stiffening ring made of angle, T, or I sectional iron shall be such that the height of the web
does not exceed 50 times its thickness and the length of the free flange edges does not exceed
the smaller of the following two values:
- 16 times its thickness ts

- 0.55 D . ts

Examples are given in figures in Z IV 151 c.

Z IV 152 STIFFENING RINGS FOR CONICAL SHELLS

The stiffening rings for conical shells shall meet the same requirements as for the cylindrical shells
(Z IV 151).
The procedure of Z IV 151 b) is modified as follows:
L1, L2 = length of the conical shells, measured parallel to the generatrix, (figure Z IV 152),
between two lines of support on either side of the stiffening ring. These lengths are related
to the parts of the shell situated towards the large base and towards the cone apex
respectively.

Ls =
1
L1  L 2 
2

De = Outside diameter of the conical shell at the support line considered.

 = half the apex angle of the cone, less than 45°.
De
Do =
cos 

Since P is the external pressure, it shall be replaced by the following formula in the computation
of B in paragraph Z IV 151 b1):
 2 L1  L 2  
P 1  sin  
 3 De 

Annex ZIV / 8  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition Subsection Z

Z IV 160 CYLINDERS UNDER AXIAL COMPRESSION

The maximum allowable compressive stress to be used in the design of cylindrical shells and tubular
product subjected to loads liable to produce longitudinal compressive stresses in the shell or wall
shall be the smaller of the values defined in a) and b) below, according to the type of component:
a) For class 1 component:
the value of the allowable stress, intensity Sm.
For class 2 and 3 component;
the value of the basic allowable stress, S.
These two values, Sm and S, are given in annex Z I or determined in accordance with annex Z III.

b) The value of factor B, expressed in MPa, determined as per procedure below:

1) Determination of factor A:
1 1
A
8 R /T

2) Determination of the value of B:

The value of B is calculated using one of the methods described in Z IV 130.a.2).

c) Compare the compressive stress calculated for the shell and the maximum allowable compressive
stress such as determined above.
If the latter value is smaller, the calculation is repeated with a greater value of T, until obtaining a
maximum allowable stress larger than the compressive stress in the shell.

Z IV 200 CHARTS FOR DETERMINING MAXIMUM

ALLOWABLE EXTERNAL PRESSURE

a) Figure Z IV 210 - Geometric charts for cylinders under external pressure or subjected to axial
compressive loads.

b) Figures Z IV 220 - Charts for determining shell thickness of cylindrical and spherical
components under external pressure.

 n° 137-2012 Annex ZIV / 9

RCC-M - 2012 Edition Subsection Z

CONICAL SHELLS - NOMENCLATURE

FIGURE Z IV 132

NOMENCLATURE NOMENCLATURE
FIGURE Z IV 141 FIGURE Z IV 142

Annex ZIV / 10  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition Subsection Z

FIGURE Z IV 151 c

GEOMETRICAL CONDITION FOR CYLINDRICAL

AND CONICAL SHELL STIFFENING RINGS

 n° 137-2012 Annex ZIV / 11

RCC-M - 2012 Edition Subsection Z

Ls 
1
 L1  L2 
2

FIGURE Z IV 152

CONICAL SHELL STIFFENING RINGS

- NOMENCLATURE -

Annex ZIV / 12  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition Subsection Z

FIGURE Z IV 210
TYPICAL CURVES FOR THE GEOMETRY OF CYLINDRICAL SHELLS
SUBJECTED TO EXTERNAL PRESSURE
OR COMPRESSIVE AXIAL LOADS

 n° 137-2012 Annex ZIV / 13

RCC-M - 2012 Edition Subsection Z

FIGURE Z IV 221.1

FIGURE Z IV 221.2
Note: For all values of A beneath the origin of the curves or for those relating to the linear part of the graphs,
B = 0.5 A.E, where E is the modulus of elasticity of the material at the temperature considered.

CHARTS FOR DETERMINING THE THICKNESS OF CYLINDRICAL

OR SPHERICAL SHELLS SUBJECTED TO EXTERNAL PRESSURE

Annex ZIV / 14  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition Subsection Z

Note: For all values of A beneath the origin of the curves or for those relating to the linear part of the graphs,
B = 0.5 A.E, where E is the modulus of elasticity of the material at the temperature considered.

FIGURE Z IV 221.3

CHARTS FOR DETERMINING THE THICKNESS OF CYLINDRICAL

OR SPHERICAL SHELLS SUBJECTED TO EXTERNAL PRESSURE

 n° 137-2012 Annex ZIV / 15

RCC-M - 2012 Edition Subsection Z

FIGURE Z IV 221.4

Note: For all values of A beneath the origin of the curves or for those relating to the linear part of the graphs,
B = 0.5 A.E, where E is the modulus of elasticity of the material at the temperature considered.

CHARTS FOR DETERMINING THE THICKNESS OF CYLINDRICAL

OR SPHERICAL SHELLS SUBJECTED TO EXTERNAL PRESSURE

Annex ZIV / 16  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition Subsection Z

FIGURE Z IV 221.5

Note: For all values of A beneath the origin of the curves or for those relating to the linear part of the graphs,
B = 0.5 A.E, where E is the modulus of elasticity of the material at the temperature considered.

CHARTS FOR DETERMINING THE THICKNESS OF CYLINDRICAL

OR SPHERICAL SHELLS SUBJECTED TO EXTERNAL PRESSURE

 n° 137-2012 Annex ZIV / 17

RCC-M - 2012 Edition Subsection Z

FIGURE Z IV 221.6

Note: For all values of A beneath the origin of the curves or for those relating to the linear part of the graphs, B =
0.5 AE, where E is the modulus of elasticity of the material at the temperature considered.

CHARTS FOR DETERMINING THE THICKNESS OF CYLINDRICAL

OR SPHERICAL SHELLS SUBJECTED TO EXTERNAL PRESSURE

Annex ZIV / 18  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition Subsection Z

FIGURE Z IV 221.7

FIGURE Z IV 221.8

Note: For all values of A beneath the origin of the curves or for those relating to the linear part of the graphs, B = 0.5
A.E, where E is the modulus of elasticity of the material at the temperature considered.

CHARTS FOR DETERMINING THE THICKNESS OF CYLINDRICAL

OR SPHERICAL SHELLS SUBJECTED TO EXTERNAL PRESSURE

 n° 137-2012 Annex ZIV / 19

RCC-M - 2012 Edition Subsection Z

Annex ZIV / 20  n° 137-2012

RCC-M - 2012 Edition Subsection Z

ANNEX Z V

DESIGN OF CIRCULAR BOLTED

FLANGE CONNECTIONS

Z V 100 INTRODUCTION

Z V 110 GENERAL
a) The purpose of this annex is to size flanges and associated bolting with due consideration to the
effects of inside pressure and of the tightening forces applied to the gasket (in particular to
ensure the leaktightness of the connection under the service loads encountered).
This annex may be applied for sizing of components of all classes under the conditions indicated
in the applicable chapter of the RCC-M for each class.
A more detailed analysis of components under various operating conditions and/or different
types of loads may be made elsewhere in accordance with the requirements of these applicable
chapters.
b) Bolted flange connections are made up of three types of constituent parts: flanges, gaskets and
bolts. The design of the flange connection is influenced by the specific properties of each type of
constituent part.
A number of requirements in this respect are given in Z V 120 to Z V 140 below.
c) The notations used are given in Z V 210.

Z V 120 FLANGES
The materials used to make mated flanges shall be of the same grade sub-groups as defined in table
Z I.5.0, failing which, the risk of corrosion and the mechanical and thermal properties of the
dissimilar metal joint shall be taken into account
The use of standard flanges (NF, ANSI B 16-5, etc.) at the pressures and temperatures prescribed in
these standards does not exclude the need to verify connection strength in accordance with the
requirements of the following paragraphs, under all the loads applied, unless otherwise specified
either in B, C, D 3000 or Z V 300.
The surface conditions of the gasket contact faces shall be compatible with the type of gasket, the
fluid and the required leaktightness.

 n° 137-2012 Annex Z V / 1
RCC-M - 2012 Edition Subsection Z

The respective surface conditions of the contact surfaces shall be identical and their roughness class
shall at least be N 10 as defined by standard NF E 05-051*. The machining liness shall be
concentric and it is recommended that the gasket seating tolerances be defined in conjunction with
the gasket supplier.
The contact surface of the nuts or the bolt heads shall be machined and this contact surface shall be
parallel to the gasket contact surface to within 1°.
The method of analysis presented in this annex applies to integral type flanges on condition that the
gasket is contained entirely within the bolt circle. The method of analysis should be adapted for the
other types of flanges (see figures Z V 110.1, 2 and 3 for the three types of flanges used). The
method of analysis used to determine bolt cross sections also applies to blind flanges (manway
covers).
The applicable maximum allowable stresses are those corresponding to the material used: these
stresses are indicated in annex Z I.

* Standard NF E 05-051 specifies class N 10 as having a roughness of Ra = 12.5 µm.

Z V 130 GASKETS
The type of gasket is selected according to the application (fluid, temperature, pressure, etc.) and the
required degree of leaktightness.
The gasket is circular in form and its diameter (Dj) is inscribed concentrically inside of the bolt
circle (C).
Gasket characteristics shall be specified by the Manufacturer.
They include:
- dimensions,
- width and diameter of the contact surface,
- elements used to determine the force (Fj) required to ensure gasket seating; the leaktightness
required may be specified as a leak rate,
- elements used to determine the tightening force (FM) required to ensure leaktightness at the
pressure of the fluid under service conditions.

Z V 131 REMARKS
- The Manufacturer shall not rely on standard tables providing tightening load, as these are
generally not reliable; the Manufacturer shall obtain gasket loads directly from his gasket
Supplier. Whenever possible, these loads shall be associated with a leak rate.

- In the event of large variations in the gasket load, the Manufacturer shall verify the safety margin
against leakage with regard to load release (residual seal, see figure Z V 131). A spacer may be
used to resolve this problem.

Annex Z V / 2  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition Subsection Z

- Using a spacer, or making a groove leading to a metal-to-metal flange contact inside the driling
circle, is recommended.

Z V 140 BOLTING
1) Annex Z I provides maximum allowable stresses for bolting materials.

2) Bolt items may be of carbon steel or heat treated steel alloy.

3) Two cases must be considered for heat treated steel alloy:

a) the minimum tensile strength at room temperature is greater than 750 MPa: the problem of
breaks under heads shall be avoided by using threaded rods with nuts at either end, or studs
(slender shank studs or rods may be used),
b) the minimum tensile strength at room temperature is less than or equal to 750 MPa normal
bolts with slender shanks may be used.

4) Threading shall be machined or rolled.

Bolting rolled threads shall be used instead of bolting with machined threads.
The threads shall have an ISO form in accordance with French standard NF ISO 68-1.

5) The nominal diameter of bolts shall be at least 12 mm.

6) For slender shank bolts, the cross sectional area at the root shall be at least 1.1 times the cross
section of the non-threaded cylindrical shank.

7) At assembly, contact surfaces under the head or under the nuts and between the respective
threaded parts shall be lubricated with properly selected lubricants (these may be stipulated in
the equipment specification) meeting the requirements of chapter F 7000.

8) If non-standard flanges are used, bolt holes shall comply with standard NF EN 20273, medium
series.

9) For reasons related to symmetry and assembly, it is preferable for the number of bolts to be a
multiple of 4.

10) Spacing for a given minimum required cross-section can be adjusted as there is a wide choice of
combinations of n bolts and bolt diameters d.
To ensure proper distribution of the tightening force, the number n must not be reduced too far.
The maximum recommended spacing for bolts is obtained with the formula: 2 d + Ep.
The minimum spacing corresponding to wrench clearance determines the maximum value of n.

 n° 137-2012 Annex Z V / 3
RCC-M - 2012 Edition Subsection Z

11) If the required number and diameter of bolts impose a real cross-sectional area SB much greater
than the minimum cross-sectional area SA, the tightening torque must be limited so as not to
exceed the allowable gasket and flange load. Failing which, account shall be taken thereof in
the flange design, assuming a tightening torque higher than that strictly required in Z V 200. An
acceptable method is described in Z V 321.
12) Account should be taken of the inaccuracy due to the tightening arrangement when evaluating
the tightening torque for sizing the assembly components.

Cross Tightening Forces

Nominal Average
sectional torque transmitted
diameter stress Remarks
area at root (daN.m) (daN)
(in mm) (MPa)
(in mm2) Cs Pv

12 76,2 2,6 150 1143 . This table is only for information purposes and
was drawn up with a friction coefficient of
14 105 4,1 - 1575 0.15 and an average stress in the bolt of
16 144 6,3 - 2160 150 MPa.
18 175 8,7 - 2625 . The simplified formula below provides the
20 225 12 - 3375 relation between the tightening torque Cs
and the load Pv transmitted to the bolt.
22 281 17 - 4215
24 324 21 - 4860  pitch 
Cs  Pv   f . r  f ' R ma 
27 427 31 - 6405  2 
30 519 43 - 7785
Where
33 647 58 - 9705
36 759 75 - 11385 f = friction coefficient between the threads

39 913 97 - 13695 r = radius of the bolt at the thread flank

42 1050 121 - 15750
f' = friction coefficient of the nut against
45 1220 150 - 18300 the washers
48 1380 181 - 20700
Rma = arithmetic mean of the nominal radius
52 1650 233 - 24750 of the shank and the radius on the flats
of the nut.
1 N/mm2 : 1 MPa

Annex Z V / 4  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition Subsection Z

Z V 200 CALCULATION (SIZING) OF BOLT SECTION

Z V 210 NOMENCLATURE

A = outside diameter of the flange (if the bolt F

holes are cut to the outside of the flange, the e 
diameter measured at the back of the slots)
h o

B = inside diameter of the flange et = shell thickness

B1 = B, or B + g1, or B +g0 (see ZV 360) EC = modulus of elasticity of bolting material at

20°C specified in annex Z I.
b = effective width of gasket seating taken into
consideration as specified by the gasket Eh = modulus of elasticity of the steel chosen for
manufacturer, the bolting material, at the temperature of
the condition concerned, specified in
C = diameter of the bolt circle annex Z I.

C0 = correction factor when the spacing of the Ep = flange plate thickness

bolt is too great
f = Friction coefficient between the threads.
Cs = bolt tightening torque
f' = Friction coefficient of nut on washer.
d = nominal diameter of the bolts
F = Flange shape factor (figure ZV 360.2).
Dj = diameter of circle upon which the gasket
reaction is effective Fa = Axial load applied to the bolted connection.

Fj = Gasket seating load

 n° 137-2012 Annex Z V / 5
RCC-M - 2012 Edition Subsection Z

FF(P) = Total hydrostatic end force produced by ht = Distance from the bolt circle to the circle on
pressure P. which HT and HT' act.

FM(P) = Gasket force required to ensure HD = Hydrostatic end force on area inside of
leaktightness under pressure P, at the flange.
corresponding temperature.
HD' = Fictitious hydrostatic end force due to the
FS(P) = Flange load required to ensure consideration of external loads using
leaktightness under pressure P, at the equivalent pressure Peq.
corresponding temperature.
HG = Gasket load.
FSo = Flange load which must be applied at
room temperature to ensure leaktightness HT = Hydrostactic end force on the area between
at pressure P and corresponding the gasket and the flange opening.
temperature. HT' = Fictitious hydrostatic end force on the area
FS'o = Tightening force at room temperature between the gasket and the flange opening,
required to obtain a sufficient coefficient due to the consideration of external loads
of friction to counter the transverse loads using equivalent pressure Peq
and the twisting torque.
A
K 
FS' = Tightening force at temperature required B
to obtain a sufficient coefficient of 3
friction to counter the transverse loads Ep  e  1 V Ep
and the twisting torque.
L   
T U h g2
o o
FSi = Initial tightening force applied to the
bolts at room temperature. Mf = Bending moment applied to the connection.

FT = Contact force required to obtain a M' = Maximum moment in the flange, corrected
sufficient load to counter the transverse by the bolt spacing factor.
loads and the twisting torque.
MA = Bending moment in the flange under the
g0 = Thickness of hub at small end. initial tightening force, without pressure.

g1 = Thickness of hub at back of flange MD = Moment due to hydrostatic end force on

area inside of flange.
h = Hub length.
MG = Moment due to gasket load.
hd = Distance from the bolt circle to the circle
on which HD and HD' act. MO = Maximum bending moment acting on the
flange
hg = Distance from the bolt circle to the circle
on which HG acts. MT = Moment due to hydrostatic end force on the
area between the gasket and the flange
opening.
ho  B.g o
m = gasket tightening factor specified by the
gasket manufacturer

Annex Z V / 6  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition Subsection Z

n = Number of bolts. . sum of cylindrical rod cross-section in

the case of slender shank series
p = Bolt pitch produced bolts.
P = Internal design pressure of the
The true root cross-section SB of normal
connection, taking the following
bolts, in accordance with the ISO profile,
values depending on the case:
may be determined by the following
Pc = Design pressure, formula:
Ps = Internal pressure during the 
condition concerned, SB  (d  1.2268 p) 2 n
4
Pe = Test pressure.
where :
Peq = Equivalent pressure allowing
the consideration of external d = nominal diameter of the bolt,
loads applied to the connection. p = bolt pitch (ISO),
n = number of bolts.
Pv = Load transmitted through bolts.
This cross-section SB should be at least
r = Radius of bolt at thread flank. SA.
R = Radial distance from bolt circle to
point of intersection of hub and back SH = Longitudinal stress at outside surface of
of flange plate. hub = SH' or SH" whichever is greater.

Rma = Arithmetic mean of nominal shank SH' = Longitudinal stress at outside surface of
radius of nut flats. hub at connection back of flange plate.

S = Maximum allowable stress of the SH" = Longitudinal stress at outside surface of

material making up the flange or bolt, hub at connection with sleeve.
depending on the case, defined in SR = Radial stress at hub connection with
Z V 371 and Z V 235 respectively. flange plate.
Sy = Yield strength of the material making ST = Tangential stress at hub connection with
up the flange or bolt, depending on the flange plate
case, defined in annex Z I.
ν = Poisson's ratio = 0,3.
S0
Gasket load corresponding to T
S1 = various connection conditions (see
figure Z V 131) U
S2 Flange shape-related factors (see
V =
value and formula tables)
SA = Minimum required cross-sectional area Y
for the set of n bolts. Z
SB = Actual cross-sectional area for the set y = minimum gasket seating pressure
of n bolts: specified by the gasket manufacturer
. sum of thread root cross-sections in λ = Numerical factor linked to the shape of
the case of series produced bolts the flange, given by graph Z V 360.1
without slender shanks,
σe = bolt stress under test conditions.

 n° 137-2012 Annex Z V / 7
RCC-M - 2012 Edition Subsection Z

Z V 220 DETERMINATION OF BOLT TIGHTENING FORCES

Z V 221 PRINCIPLE
The forces to be considered in analyzing the connection originate from two sources:
- gasket-related forces,
- loading-related forces.

Z V 221.1 Gasket-related forces

a) The force Fj required to ensure gasket seating and which depends only on the characteristics of
this gasket.
b) The force FM(P) required to ensure leaktightness of the gasket both under design and operational
conditions as well as under test conditions.
This force in particular depends on the characteristics of the gasket and pressure.

Z V 221.2 Loading-related forces

a) The forces due to the design and operating pressures.
b) The forces outside the connection, due to the adjacent components linked to it.

Z V 222 EVALUATION OF GASKET-RELATED FORCES

Z V 222.1 Force required to ensure gasket seating
Before pressurizing the equipment, the gasket must be sufficiently tightened so that under the effects
of plastic deformation, it hugs the form of all the irregularities of its seating surface. This force,
noted Fj is called the "Gasket seating force".
The value of this force is determined using the "seating pressure" of the gasket and its seating cross-
section, or the "linear seating force" and its perimeter.
Seating pressure or linear seating force are the characteristics of the gasket.
The gasket seating conditions correspond to point So on figure Z V 131.
The value of this force may be obtained from the following equation:
Fj = .Dj.b.y

Z V 222.2 Force required to maintain the leaktightness of the connection

This force corresponds to the minimum crushing of the gasket ensuring leaktightness of the
connection, under the pressure P concerned, as well as all pressures below this value.
This force, noted FM(P), is evaluated using a factor characterizing the gasket applied at the
pressure P in question and leading, depending on the type of gasket used, to a "contact pressure" or
"linear contact force". This results from the hypothesis of a uniform distribution over the seating
surface or gasket perimeter.

Annex Z V / 8  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition Subsection Z

This condition corresponds to point S2 of figure Z V 131.

The value of this force may be obtained from the following equation:
FM (P) = 2.Dj.m.b.P

Z V 223 EVALUATION OF LOADING-RELATED FORCES

Z V 223.1 Pressure-related force
Under the effect of pressure P, flanges have a tendency to separate. The connection is held together
by a force, noted FF, whose value is:
1
FF (P)   D 2j P
4 (1)
In accordance with the requirements of Z V 223.2, the term "equivalent pressure Peq" should be
added to the term P where applicable.

Z V 223.2 Force due to external loads

Under a bending moment, one part of the connection has a tendency to separate and the other to
close up.
An axial traction force tends to separate the connection flanges uniformly.
An acceptable method for taking account of the external loads (in particular bending, axial load)
consists in adding an additional term, called "equivalent pressure" and obtained from the following
equation, to the pressure term P of Z V 223.1:
16 M f 4 Fa
Peq   (2)
 D 3j  D 2j

where Fa is the axial force applied to the bolted connection.

Mf is the bending moment applied to the bolted connection.
The combinations P, Mf and Fa are specified in the equipment specification.
A twisting torque or a transverse force can cause relative slippage of the flanges. To counter this, it
is necessary to ensure that the friction force, obtained by tightening the bolts, is sufficient in the
various operating conditions.
Subject to provision of all necessary data, the designer may use another method for taking account
of external loads in the design of the connection.

Z V 224 INITIAL TIGHTENING FORCE FSi

Z V 224.1 Principle
The initial tightening force FSi at room temperature should ensure that the deformation of the gasket
is sufficient to maintain leaktightness in all design and operating conditions.

 n° 137-2012 Annex Z V / 9
RCC-M - 2012 Edition Subsection Z

Consequently, the gasket crushing pressure which results from the bolt tightening force, minus the
forces tending to reduce the contact pressure, should remain greater than that ensuring the
leaktightness of the connection.
This check should be carried out in the various operating conditions, taking account of temperature.
The initial tightening force should therefore in particular be corrected to take account of temperature
using factor Eh/Ec, where Eh and Ec are the modulus of elasticity of the bolt material at the
temperature concerned and at room temperature (20°C) respectively and, where applicable, in
accordance with Z V 224.3.

Z V 224.2 Evaluation of the initial tightening force FSi

The initial tightening force FSi is the greater of the following two forces:
a) Gasket seating force Fj, determined in accordance with Z V 222.1.
b) Force FSo at room temperature, required to ensure leaktightness at the service temperature.
This force is at least equal to:

Ec
FSo  FS ( Ps ) (3)
Eh

Where FS(Ps) = FF(Ps + Peq) + FM(Ps)

. FF (Ps + Peq) is determined in accordance with Z V 223.1. If the equivalent pressure method
is adopted, the pressure value is taken to be the sum of the service pressure Ps and the
equivalent pressure Peq determined in accordance with Z V 223.2.
Otherwise, the term FF must include the tightening forces calculated to take up the external
loads.
. FM (Ps) is the gasket tightening force required to ensure leaktightness under service
pressure Ps.
c) Force required to maintain leaktightness under test conditions when the tightness is retained in
service:
FS (Pe) = FF (Pe) + FM (Pe) (3')
FF (Pe) is determined in accordance with Z V 223.1 on the basis of test pressure Pe.
FM(Pe) is the gasket tightening force required to ensure leaktightness under test pressure Pe.
d) Tightening force FS'o at room temperature which, in operating conditions, gives enough friction
force to counter relative slippage of the flanges under transverse loads and twisting torques
specified in the equipment specification or resulting from overall stress analysis.
This force is at least equal to:
Ec
FSo  FS' (3")
Eh

Annex Z V / 10  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition Subsection Z

where FS' = FF(Ps) + FT (3"')

FF (Ps) is determined in accordance with Z V 223.1 on the basis of the service pressure.
FT is the contact force required to obtain sufficient friction force in service.

Z V 224.3 Particular considerations

a) Gasket relaxation has a considerable influence on maintaining the leaktightness of the
connection. When the analysis of the connection reveals relaxation of the gasket, this shall be
taken into account at each calculation phase.

b) When parameters other than those mentioned above (such as different coefficients of expansion,
temperature deviations) are likely to cause a significant change in the tightness between the
initial condition and the operating conditions, account shall be taken of this in the analysis. Full
data shall be provided in the appropriate manner.

Z V 230 DETERMINATION OF MINIMUM BOLT CROSS-SECTION

Z V 231 PRINCIPLE
The minimum bolt cross-section required shall be evaluated on the basis of the true forces
developed in the bolt.
The checks concern:
- the design condition, taking account only of the design pressure at the design temperature,
- the operating conditions,
- the test condition when the initial tightness is not retained during service (when it is retained
during service, it is included in the loading used in the analysis of operating conditions).

Z V 232 CHECK IN DESIGN CONDITIONS

The tightening force FS(Pc) shall be evaluated only under the design pressure Pc at the design
temperature.
If SA is the minimum bolt cross-section required, the following equation shall be complied with:
FS (Pc )
S (4)
SA

where S is the allowable stress on the material at design temperature, defined in Z V 235.
FS (Pc) = FF (Pc) + FM (Pc)
FF (Pc) is determined in accordance with Z V 223.1 at design pressure Pc.
FM (Pc) is the tightening force on the gasket required to ensure leaktightness at design pressure Pc.

n° 137-2012 Annex Z V / 11
RCC-M - 2012 Edition Subsection Z

Z V 233 CHECK IN OPERATING CONDITIONS

The true tightening force on the bolt shall be evaluated on the basis of the initial tightening force
FSi defined in Z V 224.2.
In the absence of parameters other than those mentioned in Z V 223.1 and Z V 223.2, the minimum
required cross-section SA of the bolt shall comply with the following equation:

FSi Eh 2S
  min (5)
2 / 3 Sy
SA Ec

where S is defined in Z V 235, at the condition temperature concerned.

Overtightening resulting from the particular considerations of Z V 224.3.b) should also be taken
into account in the above equation.
The requirements of this paragraph shall be complied with in all categories of conditions.

Z V 234 CHECK IN TEST CONDITIONS

This check shall only be carried out when the tightening force ensuring the leaktightness of the
connection in test conditions is not retained in service.
Stress in the bolt should comply with the following equation:
FS (Pe ) 2
e   Sy (6)
SA 3

Sy being the yield strength of the bolt material at the test temperature. The values are given in
annex Z I.
FS (Pe) is determined in accordance with Z V 224.2.c).

Z V 235 ALLOWABLE BOLT STRESSES

For class 2 and 3 materials, the allowable stress S is given in annex Z I.

For class 1 materials, the value of S should be replaced by Sm given in annex Z I.

Z V 240 REMARKS
If the initial load is determined without consideration of test conditions, there is a danger of leakage
at the gasket during the hydrostatic test.
To avoid this, it may be necessary to retighten the bolts for the test and then readjust the tightening
load.
The gaskets shall then be changed, apart from those with spacers which may in certain cases be
retained.

Annex Z V / 12  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition Subsection Z

Z V 300 CALCULATION OF FLANGE STRESSES

Z V 310 GENERAL
The rules of Z V 300 relate to the determination of stresses at the most heavily loaded points in the
flange when the flange is subjected to the loads resulting from the internal pressure and the gasket
load required to ensure leaktightness.
Flanges shall be sized so as to ensure that the stress limits given in Z V 370 are met.
Where the flanges comply with one of the standards mentioned in A 1300, there is no need to
perform the checks specified below if the value of (Ps + Peq) does not exceed the maximum
allowable flange pressure at the design temperature or the maximum temperature reached during the
condition concerned, where (Ps + Peq) is the maximum value of the combination of the service
pressure Ps and the equivalent pressure (calculated in accordance with Z V 223.2) encountered in
all categories of conditions.

Z V 320 FORCES TO BE CONSIDERED

Z V 321 EVALUATION PRINCIPLE
To analyse flange stresses, the forces shall be evaluated on the basis of the initial tightening
force FSi.
When the true cross-section of the bolt SB is higher than the required cross-section SA, the
tightening force to be considered in the flange analysis shall be increased.
The cross-section of the bolt to be taken into account may be equal to the average between the
required cross-section SA and the true cross-section SB.
The force FSi, used subsequently, shall be that determined in Z V 224, multiplied by the following
factor :

1  SB 
1 
 
2  SA 

Z V 322 EVALUATION OF FORCES IN THE CONNECTION

(see Fig. Z V 210)

Z V 322.1 Pressure effect

a) In equations 7 and 8 below, the pressure term P corresponds:
. to the design pressure when checking the criteria of Z V 371,
. to the operating pressure in the condition category concerned, when checking the criteria of
Z V 372,
. to the test pressure when checking the criteria of Z V 373.

n° 137-2012 Annex Z V / 13
RCC-M - 2012 Edition Subsection Z

b) Evaluation of pressure-related forces:

- HD is the hydrostatic end force on the internal area of the flange. HD is given by the
following equation:
B2
HD  P (7)
4
- HT is the force exerted on the area between the gasket and the flange opening:

HT 

 D 2j  B2 P (8)
4

Z V 322.2 External forces

a) In the following equations, the terms Mf and Fa relate respectively to the bending moment and
the axial force applied to the connection, in operation in the condition concerned.

b) Evaluation of the loads due to external torque forces.

HD is the hydrostatic end force on the internal area of the flange. HD is given by the following
equation:
4 Mf B2
HD'   B2  Fa (9)
D3j D 2j

and HT' 

4 M f D 2j  B2   F D
a
2
j  B2  (10)
D3j D 2j

These additional forces are to be added to HD and HT respectively, as defined in Z V 322.1

(equations 7 and 8).

Z V 322.3 Gasket-related forces

Force HG compressing the gasket is obtained by subtracting the forces previously defined from the
initial tightening force FSi, determined in Z V 224 and, where applicable, increased in accordance
with Z V 321:
HG = FSi - (HD+HD') - (HT+HT') (11)
Given that the flange is checked at temperature, the initial tightening force may be corrected to take
account of the effect of temperature, by applying factor Eh/Ec.
In the case of a gasket with spacer, the reaction to the tightening force can be broken down into:
- the reaction of the gasket itself, distributed over the diameter Dj,
- the reaction of the spacer, distributed over the average diameter of the seating surface.
This also covers flanges with a gasket groove.

Annex Z V / 14  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition Subsection Z

Z V 330 CALCULATION OF THE MOMENT ARM

By examining the two systems of forces, it can be seen that the flange (fig. Z V 210) is subjected to
bending which leads to a plate deformation.
The bending moment components shall be calculated conventionally in relation to the bolt circle
(dia. C). The distances of the loads from this circle are defined below for integral flanges. For other
types of flanges (fig. Z V 110.1, 2 and 3) the expressions shall be corrected accordingly (taking
account of the Notes on the figures).
hd = distance from the axis supporting loads HD and HD'
g1 CB
hd  R  where R  g1
2 2

hg = distance from the axis supporting load HG

C  Dj
hg 
2

ht = distance from the axis supporting loads HT and HT"

R  g1  h g
ht 
2

Z V 340 CALCULATION OF BENDING MOMENTS

Z V 341 PRINCIPLE
The flange shall be analyzed considering a total bending moment obtained by adding the bending
moment components due to the forces acting on the flange.
The determination of these bending moment components is described in the following paragraph.
It should be noted that for each load, the calculation involves the entire force acting on the flange,
located at a distance from the bolt circle equal to the moment arm determined in Z V 330.

Z V 342 DETERMINATION OF BENDING MOMENT COMPONENTS

a) Pressure effect
. the value of the bending moment MD due to the pressure acting on the inside of the flange is
as follows:
MD = HD . hd
. bending moment MT due to the pressure acting on the area between the gasket and the inside
diameter of the flange is:
MT = HT . ht

n° 137-2012 Annex Z V / 15
RCC-M - 2012 Edition Subsection Z

b) Effect of external forces

The application of the "equivalent pressure" leads to the following bending moments:
MD' = HD' . hd
and
MT' = HT' . ht
A different method for considering the external forces must be compatible with consideration of
the pressure effect as defined in a).

c) Reaction of the gasket

The bending moment due to the reaction of the gasket is:
MG = HG . hg
In the case of a gasket with spacer, the moment MG may be evaluated by applying the
requirements of Z V 322.3, which leads to a cumulation of:
- the moment due to the reaction of the gasket itself,
- the moment due to the reaction of the spacer.
These moments are calculated by applying the principles of Z V 341, the respective moment
arms being measured from the bolt circle.

d) Special check
The behaviour of the flange must be checked under the effect of initial tightening force FSi,
without pressure.
If there is no spacer, the initial tightening is fully balanced by the reaction of the gasket.
The bending moment to be examined is therefore:
MA = FSi . hg
In the case of a gasket with spacer, the method described above in c) may be applied.

Z V 343 MAXIMUM MOMENT ACTING ON THE FLANGE

The maximum bending moment MO acting on the flange is equal to:
MO = MD + MD' + MT + MT' + MG
The evaluation shall be made for each condition:
. design condition,
. operating condition,
. test condition.

Annex Z V / 16  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition Subsection Z

a) Design condition
The tightening force is determined so as to maintain leaktightness at the design pressure and
design temperature.

b) Operating condition
The bending moment is determined taking account of the initial tightening force FSi and all
loadings acting on the connection in the various condition categories.
The check in Z V 342 d) should be compared with class A criteria. The maximum moment to be
considered in the rest of the analysis is therefore the larger of the two values MA and MO
previously defined.

c) Test condition
The bending moment in the flange is evaluated in accordance with Z V 340, for the test pressure
and with the tightening force applied to it.
When the tightening force is not retained in service, the check in Z V 342 d) shall also be made.

Z V 344 BOLT SPACING

The method for determining the bending moments assumes that the bolt tensile force is uniformly
distributed over the entire circumference of the bolt circle. This assumption is only valid when the
bolts are fairly closely spaced. It is no longer considered to be valid when the spacing between bolts
C
n
exceeds 2 d + Ep, where d is the bolt diameter and Ep the flange thickness. When the spacing
exceeds this value, the maximum moment must be increased by a correction factor Co.
12
 C 
Co    (12)
 n ( 2d  E p ) 
 
where n is equal to the number of bolts.

Note : If the correction factor is less than 1, Co shall be taken as 1

The moment M' taken into consideration for stress analysis is therefore determined in the following
manner:
M' = max (MO . Co ; MA . Co) (13)

n° 137-2012 Annex Z V / 17
RCC-M - 2012 Edition Subsection Z

Z V 350 STRESS ANALYSIS

It has been shown that there can be three critical stresses in flanges with butt-welded tapered hubs
(the most difficult case to analyze). The stress governing sizing depends on the dimensions of the
flange. These three stresses are (see fig. Z V 350):
- radial stress SR at the plate and hub junction,
- tangential stress ST inside the flange plate,
- longitudinal stress SH on the outside surface of the hub.

Stress SH is the greater of the following two stresses:

- longitudinal stress SH' located at the connection of the hub and the flange plate,
- longitudinal stress SH' located at the connection of the hub and the flange sleeve,

FIGURE Z V 350

Annex Z V / 18  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition Subsection Z

Z V 360 DETERMINATION OF STRESSES

For all types of flanges covered by this annex, the stresses are given by the following equations:
M' PB
SH '   (14)
L  (g1 ) 2  B1 4 g0

 M' PB
SH"   (15)
L  (g1 ) 2  B1 4 g0

where P is the design pressure or the operating pressure (the "equivalent pressure" shall not be
included)
(4 3 E p  e  1) M '
SR  (16)
L  (E p ) 2  B

Y  M'
ST   Z  SR (17)
(E p ) 2  B

The various terms and constants involved in these equations are related to the shape and dimensions
of the flange.
They are defined as follows:
- if B  20 g1 : B1 =B
- if B < 20 g1 : B1 = B + g1 if 1
B1 = B + g0 if  >1

-  is obtained by using figure Z V 360.1 *

- V and F are factors related to the shape of the flange and are obtained from figures Z V 360.2
and Z V 360.3.
A outside diameter of the flange
K 
B inside diameter of the flange

*  is less than 1 if the hub is slightly tapered and greater than 1 if it is sharply tapered.

= Poisson's ratio : 0.3

 1  
3  K 2 1  2 log e K   3
 1  
T
 1  2
 (K  1) 1  K 
 1   

13 6 K2 
Y  (1  )  (1  ) 2 log e K 
K  1    K 1 

n° 137-2012 Annex Z V / 19
RCC-M - 2012 Edition Subsection Z

 1  
3  K 2 1  2 log e K   3
 1  
U
 (1  ) (K  1) (K  1)
2

K2  1 F
Z ; ho  Bg o ; e ;
K2  1 ho

Ep  e  1 V Ep 3
L 
T U h o g o2

Figure Z V 360.1 is limited to cases where   1 since the stress limits of Z V 371 apply to the
greater of the two values SH' and SH".

Z V 370 ALLOWABLE STRESS LIMITS

Z V 371 DESIGN CONDITION REQUIREMENTS
The stresses calculated using the formulae in Z V 360 should not exceed the following limits, for
the flange design conditions, with the only loading being the design pressure, at the design
temperature.
SH  1.5 S SR  S ST  S
SH  SR SH  ST
S S
2 2
where: SH = the greater of the two values SH' and SH".
S = allowable stress at the design temperature of the flange material. These values of
S are given in annex Z I: for class 1 materials, the value of S should be replaced
by Sm value given in annex Z I.

Z V 372 CHECKS TO BE PERFORMED UNDER OPERATING CONDITIONS

Z V 372.1 Criteria levels A and B
For the loadings associated with conditions requiring compliance with criteria levels A and B, the
stresses calculated with the formulae in Z V 360 should not exceed the following limits:
- SH  1.5 S
- SR  1.5 S
- ST  1.5 S
where S is defined in the same way as before, but at the temperature of the condition being
examined.

Annex Z V / 20  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition Subsection Z

Z V 372.2 Criterion level C

For loadings associated with conditions requiring compliance with level C criteria, the stresses
calculated with the formulae of Z V 360 should not exceed the following limits:
- SH  1.8 S
- SR  1.8 S
- ST  1.8 S

Z V 372.3 Criterion level D

For loadings associated with conditions requiring compliance with level D criteria, the stresses
calculated with the formulae of Z V 360 should not exceed the following limits:
- SH  2.4 S
- SR  2.4 S
- ST  2.4 S

Z V 373 TEST CONDITIONS

Z V 373.1 If the tightness load used for the test is retained during service
As terms SH, SR and ST take account of the service and test loadings, no additional conditions
shall be required.
This also applies to tests performed at a pressure not exceeding 1.5 times the design pressure, when
the tightness is not retained in service. In view of the criteria applicable to the design condition, no
additional conditions shall be required.

Z V 373.2 If the tightness load used for the test is not retained in service
The following check shall be necessary, in which stresses SH, SR and ST shall be determined under
the test conditions:
- SH (Pe)  1.35 Sy
- SR (Pe)  0.9 Sy
- ST (Pe)  0.9 Sy
where Sy is the yield strength of the flange material at the test temperature.

 n° 137-2012 Annex Z V / 21
RCC-M - 2012 Edition Subsection Z

TYPES OF FLANGES
LOOSE TYPE FLANGES
(See notes)

NOTES : - For figure 1 fillet radius r to be at least 0.25 g1, but not less than 5 mm.
- The welds represented in figures 2 and 3 may be performed in accordance with the provisions of
figures 7 to 9 a.
- In figures 2 and 3, the forces and dimensions not indicated are the same as in figure 1.

FIGURE Z V 110.1

Annex Z V / 22  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition Subsection Z

TYPES OF FLANGES
INTEGRAL TYPE FLANGES
(See notes)

FIGURE Z V 110.2

 n° 137-2012 Annex Z V / 23
RCC-M - 2012 Edition Subsection Z

TYPES OF FLANGES
INTEGRAL TYPE FLANGES
(See notes)

FIGURE Z V 110.2 (cont)

Annex Z V / 24  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition Subsection Z

OPTIONAL TYPE FLANGE

Note : The forces and dimensions not indicated are the same as those in figure 1 (loose type flanges) or those in
figure 6 (integral flanges)

FIGURE Z V 110.3

 n° 137-2012 Annex Z V / 25
RCC-M - 2012 Edition Subsection Z

FIGURE Z V 131

DIAGRAM OF GASKET STATES WITH SPACER

Annex Z V / 26  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition Subsection Z

 = 1 for hubs of constant thickness (g1/go = 1)

FIGURE Z V 360.1

VALUES OF l COEFFICIENT

 n° 137-2012 Annex Z V / 27
RCC-M - 2012 Edition Subsection Z

FIGURE Z V 360.2

VALUES OF FACTOR F

FIGURE Z V 360.3

VALUES OF FACTOR V

Annex Z V / 28  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition Subsection Z

ANNEX Z VI

DESIGN RULES FOR

LINEAR TYPE SUPPORTS

Z VI 1000 GENERAL

Z VI 1100 INTRODUCTION
Z VI 1110 SCOPE
The provisions of this annex relate to design rules for linear type supports, defined as basically
consisting of beams in the sense of materials strength theory.
The rules of Z VI 2000 are applicable for elastic analysis and those of Z VI 3000 for limit analysis.

Z VI 1120 METHODS OF ANALYSIS

Z VI 1121 Elastic analysis
a) The rules for elastic analysis consist in comparing scalars representing the state of stress in the
component and evaluated in the elastic hypothesis, with stress limits expressed in accordance
with the specified mechanical characteristics for the material and the temperature under
consideration.
These allowable stresses are determined in Z VI 2000 by applying design factors, dependent on
the type of stress and the nature of the member under analysis, to the minimum yield strength and
the ultimate tensile strength values.
The values of the mechanical characteristics of the different materials used in the construction of
linear type supports are given in Annex Z I.

b) The simplified rules for fatigue analysis given in Z VI 2300, the application of which may be
required over and above the stress limits mentioned in a) above, lead to limitation of the
maximum allowable stress range associated with specified conditions, according to the specified
number of occurrences for these conditions.

 n° 137-2012 Annex Z VI / 1
RCC-M - 2012 Edition Subsection Z

Z VI 1122 Limit analysis

Linear type supports may be designed in accordance with the requirements of Z VI 3000 on the
basis of their limit loads. These requirements may be substituted for those of Z VI 2000 relating to
stress limitation, but the requirements of Z VI 2000, other than those relating to stress limitation,
remain applicable.

Z VI 1130 CONDITIONS OF APPLICATION

It is accepted and even recommended that internal standards satisfying the requirements of this
annex be drawn up by each Contractor.

Z VI 1200 NOMENCLATURE
The symbols used in this annex are defined below. This nomenclature does not cover symbols used
in the text which follows to represent complex algebraic expressions:
A = Cross-sectional area of a member (mm2),
Af = Cross-sectional area of compression flange (mm2),
Ast = Cross-sectional area of stiffener or stiffeners (mm2),
Aw = Cross-sectional area of girder web (mm2),
Cb = Coefficient defined in Z VI 2215.6b),
Cc = Critical slenderness ratio characterized transition for plastic instability conditions to elastic
instability conditions, defined in Z VI 2214.1,
C'c = Effective slenderness ratio defined in S VI 2225.5,
Cm = Coefficient defined in Z VI 2216.1,
Cv = Ratio of critical web stress, according to the linear buckling theory, to the shear yield
strength of web material,
C1 = Ratio of yield strengths associated with a beam and the column to which it is connected,
C2 = Ratio of yield strengths associated with a column and column web stiffeners,
D = Factor defined in Z VI 2233.3 depending on the type of stiffener,
E = Modulus of elasticity of the material at temperature (MPa),
Fa = Axial compressive stress permitted in the absence of bending moment (MPa),
Fas = Axial compressive stress, permitted in the absence of bending moment (MPa), for struts,
braces, cross-pieces and other secondary members (MPa).
Fb = Allowable bending stress in compression flange of plate girders as reduced for hybrid
girders or because of too high a web depth-thickness ratio (MPa),

Annex Z VI / 2  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition Subsection Z

F'b = Allowable bending stress in compression flange of plate girders as reduced for hybrid
girders or because of too high a web depth-thickness ratio (MPa),
F'e = Critical Euler stress (critical Euler load/area of member) divided by the coefficient 23/12
(MPa),
Fp = Allowable bearing stress (MPa),
F'SR = Allowable stress range in the case of stress reversal (MPa),
FSR = Allowable stress range (MPa),
Ft = Allowable tensile stress (MPa),
Fv = Allowable shear stress (MPa),
K = Ratio of buckling length to the actual length of the beam, between connections. This
coefficient depends on end conditions,
M = Applied moment (N.m.),
M1 = Smallest moment exerted at beam or column connections (N.m.),
M2 = Largest moment exerted at beam or column connections (N.m.),
Mm = Maximum moment that can be resisted by an element in the absence of axial force (N.m.),
Mp = Limit moment where the material is assumed to be perfectly plastic (N.m.),
N = Length of bearing of applied load (mm),
P = Applied load (N),
Pe = Critical Euler load of the member (N),
Py = Axial load equal to member area times specified minimum yield strength (N),
Qa = Ratio of effective area of an axially loaded member to its total area,
Qs = Allowable axial stress reduction factor,
R = Reaction or concentrated transverse load applied to a beam or girder (N),
Su = Specified minimum ultimate tensile strength at temperature, given in Annex Z I (MPa),
When the value of Su is not given in Annex Z I, it may be estimated by one of the
following three methods:

a) Method 1
In the case of ultimate tensile strength values at temperature which have been tabulated by the
Manufacturer in catalogues or other publications:
Su = Sur (S'u/S'ur) but not greater than Sur

 n° 137-2012 Annex Z VI / 3
RCC-M - 2012 Edition Subsection Z

Where:
Sur = Ultimate tensile strength at room temperature, given in Annex Z I,
S'u = Ultimate tensile strength at temperature, tabulated by the Manufacturer,
S'ur = Ultimate tensile strength at room temperature, tabulated by the Manufacturer.

b) Method 2
In the case of ultimate tensile strength values at temperature which are not supplied by
Manufacturers:
Su = Sur (Sy/Syr)

Where:
Sur = Ultimate tensile strength at room temperature, given in Annex Z I,
Sy = Minimum yield strength at temperature, given in Annex Z I,
Syr = Minimum yield strength at room temperature, given in Annex Z I.

c) Method 3
Where allowable stress values S or allowable stress intensity values Sm at temperature are given
in Annex Z I, Su may be determined using one of the following expressions:
Su = 4S or Su = 3 Sm.
Sy = Specified minimum yield strength at temperature given in Annex Z I,(MPa),
Y = Ratio of yield strength of web material to yield strength of stiffener material,
a = Clear distance between transverse stiffeners (mm),
b = Actual width of compression elements (mm),
be = Effective width of compression elements (mm),
bf = Flange width of rolled beam or plate girder (mm),
d = Depth of beam or girder.
Also used to represent diameter of rollers or rocker bearings (mm),
dc = Column web depth clear of fillets (mm)
f = Axial compression stress on member based on effective area (MPa),
fa = Computed axial stress (MPa),
fb = Computed bending stress (MPa),
fc = Computed compression stress (MPa),

Annex Z VI / 4  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition Subsection Z

fc28 = Characteristic compression strength of concrete after 28 days (MPa),

fp = Computed bearing stress (MPa),
ft = Computed tensile stress (MPa),
fv = Computed shear stress (MPa),
fvs = Shear between girder web and its stiffener (N/mm),
g = Transverse spacing between successive holes normal to line of stress (see paragraph
Z VI 2243.1) (mm),
h = Clear distance between flanges of a beam or girder at the section under
investigation (mm),
k = Coefficient relating linear buckling strength of a plate to its dimensions and conditions
of edge support.
Also used to represent the distance (in mm) from outer face of flange to web toe of fillet
of rolled shape or equivalent distance in the case of welded sections.

 = Unbraced length of member (mm),

b = Unbraced length of member in the plane of bending (mm),

r = Radius of gyration of a section (mm),
rb = Radius of gyration about axis of bending (mm),
rc = Radius of gyration of the compression flange plus one-third of the compression web
area, taken about an axis in the plane of the web (mm),
ry = Radius of gyration of a member relative to its minimum moment of inertia (mm),
s = Transverse spacing (gauge) between successive holes in line of stress (see Z VI 2243.1)
(mm),
t = Girder, beam or column web thickness (mm),
tb = Thickness of beam flange at beam-to-column connection (mm),
tf = Beam flange thickness (mm),
t1 = Where several parts are connected by partial penetration throat welds, thickness of
thinnest part (mm),

x = Subscript corresponding to the axis for which the moment of inertia of a member is at a
maximum,
y = Subscript corresponding to the axis for which the moment of inertia of a member is at a
minimum (with the exception of symbols Sy and Py),
 = Ratio of hybrid girder web yield strength to flange yield strength.

 n° 137-2012 Annex Z VI / 5
RCC-M - 2012 Edition Subsection Z

Z VI 2000 ELASTIC ANALYSIS

Z VI 2100 GENERAL
Z VI 2110 LEVEL O, A AND B CRITERIA
a) In conditions where compliance with level O, A or B criteria is required, support members shall
be designed so as to meet the requirements of Z VI 2200 relative to stress limitation, without
prejudice to more stringent requirements which may be prescribed by this annex.
b) Where so required by the equipment specification, this stress limitation shall be supplemented by
the simplified fatigue analysis rules contained in Z VI 2300. Application of these rules shall take
into consideration the loads for which compliance with level A and B criteria is required.
c) In the particular case of members subject to buckling, stress shall under no circumstances exceed
two-thirds of critical buckling stress.

Z VI 2120 LEVEL C CRITERIA

The stress limits applicable in conditions for which compliance with level C criteria is required are
calculated by multiplying the limits given in Z VI 220, by a factor of 4/3. In addition, the
requirement given above in Z VI 2110 c) is applicable.

Z VI 2130 LEVEL D CRITERIA

Where compliance with level D criteria is required, the rules of annex Z F and more particularly the
provisions of Z F 1370 may be used.

Z VI 2200 DESIGN RULES APPLICABLE TO MEMBERS MADE

FROM ROLLED, FORGED OR CAST PRODUCTS
Z VI 2201 General
Table ZVI 2201 defines the sequence of the rules to be applied for the design of linear supports.

If standard beams (AFNOR Standards NF A 45-201, NF A 45-202, NF A 45-205, NF A 45-209 and

NF A 45-255) of less than or equal to 300 mm, made of grade S235 J0 (standard NF EN 10025-2)
steel are used, the requirements of paragraphs Z VI 2215.2 (2), 2215.2 (4), 2224.1, 2231.1, 2232.3,
2233.2, 2233.3 which are primarily concerned with preventing the risk of localized buckling, are
automatically satisfied.

Annex Z VI / 6  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition Subsection Z

Z VI 2210 RULES RELATING TO STRESS LIMITATION

Z VI 2211 General
The rules of Z VI 2210 are applicable in conditions for which compliance with level O, A or
B criteria is required. These limits may be exceeded by one third in application of Z VI 2120 in
conditions for which compliance with level C criteria is required.

Z VI 2212 Limits applicable to stress in tension

a) For a homogeneous, unreamed section, the stress in tension on the net section shall not exceed Ft
equal to the smaller of the following two values:
- 0.60 Sy,
(1)
- 0.50 Su.

b) For a part whose section is reduced (e.g., section passing through the eye of an eyebar), the stress
in tension on the net section determined in accordance with paragraph Z VI 2240, shall not
exceed a value Ft equal to the smaller of the following two values:
- 0.45 Sy,
(2)
- 0.375 Su.

c) In addition to requirements a) and b) given above, and in compliance with figure Z VI 2212, it is
required that where the loads transmitted to a part by a weld are normal to its plane of rolling, the
resulting tensile stresses be limited, in the weld section, to the smaller of the following two
values:
- 0.30 Sy,
- 0.25 Su.

d) Requirements concerning the limitation of stress in tension on threaded parts are given
in Z VI 2461.

 n° 137-2012 Annex Z VI / 7
RCC-M - 2012 Edition Subsection Z

TABLE ZVI 2201

RULES APPLICABLE TO THE LIMITATION OF STRESSES
IN LINEAR SUPPORTS FOR ELASTIC ANALYSIS

Annex Z VI / 8  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition Subsection Z

TABLE ZVI 2201 (cont.)

(standard NF EN 10025-2).

 n° 137-2012 Annex Z VI / 9
RCC-M - 2012 Edition Subsection Z

Z VI 2213 Limits applicables to stress in shear

The stress in shear on the cross-sectional area effective in resisting shear shall not exceed Fv equal
to the smaller of the following two values:
- 0.40 Sy,
(3)
- 0.33 Su.
In the case of full web beams, the area may be taken as the overall depth of the beam times the web
thickness for calculation of the stress in shear.
Paragraph Z VI 2233.2 includes supplementary requirements for the limitation of the shear stresses
in webs.

Z VI 2214 Limits applicable to stress in compression

Z VI 2214.1 Members with a slenderness ratio less than Cc
The stress in compression on the gross section meets of an axially compressed member, whose cross
section the requirements of Z VI 2224 and which is characterized by a K/r ratio less than Cc, shall
not exceed the following Fa value, or 0.5 Su:

 ( K / r ) 2   5 3 ( K / r ) ( K / r ) 3 
Fa  1   Sy     (4)
 2 C c2   3 8 Cc 8 C 3c 

where the K/r ratio is the maximum value of the various individual slenderness ratios associated
with the various segments which constitute the support member under consideration (see
Z VI 2200),
and where:
12
 2 2 E 
Cc   
 Sy 
 

Z VI 2214.2 Members with a slenderness ratio greater than Cc

The stress in compression on the gross section of axially compressed members characterized by a
K/r ratio greater than Cc, shall not exceed the following value:

12  2 E
Fa  (5)
23 ( K  / r ) 2

Annex Z VI / 10  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition Subsection Z

Z VI 2214.3 Members with a slenderness ratio greater than 120

The stress in compression on the gross section of struts, braces, cross-pieces and other secondary
stabilizing members compressed axially and characterized by a /r ratio* greater than 120, shall not
exceed the following value:

Fas 
Fa  equation (4) or equation (5) * *
(6)
1.6   / 200 r

* For the application this paragraph, the ends of secondary members are assumed to be articulated, but free of joint
translation. K is therefore taken as unity in equations (4) and (5), i.e., the buckling length of the part is taken as
equal to the actual length of the part.

** Equation (4) is applied when /r is less than Cc and equation (5) when /r is greater than Cc.

Z VI 2214.4 Plate girder stiffeners

The stress in compression on the gross section of plate girder stiffeners shall not exceed Fa equal to
the smaller of the following two values:
- 0.60 Sy,
(7)
- 0.50 Su.

Z VI 2214.5 Webs of rolled shapes

The stress in compression on the web of rolled shapes shall be limited to Fa equal to the smaller of
the following two values:
- 0.75 Sy,
(8)
- 0.62 Su.
The provisions of Z VI 2231 are applicable to stiffeners used to avoid web crippling.

Z VI 2215 Limits applicable to stress in bending

Z VI 2215.1 General
The bending stress resulting from the tension, compression and moments exerted on structural
members shall meet the requirements of the following subparagraphs.

 n° 137-2012 Annex Z VI / 11
RCC-M - 2012 Edition Subsection Z

Z VI 2215.2 Compact sections

Tension and compression on extreme fibres of rolled shapes or plate girders conforming to
subsection H shall not exceed the following Fb value, where the shapes and girders are symmetrical
about their axis of minimum moment of inertia and are loaded in their plane of maximum inertia.

 0.66 Sy
Fb  min  (9)
 0.55 Su

To be acceptable, these members shall also satisfy the requirements of (1) to (7) below:
(1) The flanges shall be continuously connected to the web or webs.

(2) The width-thickness ratio unstiffened projecting elements of the compression flange, as defined
in Z VI 2224, shall not exceed 170/ Sy .

(3) The width-thickness ratio stiffened elements of the compression flange, as defined in
Z VI 2224, shall not exceed 500/.

(4) The depth-thickness ratio of the web or webs shall not exceed the following value:

- when fa/Sy  0.16 : d/t  [1680/ Sy ] (1 – 3.74 (fa/Sy)) (10)

- when fa/Sy > 0.16 : d/t  675/ Sy (11)

(5) The laterally unsupported length of the compression flange of members other than box-shaped
members shall not exceed:

 140 000 
min  200 b f Sy ;
 (d / A) S y 


(6) The laterally unsupported length of the compression flange of a box-shaped member of
rectangular cross section shall not exceed the larger of the following two values:
-  13 500  8 300 ( M1 / M 2 )  ( b / S y ) (12)

- 8300 (b/Sy)

This provision is applicable to members whose depth is not more than six times the width and
whose flange thickness is not more than two times the web thickness.

(7) The diameter-thickness ratio of hollow circular sections shall not exceed 22750/Sy

Annex Z VI / 12  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition Subsection Z

Z VI 2215.3 Members with high flange width-thickness ratio

Members which meet the requirements of Z VI 2215.2, except that bf /2 tf exceeds 170/ Sy but is
less than 250/ Sy , must be designed so as not to exceed an allowable bending stress Fb
determined as follows

  b  
Fb  Sy 0.79  0.00076  f  Sy  (13)
  2 tf  
without exceeding 0.55 Su.

Z VI 2215.4 Doubly symmetrical members with bending about the minor axis
Tension and compression on extreme fibres of doubly symmetrical I and H shaped members
complying with the requirements of Z VI 2215.2 or solid round bars and solid square and
rectangular section bars bent about their minor axis, shall not exceed the following Fb value:

 0.75 Sy
Fb  min  (14)
 0.63 Su

Doubly symmetrical I and H shaped members complying with the requirements of Z VI 2215.2,
except that bf/2tf exceeds 170/ Sy but is less than 250/ Sy , must be designed so as not to
exceed an allowable bending stress Fb determined from the following equation:

  b  
Fb  Sy 1.075  0.0019  f  Sy  (15)
  2 tf  
without exceeding 0.63 Su.

Z VI 2215.5 Box type flexural members

Tension and compression on extreme fibres of box type flexural members whose compression
flange or web width-thickness ratio does not meet the requirements of Z VI 2215.2 but does
conform to those of Z VI 2224, shall not exceed the following Fb value:

 0.60 Sy
Fb  min  (16)
 0.50 Su

Lateral torsional buckling need not be checked for a box section whose depth is less than six times
its width.
Box sections of depth-width ratios greater than 6 shall have lateral supports, the effectiveness of
which shall be determined by special analysis.

 n° 137-2012 Annex Z VI / 13
RCC-M - 2012 Edition Subsection Z

Z VI 2215.6 Miscellaneous members

a) Tension on extreme fibres of flexural members not covered by paragraphs Z VI 2215.2 to
Z VI 2215.5 shall not exceed the Fb value determined using equation (16).

b) Compression on extreme fibres of flexural members covered in a) above, meeting the

requirements of Z VI 2224.1 a). and having an axis of symmetry in the plane of their web shall
exceed neither 0.60 Sy, nor 0.50 Su, nor the allowable stress intensity given by the applicable
formula (17), (18) or (19) below, when the member under consideration is loaded in the plane of
the web*:

- when: [ (7 x 105 Cb)/Sy]1/2   /rc  [(35 x 105 Cb)/Sy ]1/2,

Fb = [ 2/3 - [ Sy (  /rc)2/(105 x 105 Cb) ] ] Sy (17)

- when :  /rc  [ (35 x 105 Cb)/Sy ]1/2

Fb = (11.7 x 105 Cb)/(  /rc)2 (18)

- when the compression flange is solid and approximately rectangular in cross section and its
area is not less than that of the tension flange:

Fb = (83 x 103 Cb)/(  d/Af) (19)

where:
Cb = 1.75 + 1.05 (M1/M2) + 0.3 (M1/M2)2  2.3
where M1 is the smaller and M2 is the larger bending moment at the ends of the length taken
about the strong axis of the member under investigation.
The ratio M1/M2 is positive when M1 and M2 have the same sign (reverse curvature bending),
and is negative when they are of opposite signs (single curvature bending).
When the bending moment is maximum at any point within an unbraced length, the value of Cb
shall be taken as unity.
When computing Fbx and Fby used in equation (20), Cb may be computed by the equation given
above for frames subject to joint translation.
Cb may conservatively be taken as 1 for cantilever beams.
* Paragraph Z VI 2230 includes additional stress limitations in the flanges of plate girders.

c) For channels loaded in their plane of maximum inertia, equation (19) only is applicable.
For hybrid plate girders, Sy for equations (17) and (18) is the yield strength of the compression
flange.
Equation (19) shall not apply to hybrid girders.

Annex Z VI / 14  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition Subsection Z

Z VI 2215.7 Miscellaneous members braced laterally

Compression in extreme fibres of flexural members included in Z VI 2215.6.a), but not included in
the member categories covered by Z VI 2215.6.b), and meeting the requirements of Z VI 2224.1.a),
shall not exceed the Fb value determined using equation (16), provided that sections loaded in their
plane of maximum inertia are braced laterally in the region of compression stress at intervals not
exceeding 200 bf/ Sy

Z VI 2216 Combined stresses

Z VI 2216.1 Axial compression and bending
a) For members simultaneously subjected to axial compression and bending, the requirements of
equations (20) and (21), or (22) shall be met:

fa C mx f bx C my f by
   1.0 (20)
Fa (1  f a / F' ex ) Fbx (1  f a / F'ey ) Fby

fa f f by
 bx   1.0 (21)
Ft Fbx Fby

When the ratio Fa is less than or equal to 0.15, equation (22) below may be substituted for
equations (20) and (21):

fa f f by
 bx   1.0 (22)
Fa Fbx Fby

b) Definitions
1) Ft is equal to the smaller of the following two values: 0.60 Sy and 0.50 Su.
2) Subscripts x and y used in equations (20), (21) and (22) indicate the axes of bending with
which the various stresses and coefficients are associated.

3)
12  2 E
F'e 
23 (K  b / rb ) 2

(In conditions for which compliance with level C criteria is required, F'e may be increased by
a third).

4) The value of coefficient Cm is determined in accordance with the provisions of 4.a) to 4.c)
below:
4.a) For compression members in frames subject to joint translation:
Cm = 0.85.

 n° 137-2012 Annex Z VI / 15
RCC-M - 2012 Edition Subsection Z

4.b) For compression members in frames braced against joint translation, which can be
considered as restrained and are not subject to transverse loading between their supports
in the plane of bending:
Cm = 0.6 – 0.4 (M1/M2) but not less than 0.4
where M1/M2 is the ratio of the smaller to larger bending moments (taken as an
absolute value) exerted in the plane of bending under consideration at the ends of the
member in question. M1/M2 is positive when the two moments have the same sign, and
negative otherwise.

4.c) For compression members in frames braced against joint translation in the plane of
loading and subject to transverse loading between their supports, the value of Cm may
be determined by analysis, or failing this, by application of the following provisions:
- for members whose ends are restrained:
Cm = 0.85,
- for members whose ends are unrestrained:
Cm = 1.00.

Z VI 2216.2 Axial tension and bending

Members subject to combined axial tension and bending stresses shall satisfy the requirements of
equation (21) where fb is the bending stress computed in the fibre stressed in tension.
The bending stress computed in the fibre stressed in compression - the bending stress being
considered as acting alone - shall not exceed the applicable limit given in Z VI 2215.

Z VI 2216.3 Shear and tension

Bolts subject to combined shear and tension shall satisfy the requirements of Z VI 2400.

Z VI 2217 Limits applicable to bearing stresses

Z VI 2217.1 Machined surfaces
Bearing stresses in machined surfaces shall not exceed the following Fp value*:

 0.90 Sy
Fb  min  (23)
 0.75 Su

Annex Z VI / 16  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition Subsection Z

This limit is applicable, in particular, to the loads exerted by pins in reamed or drilled holes, and to
the loads on restraints.
* When the parts in contact have different mechanical characteristics, the lowest values shall be considered.

Z VI 2217.2 Rollers and rockers

The maximum bearing load per unit of length exerted by rollers and rockers whose cross section
comprises a circular segment shall not exceed the following F'p value, expressed in MPa x mm:

 Sy  90 
F' 'p    0.66 d (24)
 20 
where d is the diameter of the roller or rocker, expressed in mm.

Z VI 2217.3 Limitation of bearing stress on civil works

The bearing stress on civil works shall be limited, in the absence of other rules, on accordance with
requirements a) and b) below :
a) When the entire concrete bearing surface is in compression (simple compression):
0.85 f c 28
Fp 
b
where
fc28 = characteristic strength of concrete after 28 days (25 MPa unless otherwise indicated),
b = 1.5 for conditions for which compliance with level O, A or B criteria is required,

b = 1.15 for conditions for which compliance with level C or D criteria is required,

Fp = allowable bearing stress.

b) Where a portion Ao of the concrete bearing surface A is in compression, the allowable

compressive load on Ao is equal to that of a part subjected to simple compression, multiplied by
an incremental coefficient K, provided that the bearing member includes no recesses and that its
thickness h is at least equal to twice the ratio of area Ao to its perimeter.
Where areas Ao and A are homothetic and have the same centre of gravity (sketch a) of figure
Z VI 2217.3),

Ao Ao
K45 2 (25)
A A

 n° 137-2012 Annex Z VI / 17
RCC-M - 2012 Edition Subsection Z

Where areas Ao and A are rectangles with the same axis (therefore concentric) and dimensions
(ao, bo) and (a, b) respectively (sketch b) of figures Z VI 2217.3),

 
 a b 
K  1   3  o  o   1  a o  1  b o   (26)
   
 a b   a  b  

When Ao is a circle of diameter d and A a concentric rectangle, the preceding formula applies,
replacing ao and bo by 0.88 d.
When areas Ao and A do not have the same centre of gravity, the contour of A is replaced by an
internal contour A1 thus recreating the conditions of one of the cases above. The above formulas
are then applied to areas Ao and A1 replacing A by A1 as shown in sketch c) figure Z VI 2217.3.

Z VI 2220 STABILITY AND SLENDERNESS RATIOS

Z VI 2221 General requirements
a) Stability requirements for structures apply to the structure as a whole, and to its constituent
members.

b) In determining the slenderness ratio of an axially loaded compression member, the length shall
be taken as an effective length K, where r is the radius of gyration corresponding to its
minimum inertia.

Z VI 2222 Rules for determining buckling lengths

Z VI 2222.1 Side-sway prevented
Where the lateral stability of the structure is provided by adequate provisions such as lateral wind-
bracing and connection to adjacent structures having adequate lateral stability or to floor slabs
secured horizontally by walls or bracing systems parallel to their plane, and in the case of trusses, it
may be considered that the possibility of side-sway has been prevented for the joints of
compression members, in which case coefficient K may be taken as unity, or lower where sufficient
justification can be found (e.g. restrained joints).

Z VI 2222.2 Side-sway not prevented

Where the lateral stability of either or both joints of a member is imperfect, for example where
lateral stability is dependent upon the bending stiffness of rigidly connected beams and columns, the
buckling length K shall be determined by analysis and shall in no case be less than the unbraced
length of the member under investigation.

Annex Z VI / 18  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition Subsection Z

Z VI 2223 Maximum slenderness ratios

a) The slenderness ratio K/r of compression members shall not exceed 200.

b) The slenderness ratio /r of tension members other than rods, preferably shall not exceed 240 for
main members and 300 for bracing and other secondary members.

Z VI 2224 Thickness conditions for compression members

Z VI 2224.1 Members with one free edge
a) For the application of the provisions of Z VI 2210 to members subject to axial compression or
compression due to bending, with one free edge parallel to the direction of compression stress,
the actual value of the width of members under consideration cannot be taken into account in
calculations unless the ratio of free width b to thickness t of flanges, webs or projecting plates is
not greater than the values indicated in 1) to 3) below. Otherwise, the provisions of Z VI 2225
shall be applied.
1) In the case of single angle struts and double angle struts of uniform thickness, (sketches (a)
and (b) of figure Z VI 2224.1), this ratio shall not exceed 200/ Sy .

2) In the particular case of the stems of tees, this ratio shall not exceed 335/ Sy (sketch (c) of
figure Z VI 2224.1).
3) In cases other than those covered by 1) and 2) above (struts comprising double angles in
contact, projecting flanges or plates, stiffeners or plate girders, etc.), this ratio shall not
exceed 250/ Sy .

b) For the application of the requirements given in a) above, the dimensional characteristics b and t
to be taken into account shall be determined in accordance with figure Z VI 2224.1.

Z VI 2224.2 Members with stiffened edges

a) For the application of the provisions of Z VI 2210 to compression members or compressed
portions of flexural parts * which have two edges stiffened parallel to the direction of the
compression stress, the actual value of the width of members under consideration cannot be
taken into account in calculations unless compliance with the following requirements has been
checked. Otherwise - with the exception of perforated cover plates - the requirements of
Z VI 2225 shall be applied:
1) For the walls of square and rectangular box sections of uniform thickness (sketches (a) and
(b) of figure Z VI 2224.2), the ratio b/t shall not exceed 625/ Sy .

2) For cover plates perforated with a succession of access holes**, the ratio b/t shall not
exceed 830/ Sy .

3) For all other uniformly compressed stiffened walls, the ratio to shall not exceed 665/ Sy
(sketches (c) to (h) of figure S VI 2224.2).

 n° 137-2012 Annex Z VI / 19
RCC-M - 2012 Edition Subsection Z

b) For the application of the provisions given in a) above, the dimensional characteristics of b and t
to be considered shall be determined in accordance with figure Z VI 2224.2.

c) For the application to tubular sections of the provisions of Z VI 2210 relating to the limitation of
compression stresses, the ratio of diameter to thickness of these sections shall not exceed
22750/Sy. Otherwise, the provisions of Z VI 2225.3 d) apply.

* This paragraph does not apply to the webs of flexural members for which the provisions of Z VI 2231 and
Z VI 2233.2 are applicable.

** The compression stresses in these plates should be evaluated using the net area of plate.

Z VI 2225 Compression members which do not comply with the thickness

conditions of Z VI 2224
Z VI 2225.1 General
Axially loaded compression members and the compressed portions of flexural members whose
dimensional characteristics do not comply with the conditions given in Z VI 2224 shall conform to
the requirements of this paragraph.

Z VI 2225.2 Members with unstiffened edges

a) The allowable stresses in compressed members with one or more unstiffened edges for which the
ratio b/t does not comply with the conditions given in Z VI 2224.1 shall be assigned a reduction
factor Qs determined by application of one of equations (27) to (32) under the following
conditions:
- for the compressed portions of flexural members, maximum allowable bending stress is equal
to 0.6 Sy Qs, this requirement being added to those of paragraphs Z VI 2215.6 or
Z VI 2215.7.
- for axially loaded compression members, the value of Qs must be taken into account in
determining the allowable stress Fa, according to a procedure indicated in Z VI 2225.5.

b) Determination of the Qs factor

1) For the application of provisions 2) to 4) below, the values of b and t are as determined in
Z VI 2224.1.

2) For single or double angles:

When 200/ Sy < b/t < 405/ Sy ,

Qs = 1.340 - 0.0017 (b/t) Sy (27)

When b/t  405/ Sy :

Qs = 106.700/ [ Sy (b/t)2] (28)

Annex Z VI / 20  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition Subsection Z

3) For stems of tees:

When 335/ Sy < b/t < 460/ Sy :

Qs = 1.908 - 0.00272 (b/t) Sy (29)

When b/t  460/ Sy :

Qs = 138.000/ [ Sy (b/t)2] (30)

4) In cases other than those covered by 2) and 3) above (projecting plates or flanges, plate girder
stiffeners, etc.):

When 250 / Sy < b/t < 460 / Sy :

Qs= 1.415 - 0.00166 (b/t) Sy (31)

When b/t  460 / Sy

Qs = 138.000/ [ Sy (b/t)2] (32)

c) The unstiffened portions of channels and tees whose proportions do not comply with the
conditions given in Z VI 2224.1 shall satisfy the requirements of the tables below:

flange width flange thickness

Shape
profile depth web or stem thickness

Rolled channels  0.25  3.0

Built-up channels  0.50  2.0

Built-up tees  0.50  1.25
Rolled tees  0.50  1.10

Z VI 2225.3 Members with stiffened edges

a) In determining the properties of sections comprising stiffened portions under compression whose
dimensional characteristics do not conform to the conditions given in Z VI 2224.2, and in
determining the allowable compression stresses for stiffened axially loaded compression
members which do not satisfy these conditions, effective width b shall be replaced by a corrected
effective width be determined in accordance with the requirements given in b) and c) below:
However, the ratio be/t need not be less than the limits set for the ratio b/t in Z VI 2224.2.

b) Determination of be
1) For the walls of square or rectangular box sections of uniform thickness:

 
665 t  132 
be  1  b (33)
f   
(b / t ) f 

 n° 137-2012 Annex Z VI / 21
RCC-M - 2012 Edition Subsection Z

2) For other uniformly compressed members

 
665 t  116 
be  1 b (34)
f   
(b / t ) f 

where: b is defined in accordance with Z VI 2224.2

f is compression stress computed by iteration in the stiffened portions of the member under
consideration taking into account the requirements given in Z VI 2225.4. If unstiffened portions
are included in the cross section under consideration, the value f applicable to the stiffened parts
shall be such that the compression stress in the unstiffened portions does not exceed the limits Fa
Qs or Fb Qs applicable to these portions.

c) In the checks associated with level C criteria, the corrected effective width be is determined on
the basis of 0.75 times the stress level associated with conditions for which this criteria level is
specified.

d) The allowable stress Fa for axially loaded tubular members not meeting the requirements of
Z VI 2224.2.c) is determined by the following relationship, provided that the diameter to
thickness ratio of these portions does not exceed 90.000/Sy:
662
Fa   0.4 Sy
D/t

where: D = outside diameter t = wall thickness

Z VI 2225.4 Properties of sections

The various properties of sections shall be determined in accordance with conventional methods,
using the full cross section of the member, unless otherwise specified in a) and b) below:
a) In computing the moment and modulus of inertia (with respect to the axis of bending under
consideration) of flexural members, the effective width of stiffened portions parallel to the axis
of bending and under compression shall be substituted for the actual width when the dimensional
characteristics of these members do not satisfy the conditions specified in Z VI 2224.2.
In this case, the neutral bending axis shall be positioned accordingly.
For symmetrical sections, the characteristics of the sections may be more easily (and yet
conservatively) computed using only an effective area at the portion of the section under tension
determined in the same manner.
The difference between the actual section and the effective section shall be symmetrically
distributed around the centreline of the member under consideration.

Annex Z VI / 22  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition Subsection Z

b) The stress Fa due to the axial loading and the radius of gyration r shall be computed on the basis
of the actual characteristics of the cross-sectional area. However, the allowable stress Fa referred
to in Z VI 2225.5 shall be multiplied by the following factor Qa:
effective area
Qa 
actual area
where:
effective area = actual area less  (b - be)t

Z VI 2225.5 Axially loaded compression members

a) The allowable stress Fa for axially loaded compression members containing stiffened or
unstiffened portions is computed as follows, when K/r is less than C'c:

 (K / r ) 2  5 3 ( K / r ) (K / r )3
Fa  Qs Q a 1   Sy   (35)
 2 (C'c ) 2  3 8 (C'c ) 8 (C'c )3
where:
C'c = [ 2 2 E / Qa Qs Sy ]½
The value Fa shall in no case exceed 0.5 Su.

b) When K/r is greater than C'c, the allowable stress Fa is given by equation (5) of Z VI 2214.

c) When K/r is greater than 120, the allowable stress Fa is given by equation (6) of Z VI 2214
where reference to equation (4) shall be replaced by reference to equation (35).

Z VI 2225.6 Combination of axial and flexural stresses

When the provisions of Z VI 2216 are applied to members subject to combined axial and flexural
stress and containing stiffened edges whose dimensional characteristics do not satisfy the conditions
given in Z VI 2224.2, the stresses Fa, fbx and fby shall be calculated on the basis of the applicable
provisions of Z VI 2224.4 and Z VI 2225.5.
The allowable bending stress Fb applicable to members containing unstiffened edges which do not
satisfy the conditions given in Z VI 2224.1 shall be taken as the smaller of the following two
values:
- 0.6 Sy Qs
- 0.5 Su Qs
- or the applicable value given in Z VI 2215.6.

 n° 137-2012 Annex Z VI / 23
RCC-M - 2012 Edition Subsection Z

Z VI 2230 SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS APPLICABLE TO WEBS,

FLANGES AND STIFFENERS
Z VI 2231 Webs
Z VI 2231.1 General requirements
The ratio of the clear distance between flanges to the web thickness shall not exceed:

96.500/ ( (Sy  114) ) (36)

where Sy is the yield strength of the flange under compression.

This limiting ratio is increased to 5250/ Sy when transverse stiffeners are used, provided the
spacing between each stiffener does not exceed 1.5 times the girder depth.

Z VI 2231.2 Combined shear and tension stress

Plate girder webs shall be so proportioned that bending tensile stresses in the plane of the web do
not exceed the smallest of the following values:
– 0.6 Sy
– 0.5 Su
 f 
–  0.825  0.375 v  S y
 Fv 

where:
Fv = allowable web shear stress calculated using equation (45).
The allowable shear stress in the webs of girders shall not exceed the value obtained by applying
equation (44) if the flexural stress in the flange exceeds 0.75 Fb.

Z VI 2231.3 Prevention of web crippling

a) The compression stresses resulting from concentrated loads not supported by stiffeners shall not
exceed 0.75 Sy or 0.625 Su at the web toe of fillets between the flange and the web of beams or
at the root of fillet welds between the flange and the web of plate girders.

If the above requirement cannot be met, stiffeners shall be provided.

The applicable equations are as follows:
1) for interior loads:
R  0.75 Sy
 min  (38)
t ( N  2k )  0.625 Su

Annex Z VI / 24  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition Subsection Z

2) for end reactions:

R  0.75 Sy
 min  (39)
t ( N  k)  0.625 Su

where:
N  k for end reactions
k= distance from outer face of flange to web toe of fillet, or an equivalent distance in the
case of plate girders.

b) The sum of the compression stresses in the webs of plate girders resulting from concentrated and
distributed loads bearing directly on or through a flange upon the compression edge of the web
plate and not supported directly by stiffeners, shall not exceed:

 4  69.000
5.5   (40)
 (a / h ) 2  ( h / t ) 2

when measures are taken to prevent rotation of the flange with respect to the web, and :

 4  69.000
2   (41)
 (a / h ) 2  (h / t ) 2
when the flange is not restrained.
These stresses shall be computed as required by 1) and 2) below:

1) Concentrated loads shall be divided by the product of the web thickness and the girder depth
or the length of the panel through which the load is applied. In the latter case, the smaller
panel dimension shall be adopted.

2) Distributed loads expressed in N per linear mm shall be divided by the web thickness.

Z VI 2232 Flanges
Z VI 2232.1 Constructional provisions applicable to flanges
a) The dimensional characteristics of the flanges of welded plate girders (width and thickness) may
be increased by the addition of cover plates in accordance with the provisions of Z VI 2232.2.

In the case of bolted girders, the total cross-sectional area of cover plates shall not exceed 70%
of the total cross-sectional area of the flanges.

b) High strength bolts or welds connecting flanges to the web(s) shall be able to resist the
horizontal shear resulting from the bending forces on the girder and transmit to the web any
loads likely to be applied to the flanges unless provision is made to transmit such loads by
direct bearing.

 n° 137-2012 Annex Z VI / 25
RCC-M - 2012 Edition Subsection Z

Z VI 2232.2 Provisions applicable to cover plates

a) Bolts or welds connecting cover plates to the flanges shall be able to resist the horizontal shear
resulting from the bending forces on the girder.
The longitudinal distribution of these bolts or welds shall be chosen in proportion to the intensity
of the shear.
In addition, the distances between bolts or intermittent welds measured longitudinally shall
satisfy the following conditions if the cover plate contributes to strength.
1) For compression members, this distance shall not exceed the smaller of the following two
values:
- 300 mm,

- or the product of the thickness of the thinnest plate times the ratio 335/ Sy

when the connecting elements are distributed over a square or rectangular grid. When the
elements are staggered, the preceding values are increased to 450 mm and 500/ Sy
respectively.

2) For tension members, this distance shall not exceed the smaller of the following two values:
- 24 times the thinnest plate thickness,
- 300 mm.

b) Each cover plate shall be extended on either side of the theoretical cut off point and attached to
the beam or girder by high strength bolts or welds so as to develop the flexural stresses at the cut
off point.

c) In addition, in the case of welded cover plates, the welds connecting the cover plate termination
to the girder in the length a' shall be adequate (at the allowed stresses) to develop satisfactorily
the cover plate portion of the stresses at a distance from the ends of the cover plate equal to the
same value a'.
The length a' referred to above is determined in accordance with provisions 1) to 3) below.
1) When there is a continuous weld equal to or larger than 0.75 times the plate thickness across
the end of the plate, a' is taken as equal to the width of the plate.
2) When there is no continuous weld less than 0.75 times the plate thickness across the end of
the plate, a' is taken as equal to 1.5 times the width of the plate.

Annex Z VI / 26  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition Subsection Z

3) When there is a continuous weld across the end of the plate, a' is taken as equal to 2 times the
width of the plate.
In all cases, continuous lateral welds shall be provided in the length a' on either side of the
cover plate.

Z VI 2232.3 Reduction in allowable flange stress

When the web-depth thickness ratio exceeds 2000/ Fb , the maximum stress in the compression
flange shall not exceed the following F'b value:

 A  h 2000  
F ' b  Fb 1.0  0.0005 w    (42)
 Af  t F 
  b 

where Fb is the applicable allowable bending stress given in Z VI 2215.

The maximum stress in either flange of a hybrid girder shall not exceed the value given in
equation (42) or the following value:

12  ( A w / A f ) ( 3    3 )
F ' b  Fb (43)
12  2 ( A w / A f )

Z VI 2233 Stiffeners
Z VI 2233.1 Bearing stiffeners
Bearing stiffeners shall be placed systematically at the unframed ends of plate girders and at points
subjected to concentrated loads, where this is required by Z VI 2231.3.
Such stiffeners shall be connected to the flange or flanges through which they receive their loads or
reactions across the entire flange width.
They shall be designed as columns subject to the provisions of Z VI 2200, assuming the section to
comprise the actual section of the stiffeners associated with a web width not exceeding the
following value:
- 25 times web thickness in the case of intermediate stiffeners,
- 12 times web thickness when the stiffeners are located at the end of the web.

In computing the buckling length of these "columns", the effective length shall be taken as not less
than 0.75 times the length (depth) of these stiffeners.
Only that portion of the stiffeners outside the flange angle fillet (or the flange to web weld in the
case of plate girders) shall be taken into account in evaluating the bearing of the stiffeners.

 n° 137-2012 Annex Z VI / 27
RCC-M - 2012 Edition Subsection Z

Z VI 2233.2 Limits applicable to average web shear stresses

Except as provided herein, the maximum value Fy for average web shear likely to be obtained for
any loading condition (complete or partial) shall not exceed the following limit value:

 0.75 S y
Fv  (S y / 2.89) C v  min  (44)
 0.625 S u
where:
Cv = (310.000 k) / (Sy (h/t)2 ) when Cv is less than 0.8 and:

= (500/(h/t)) k / Sy when Cv is greater than 0.8

k = 4.00 + (5.34/(a/h)2) when a/h is less than 1.0, and:

= 5.34 + (4.00/(a/h)2) when a/h is greater than 1.0.

Alternatively, for girders other than hybrid girders and tapered members, if intermediate stiffeners
are provided and spaced to satisfy the requirements of Z VI 2233.3, and if Cv  1, the allowable
shear stress Fv may be calculated using equation (45) below:

Sy  1  Cv  0.4 S y
Fv  C v    min (45)
2.89  1.15 1  (a / h ) 2  0.33 S u
 

Z VI 2233.3 Intermediate stiffeners

a) Subject to the limitations of Z VI 2231, intermediate stiffeners are not required when the ratio h/t
is less than 260 and when the maximum web shear stress fv is less than the limit value given by
equation (44).

b) When intermediate stiffeners are required, the spacing between each stiffener shall be such that
the web shear stress shall not exceed the value of Fv given by equation (44) or (45), as
applicable, and the ratio a/h shall not exceed (260/(h/t)2) or 3.0.

c) The moments of inertia (expressed in mm4, with reference to an axis in the plane of the web) of
single intermediate stiffeners or stiffeners that are symmetrical with respect to the web shall not
be less than (h/50)4.

d) The gross area of the intermediate stiffener(s), spaced as required by equation (45), shall not be
less than the value Ast computed by equation (46).

1  Cv  a (a / h ) 2

A st     Y Dht (46)
2 h
 
1  (a / h ) 
2 1/ 2 

where:
D = 1.0 for stiffeners symmetrical with the web
D = 1.8 for single angle stiffener
D = 2.4 for single plate stiffeners

Annex Z VI / 28  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition Subsection Z

e) When the greatest shear stress fv in a panel is less than the limit value permitted by
equation (45), the preceding requirement relating to the minimum gross area may be reduced
proportionately.

f) Intermediate stiffeners required by equation (45) shall be connected to the other portions so as to
ensure a total shear transfer greater than or equal to that computed by equation (47) below, when
this transfer is expressed in N/linear mm of stiffener:

fvs = 0.039 h Sy ⅔ (47)

This nominal value may be reduced in the same proportion that the largest computed shear stress
fv is less than the limit given by equation (45).
However, bolts and welds in intermediate stiffeners which are required to transmit to the web a
concentrated load or reaction shall be able to resist these loads or reactions.

g) If single stiffeners are used, they shall be connected to the compression flange (if the latter
consists of a rectangular plate) so as to resist any uplift tendency likely to result from torsions in
the plate.

h) Bolts connecting stiffeners to the girder web shall be spaced not more than 300 mm apart. If
intermittent fillet welds are used, the clear distance between welds shall not be more than
16 times the web thickness, or 250 mm.

Z VI 2240 GROSS AND NET SECTIONS

Z VI 2241 Determination of gross and net sections
The gross section of a member shall be determined by summing the products of the thickness and
the gross width of each element as measured normal to the axis of the member.
The net section of a part shall be determined by substituting the net width, computed in accordance
with the provisions of Z VI 2243, for the gross width of the element in the above product.

Z VI 2242 Use of gross and net section

Unless otherwise specified, tension members shall be designed on the basis of the net section.
Compression members shall be designed on the basis of gross section.

Z VI 2243 Determination of net section

Z VI 2243.1 Parts with holes
a) In the case of a part with one or several chains of holes, the net width (associated with a given
chain) of the part shall be obtained by deducting from the gross width of the part, the sum of the
diameters of all the holes in the chain in question (which may be a zigzag line) and adding to this
difference, for each gauge space in the chain, the quantity s2/4g where s and g are defined in
figure Z VI 2243.

 n° 137-2012 Annex Z VI / 29
RCC-M - 2012 Edition Subsection Z

b) The net area of the part is obtained by adopting the minimum net width likely to be obtained, in
accordance with the provisions given in a) above, and according to the various chains of holes
possible.
The net area chosen in justifying the mechanical strength of the member shall in no case exceed
85% of the gross area.

c) When determining the net area across plug or slot welds, the weld metal shall not be considered
in the calculation of the net area.

Z VI 2243.2 Size of bolt holes

In computing net area, the diameter of a rivet or bolt hole shall be taken as 1.5 mm greater than the
nominal dimension of the normal to the direction of applied stress.

Z VI 2243.3 Angle
For angles, the gross width shall be the sum of the width of the legs less the thickness of the angle.
Similarly, the gauge for 2 holes in opposite legs shall be the sum of the gauges from back of angles
less the thickness.

Z VI 2243.4 Rules applicable to pin connected members

a) Unless otherwise required for mechanical reasons, pin connected members shall either conform
to AFNOR standards or satisfy the requirements of b) to f) below.

b) Eyebars shall be of uniform thickness without reinforcement at the pinholes. They shall have
circular heads in which the periphery of the head beyond the pinhole is concentric with the
pinhole.
The radius of transition between the head and the body of the pinhole shall be equal to or greater
than the diameter of the head.
The width of the body of the eyebar shall not exceed 8 times its thickness and the thickness shall
not be less than 13 mm. The net section of the eyebar at the pinhole shall be between 1.33 and
1.50 times the cross-sectional area of the body.
The diameter of the pin shall not be less than seven-eigths the thickness of the body of the eyebar
and the diameter of the pinhole shall not be more than 0.8 mm greater than the diameter of
the pin.
For steels having a yield strength greater than 500 MPa, the diameter of the pinhole shall not be
greater than five times the thickness of the eyebar.

c) For plates and other members with reinforced pinholes, the net area determined at the pinhole
normal to the axis of the plate or member in question, shall satisfy the applicable requirements of
Z VI 2212. The net area beyond the pinhole, parallel to the axis of the plate or member shall not
be less than two-thirds the net area across the pinhole.

Annex Z VI / 30  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition Subsection Z

The corners of the member beyond the pinhole may be cut at 45° provided the net area on a
plane perpendicular to the cut thus obtained is not less than that required above parallel to the
axis of the member.
If reinforcing parts are added to the pinhole, the connections between the reinforcing parts and
the member shall be designed to resist the stresses transmitted by the pin.

d) The distance from the edge of the pinhole to the edge of the reinforced member or element
(to which the provisions given in b) above are applicable), measured on a plane perpendicular to
the axis of the member or element, shall not exceed four times the thickness of the plate or
member measured across the pinhole.
The pinhole shall not be less than 1.25 times the minimum distance separating the edge of the
pinhole and the periphery of the plate or member, and shall not be more than 0.8 times the
diameter of the pin. In the case of plates of uniform thickness made from a material with a yield
strength greater than 500 MPa, the diameter of the pinhole shall not be more than 5 times the
thickness of the plate.

e) The thickness limitations specified on both eyebars and pin connected plates may be waived
whenever an additional lateral connection in the form of nuts is provided. In this case, the
allowable stress in bearing specified in Z VI 2217.1 shall be complied with.

f) Pin connections shall include no zone weaker than the net cross-sectional area through the axis
of the pin.

Z VI 2250 SPECIAL CONSTRUCTIONAL PROVISIONS

Z VI 2251 General
If plate girders, hybrid girders or built-up girders are used, particularly in intermediate frames
subject to the requirements of Subsection H, the provisions applied shall ensure proper load
distribution amongst the various members and compliance of the various members with the stress
limit of Z VI 2200.

Z VI 2252 Beam connections

a) When several beams are used side by side to form a flexural member, they shall be connected at
intervals not exceeding 1.5 m. When through bolts and separators are used to connect beams
having a depth of 300 mm or more, two bolts at least shall be used for each connection.

b) The longitudinal spacing between connecting elements joining two beams in contact with one
another shall not exceed 600 mm in the case of compression or tension members.

 n° 137-2012 Annex Z VI / 31
RCC-M - 2012 Edition Subsection Z

Z VI 2253 Rules relating to local slenderness ratios

a) In addition to the requirements of Z VI 2220, it is required that, for lacing type built-up
compression members, or generally speaking, any compression member composed of several
booms connected by lacing bars, struts or cross pieces, the spacing between these connections
shall be such that the local slenderness ratios between fasteners are not greater than the
slenderness ratio of the built-up member as a whole.

b) The ratio /r for lacing bars arranged in single systems, shall not exceed 140. For double lacing,
this limit is increased to 200.
Double lacing bars shall be joined at their intersection.

Z VI 2300 RULES FOR FATIGUE ANALYSIS

Z VI 2310 INTRODUCTION
Z VI 2311 Scope
In checking the conditions for which compliance with level A and B criteria is required, the
provisions of this subchapter may be applied to class S1 and S2 linear type supports analysis in
accordance with the requirements of Z VI 2110 b).

Z VI 2312 Principle of fatigue analysis rules

The simplified rules for fatigue contained in this sub-chapter consist in limiting, in accordance with
Z VI 2340, the stress range associated with conditions considered at a maximum value as a
function of:
- an equivalent number of cycles determined in accordance with Z VI 2320 on the basis of the
numbers of occurrences of the various specified conditions and the relative stress ranges
associated with these conditions,
- the nature of the support members under analysis and,
- the nature of the stresses under consideration, in accordance with the indications given in
Z VI 2330.
The total stress range shall be used in applying these rules, whether the stress under consideration
changes sign or not during a cycle.

Z VI 2320 DETERMINATION OF EQUIVALENT NUMBER OF CYCLES

When the specified conditions have identical stress ranges, the equivalent number of cycles is equal
to the total number of occurrences of the specified conditions.
If the specified conditions have different stress ranges, the equivalent number of cycles may be
calculated as follows:
5 5
    
N *  N o  N1  1   ...  N   i 
   i 
  
 o   o 

Annex Z VI / 32  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition Subsection Z

where:
N* is the equivalent number of cycles,
N0 the number of occurrences of the condition whose stress range σ0 is maximum,
N1 the number of occurrences of the condition 1 characterized by a stress range σ1,
Ni the number of occurrences of the condition i characterized by a stress range σi,
The equivalent number of cycles thus obtained is used in applying table Z VI 2340.

Z VI 2330 STRESS CATEGORIES

The rules for distribution into stress categories allowing an allowable stress range to be associated
with a member, zone or portion of a particular support by applying table Z VI 2340 are shown in
table Z VI 2330, supplemented by the illustrations in figure Z VI 2330.

Z VI 2340 ALLOWABLE STRESS RANGES

Apart from compliance with the stress limits of Z VI 2200 the allowable stress ranges given in table
Z VI 2340 as a function of stress category and equivalent number of cycles determined using
Z VI 2320 shall not be exceeded.
In the particular case of stresses which change sign during a cycle and for configurations marked
with an asterisk in table Z VI 2330, the applicable allowable stress range F'SR may be determined
using stress range FSR obtained from table Z VI 2340, in accordance with the following formula:

 f  fc 
F 'SR   t F
 f  0.6 f  SR
 t c 
where:
ft is the modulus of the maximum tensile stress value and,
fc the modulus of the maximum compression stress.

Z VI 2400 RULES APPLICABLE TO MECHANICAL CONNECTIONS

AND WELDED JOINTS
Z VI 2410 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Z VI 2411 Types of connections permitted
Connections shall be obtained by mechanical means or by welding, or both, in which case the
conditions set forth in Z VI 2442 shall be complied with. Connections shall be designed to ensure
proper load transmission.

 n° 137-2012 Annex Z VI / 33
RCC-M - 2012 Edition Subsection Z

Z VI 2412 Rules for the positioning of connections

As far as possible, bolted or welded connections shall be designed to have gravity axes which
intersect at a point.
If this condition cannot be complied with, provision shall be made for the resulting increased loads
in the design of members and connections.

Z VI 2413 Rules for the positioning of bolts and welds

Except as otherwise provided, groups of bolts or welds at the ends of a member transmitting axial
stress, shall, as far as possible, have their centres of gravity on the gravity axis of the member.
Otherwise, provision shall be made for the resulting effect of eccentricity.

Z VI 2420 CONNECTION DESIGN

Z VI 2421 General requirement
All necessary measures shall be taken to ensure that beams, girders or trusses are not liable to rotate
about their longitudinal axis at the points where they are supported.

Z VI 2422 Connections for unrestrained members

a) Except as otherwise indicated, connections of beams, girders or trusses may be designed as
flexible and, in this case, may be proportioned for the reaction shears only.

b) Flexible beam connections shall accommodate rotations resulting from the strain on connected
members. To accomplish this, inelastic action in the connection is permitted.

Z VI 2423 Connections for restrained members

a) In the case of connections for restrained members, welds or fasteners shall be designed for the
combined effect of end reaction shear and tensile or compressive stresses resulting from moment
induced by the rigidity of the connection.
The stress limits prescribed in Z VI 2110 shall be complied with. However, plastic deformation
of a portion of the connection is permissible provided it is self-limiting (i.e., due to a secondary
load) and that it is absolutely essential so as not to imperil the strength of certain fasteners.

b) When girders are connected to the flanges of I or H shaped columns, the column webs shall be
reinforced with stiffeners symmetrical with the web when the following condition is not
satisfied:
Pbf  Fyc . t (tb + 5k) (48)

Annex Z VI / 34  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition Subsection Z

where:
Pbf = the force delivered by the flange or connection plate multiplied by 5/3 when the loads
due to wind or earthquakes are not taken into consideration, and 4/3 when these forces
are cumulated with loads of all other types (N).
Fyc = yield strength of the column web material (MPa).
t = thickness of column web (mm).
tb = thickness of flange or connection plate delivering concentrated loads (mm).
k = distance between outer face of column flange and web toe fillet in the case of rolled
shapes, or equivalent distance in the case of welded shapes (mm)
When stiffeners are required, their gross area Ast shall be less than the following value:
Pbf  Fyc  t ( t b  5 k )
A st 
Fyst

where:
Fyst : yield strength of the stiffener material.
In addition, the stress limits given in Z VI 2210 shall be complied with. An example of a
connection for a restrained member is given in figure Z VI 2422.

c) Notwithstanding the requirements of Z VI 2423 b) above, stiffeners shall be provided opposite

the compression flange when the column web depth clear of fillets dc, expressed in mm, is
greater than the following value:

4100 t 3 Fyc
Pbf

Similarly, stiffeners shall be provided opposite the tension flange when the thickness of the
column flange tf, expressed in mm, in less than:
1.6 . 10-2 Pbf/Fyc

d) Stiffeners required by the provisions of Z VI 2423 b) and c) above, shall comply with the
following requirements:
1) The width of each stiffener shall not be less than one-third the width of the flange or
connection plate, less half the thickness of the column web.
2) The thickness of stiffeners shall not be less than half that of the flange or connection plate
delivering the concentrated loads.

e) If a connection plate is used, it is necessary to check that the normal stresses in the plate do not
exceed the stress limit indicated in Z VI 2212 a), and that the shear stresses do not exceed the
stress limit indicated in Z VI 2213.

 n° 137-2012 Annex Z VI / 35
RCC-M - 2012 Edition Subsection Z

Z VI 2424 Rules for the connection of structural members

Connections between (tension or compression) structural members shall be able to resist specified
loads. In addition, capacity to resist loads shall be not less than 50% of the strength of the
connected members.

Z VI 2425 Rules applicable to the bearing joints of compression members

a) Columns bearing on bearing plates shall be held in place by sufficient bolts or welds.

b) Compression members other than columns which are finished to bear shall also be correctly
aligned and held in place. In addition, bolted and welded connections shall, in this case, be able
to resist a stress level equal to 50% of the computed stresses for the bearing joints.

c) These joints shall furthermore be able to resist tensile stresses due to specified lateral forces. In
checking this requirement, these lateral forces shall be assumed to act in conjunction with 75%
of the calculated dead load (compression) stress and no live load.

Z VI 2430 RULES APPLICABLE TO LAP JOINTS

Where lap joints are used, the lap shall be at least five times the thickness of the thinner of the
parts joined, but not less than 25 mm.
Lap joints joining plates or bars subjected to axial stress shall be fillet welded along the end of the
lapped parts except where deflection of the lapped parts is sufficiently restrained to prevent
opening of the joint under maximum loading.

Z VI 2440 JOINT COMBINATIONS

Z VI 2441 Combinations of welds
Where welds of different types (groove, fillet, plug or slot) are combined in a single joint, the
overall capacity of the joint shall be determined by separately computing, with reference to the
axis of the group, the effective contribution of each of these welds.

Z VI 2442 Bolts in combination with welds

Where bolts are used in combination with welded joints, they shall not be considered as sharing
the stress, except in the case of friction-type connections using high-strength bolts for which the
bolts may be considered as sharing the stress with the welds.

Annex Z VI / 36  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition Subsection Z

Z VI 2450 DESIGN RULES APPLICABLE TO WELDED JOINTS

Z VI 2451 General
a) Except as otherwise indicated in b) below, all types of welded joints may be used for linear-
type supports provided that the provisions of this appendix relating to stress limits in joints are
complied with.
Welded joints, whatever their type (fillet, plug, slot or throat, and in the latter case, full or
partial penetration) shall be designed to comply with the stress limits of table H 3282.2. In
checking these requirements, the effective cross-sectional areas of welded connections shall be
calculated in accordance with the provisions of Z VI 2452 to Z VI 2454 below.

b) Lap joints using fillet welds may be used for the supports of class 2 and 3 components, except
for the supports of class 2 vessels designed in accordance with the rules of C 3200. For piping
supports, they may be used whatever the class of supported piping.

Z VI 2452 Fillet welds

Z VI 2452.1 Minimum size of fillet and partial penetration welds
The throat thickness of fillet or partial penetration welds shall not be less than the higher of the
two values: 3 mm and 0.7× t, where t is thickness of the thinnest of the parts joined.

Z VI 2452.2 Maximum effective size of fillet and partial penetration welds

The maximum throat thickness of welded joints that may be assumed in the design of a connection
is tied up with the fact that the stresses in the base material of the connected parts must not exceed
the limits given in table H 3282.2.
In addition, the bead leg width which could be considered in the strength analysis shall not exceed
the following values:
a) on the lips of the joined elements having a thickness not exceeding 6 mm, the maximum value
shall be equal to the thickness of the thinnest element,

b) on the lips of the joined elements having a thickness equal to or greater than 6 mm, the
maximum value shall be equal to the thickness of the thinnest element less1.5 mm.

Z VI 2452.3 Length of welds

a) The length of fillet welds shall be the overall length of full size fillet including returns.

b) The effective length of a strength fillet weld shall be not less than four times the nominal throat
thickness. If not, the nominal throat thickness designed on the basis of strength shall not exceed
one quarter of the effective length.

 n° 137-2012 Annex Z VI / 37
RCC-M - 2012 Edition Subsection Z

c) When longitudinal fillet welds are used alone in end connections of flat bar tension members,
the length of each fillet weld shall be not less than the perpendicular distance between them.
Furthermore, the transverse spacing of welds shall not exceed 200 mm, unless appropriate
measures allow transverse bending in the connection to be limited to an acceptable value.

Z VI 2452.4 Effective throat thickness of fillet welds

The effective throat thickness of a fillet weld shall be the distance from the minimum point of
penetration of the base metal to the face of the weld. This distance may be calculated on the basis
of the theoretical sketch of the weld taking the distance between the root and the face of the weld.

In the case of welds made by submerged arc welding, the effective throat thickness may be taken
as equal to the leg size if the leg size does not exceed 10 mm, or equal to the theoretical throat
thickness plus 3 mm, for welds with legs over 10 mm in size.

Z VI 2452.5 Effective area of fillet welds

The effective area of fillet welds shall be considered as equal to the product of the effective throat
thickness times the effective length of the weld.

Z VI 2452.6 Effective area of fillet welds in holes and slots

The effective section of fillet welds in holes and slots shall be determined in accordance with
Z VI 2452.5, using, for effective length, the length of the edge of the weld at mid-thickness of
the throat.
This effective area shall in no case exceed the area of the hole or slot in the plane of the interface
between assembly parts.

Z VI 2452.7 Requirements applicable to intermittent fillet welds

Intermittent fillet welds may be used when the strength required is less than that developed by a
continuous fillet weld of the smallest permitted size, and to join components of built-up members.
The effective length of each weld shall be not less than four times the throat thickness of the weld,
with a minimum of 40 mm.

Z VI 2452.8 Requirements applicable to end returns

Side or end fillet welds terminating at ends or sides, respectively, of connected parts shall, as far as
possible, be prolonged beyond the corners of the connected parts for a distance equal to at least
twice the nominal size of the weld.
This requirement is also applicable to welds connecting brackets, beam seats and similar
connections on the plane about which bending moments are applied.

Annex Z VI / 38  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition Subsection Z

Z VI 2452.9 Fillet welds in holes and slots

Fillet welds in holes and slots may be used to transmit shear in lap joints or to prevent the buckling
or at least separation of lapped parts. They may also be used to join components of built-up
members.
These types of weld shall not be considered as plug or slot welds.

Z VI 2453 Plug and slot welds

Z VI 2453.1 Conditions of use
Plug and slot welds may be used to transmit shear in a lap joint, to prevent buckling of lapped
parts or to join component parts of built-up members.

Z VI 2453.2 Diameter of holes for plug welds

The diameter of the holes for a plug weld shall be not less than the thickness of the part containing
it plus 8 mm (rounded up to the next mm), nor shall it be greater than 2.25 times the thickness of
the weld.

Z VI 2453.3 Rules for the spacing of plug welds

The minimum centre to centre spacing of plug welds shall be at least four times the diameter of
the holes.

Z VI 2453.4 Length of slot welds

The length of slot for a slot weld shall not exceed 10 times the thickness of the weld.
The width of the slot shall be not less than the thickness of the part containing it plus 8 mm
(rounded up to the next mm), nor shall it be greater than 2.25 times the thickness of the weld.
The ends of the slot shall be semi-circular or at least have their corners rounded to a radius not less
than the thickness of the part containing it. This requirement obviously is not applicable if the ends
of the slot extend to the edge of the part (on the side containing the slot).

Z VI 2453.5 Rules relating to the spacing of slot welds

The minimum spacing of lines of slot welds in a direction transverse to their length shall not be
less than four times the width of these welds.
The minimum centre to centre spacing of lines of slot welds in a longitudinal direction shall not be
less than twice the length of these welds.

 n° 137-2012 Annex Z VI / 39
RCC-M - 2012 Edition Subsection Z

Z VI 2453.6 Thickness of plug and slot welds

The thickness of plug and slot welds in parts 16 mm or less in thickness, shall be equal to the
thickness of these parts.
If these parts are thicker than 16 mm, the thickness of welds shall not be less than half the
thickness of parts, with a minimum of 16 mm.

Z VI 2453.7 Effective area of plug and slot welds

The effective area of plug and slot welds considered as participating in the shear strength of the
joint shall be equal to the cross-sectional area of the hole or slot in the plane of the faying surface
of the connected parts.

Z VI 2454 Groove welded joints

In computing the mechanical strength of groove welds, the effective area shall be the product of
the effective length of the weld times the effective throat thickness.
a) The effective length of groove welds shall be taken as the width of the connected parts,
perpendicular to the direction of stress.
The same effective length shall therefore be attributed to welds oriented differently with respect
to the direction of stress.

b) The effective throat thickness of full penetration welds, shall be taken as the thickness of the
thinner of the connected parts. No account shall be taken of increase for weld reinforcement.

c) The effective throat thickness of partial penetration welds shall be taken as the distance to the
face of the weld from the minimum point of penetration of the weld metal in the base metal at
the edge of the interval separating two parts. No account shall be taken of convex
configurations.
The throat thickness shall not be less than the value 3 (t1)1/3 where t1 is thickness in mm of the
thicker of the parts joined.

Z VI 2460 REQUIREMENTS APPLICABLE TO BOLTED JOINTS

Z VI 2461 Allowable stresses
Z VI 2461.1 General
Allowable tensile, shear and bending stresses in bolts and threaded parts are specified in the
paragraphs below.
The stress limits are applicable to the stress values acting on the actual bolt area available in the
plane or planes under stress of the part in question. They are expressed in terms of the ultimate
tensile strength at temperature (see Z VI 1200).

Annex Z VI / 40  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition Subsection Z

Z VI 2461.2 Limitation of tensile stress only

a) The average tensile stress in bolts and threaded parts loaded in tension shall be limited to the
following value for Ftb, independent of initial tightening force.
1) for ferritic steels:
Ftb = 0.5 Su

2) for austenitic steels:

Ftb = 0.3 Su
where Su is the ultimate tensile strength at temperature.
The tensile stresses shall be the sum of applied external loads, and any tension resulting from
the deformation of the connected parts.

b) The stress Ftp due to the pre-stress load shall be limited to the following value:
Ftp  0.90 Sy

Z VI 2461.3 Limitation of shearing stress only

The shear stress in bolts and threaded parts shall be limited to the following value for Fvb:
a) for ferritic steels:
5 Su
Fvb 
24
b) for austenitic steels:
Su
Fvb 
8
where Su is the ultimate tensile strength at temperature.

Z VI 2461.4 Combined tensile and shear stresses

The tensile and shear stresses in bolts subjected to combined shear and tension shall satisfy the
following equation:
f t2 f v2
 1
F 2tb F 2vb

where:
ft = computed tensile stess,
fv = computed shear stress,

 n° 137-2012 Annex Z VI / 41
RCC-M - 2012 Edition Subsection Z

Ftb = allowable tensile stress at temperature,

Fvb = allowable shear stress at temperature.

The allowable stress values Ftb and Fvb are obtained by application of paragraphs Z VI 2461.2
and Z VI 2461.3.

Z VI 2461.5 Friction type joints

The friction coefficients adopted in justifying the use of friction type joints shall be justified
appropriately.

As a guide, if no faying surface preparation other than brushing is carried out, all construction
steels can be designed on the basis of a friction coefficient of 0.30. If appropriate faying surface
preparation is carried out for carbon steels, a friction coefficient of 0.45 may be adopted.

Bolts made of austenitic steels shall not be used in friction type joints.

Z VI 2461.6 Limitation of bearing stress

The bearing stress on the projected area obtained by multiplying the diameter of the rod by the
thickness of the part shall not exceed the following value for Fp:

L Su
Fp  min 2d
1.5 Su
where:
Su = ultimate tensile strength at temperature of connected parts.
L = distance from centre of bolt to edge of connected part in the direction of loading.
d = nominal diameter of bolt.

Z VI 2462 Minimum distances between bolts and free edges

of connected parts
The minimum distance from the centre of the bolt to the nearest edge of the connected part, in the
direction in which the load is delivered to the part, shall satisfy requirements a) or b) below:

a) All three criteria below shall be satisfied:

1) L/d  0.5 + 1.43 (fp/Su)
2) L/d  1.2

Annex Z VI / 42  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition Subsection Z

3) fp/Su  1.5
where:
L = minimum distance from centre of bolt to nearest edge of connected part.
d = nominal diameter of bolt.

t = thickness of the connected part.

fp = nominal bearing stress = P/dt.
P = bearing load transmitted by the fastener.
Su = specified minimum ultimate tensile strength at temperature of the material.

b) The longitudinal distance shall be at least 1.75 times the nominal diameter of the bolt in the
case of shear edges and 1.25 times the diameter in other cases.

Z VI 2463 Maximum distance between bolt and edge of connected part

The distance from the centre of the bolt to the nearest edge of the connected parts shall satisfy
requirements a) or b) below:
a) Where bolts have a maximum diameter of 75 mm, this distance shall not exceed 12 times the
thickness of the part in question, or 150 mm.
b) Where bolts have a diameter greater than 75 mm, this distance shall not exceed twice the bolt
diameter.

Z VI 2464 Minimum spacing of bolts

It is recommended that the minimum distance between centres of bolts should be at least three
times the nominal bolt diameter.
A shorter distance may only be used on condition that sufficient space is left to tighten the bolts at
the time of assembly.

Z VI 2465 Special rules for anchor bolts

Anchor bolts shall be designed to resist all predictable conditions of tension and shear at the base
of columns, including the tensile components of any bending moments which may result from
fixation of columns. The stress limits given in Z VI 2461.2 to Z VI 2461.4 are applicable to anchor
bolts.

 n° 137-2012 Annex Z VI / 43
RCC-M - 2012 Edition Subsection Z

Z VI 2470 SPECIAL RULES APPLICABLE TO COLUMN OR PILLAR BASES

Z VI 2471 Transfer of loads and moments
Appropriate provision shall be made to ensure that the column loads and moments are properly
transferred to the footings and foundations.

Z VI 2472 Alignment
Column bases shall be set level and to correct elevation. They shall also allow full bearing on the
masonry.

Z VI 2473 Finishing of bearing surfaces

a) It is not necessary to straighten or mill the bottom bearing surfaces of bearing plates or column
bases if they are sealed in concrete to ensure full bearing on the foundations.

b) Unsealed bearing plates in rolled steel measuring 50 mm in thickness or less may be used
without prior straightening, provided satisfactory contact of the bearing plates is obtained.

c) For cases other than covered by a) and b) above, the bearing surfaces of columns bases or
bearing plates shall be straightened or milled in accordance with the following provisions:
- Bearing plates in rolled steel whose thickness is between 50 and 100 mm may be
straightened by pressing or their bearing surfaces milled.
- For bearing plates in rolled steel whose thickness is greater than 100 mm, or column bases
other than those made from rolled plate, straightening shall be obtained by surfacing of the
bearing faces.

Z VI 3000 LIMIT ANALYSIS

Z VI 3100 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

a) Supports or support members may be designed by limit analysis. If so, the computed limit load
shall be equal to or greater than:
- the products of 1.7 times the loads associated with conditions for which compliance with
level 0, A and B criteria is required,
- the products of 1.3 times the loads associated with conditions for which compliance with
level C criteria is required,

Annex Z VI / 44  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition Subsection Z

- the products of 1.1 times the loads associated with conditions for which compliance with
level D criteria is required.
For members subject to buckling, these factors are increased to 1.7; 1.5; 1.5.

b) When limit analysis is used as a basis for design, the provisions relating to stress limitation
given in Z VI 2000 are not applicable. However, the provisions of Z VI 2000 other than those
relating to stress limitation remain applicable.

c) The specific design rules applicable where limit analysis is used are currently being drawn up.
Until these provisions have been incorporated in this Code, the provisions adopted shall be
properly justified, particularly provisions adopted at joints.

 n° 137-2012 Annex Z VI / 45
RCC-M - 2012 Edition Subsection Z

Ft = tensile stress normal to the plane of rolling at the faying surface between the weld and
the part
P = applied load
Sy = yield strength of the material
Su = ultimate tensile strength of the material

FIGURE Z VI 2212
LAMELLAR TEARING REQUIREMENTS

Annex Z VI / 46  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition Subsection Z

FIGURE Z VI 2217.3

BEARING SURFACES ON THE CIVIL WORKS

 n° 137-2012 Annex Z VI / 47
RCC-M - 2012 Edition Subsection Z

(1) The width b of built-up members is measured between the free edge and the weld or the first line of
fasteners (examples (h) and (j)).

(2) In the case of L or U shaped rolled members or the stem of tees, b shall be taken as the nominal width of
the shape (examples (a), (b), (c), (d)).

In the case of the flanges of I shaped members or tees, b shall be taken as half the width of the shape
(sketches (f), (g)).

(3) The thickness t of flanges of variable thickness shall be measured at mid-distance between the free edge
and the surface of the web (sketch (k)).

FIGURE Z VI 2224.1

GEOMETRICAL CONDITIONS APPLICABLE

TO MEMBERS WITH A FREE EDGE

Annex Z VI / 48  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition Subsection Z

Note: The width b is measured between lines of fasteners (examples (c), (e) and (h)) or lines of welds which are
closest together or, in the case of rolled shapes, between stiffener elements, as indicated in examples (d),
(f) and (g).

FIGURE Z VI 2224.2

GEOMETRICAL CONDITIONS APPLICABLE TO MEMBERS

WITH STIFFENED EDGES

 n° 137-2012 Annex Z VI / 49
RCC-M - 2012 Edition Subsection Z

: alignment under consideration.

g = distance between centres of successive holes, measured normal to the direction of stress.

s = distance between centres of successive holes, measured in the direction of stress.

FIGURE Z VI 2243

DEFINITION OF MAGNITUDES s AND g

Annex Z VI / 50  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition Subsection Z

TABLE Z VI 2330

 n° 137-2012 Annex Z VI / 51
RCC-M - 2012 Edition Subsection Z

TABLE Z VI 2330 (Cont. 2)

Annex Z VI / 52  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition Subsection Z

TABLE Z VI 2330 (Cont. 3)

 n° 137-2012 Annex Z VI / 53
RCC-M - 2012 Edition Subsection Z

FIGURE Z VI 2330

ILLUSTRATIVE EXAMPLES OF THE CONFIGURATIONS DEALT

WITH IN TABLE Z VI 2330

Annex Z VI / 54  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition Subsection Z

FIGURE Z VI 2330 (Cont.)

ILLUSTRATIVE EXAMPLES OF THE CONFIGURATIONS DEALT

WITH IN TABLE Z VI 2330

 n° 137-2012 Annex Z VI / 55
RCC-M - 2012 Edition Subsection Z

TABLE Z VI 2340

ALLOWABLE STRESS RANGE FSR

(expressed in MPa)

Stress category EQUIVALENT NUMBER OF CYCLES N DETERMINED

obtained by BY APPLYING Z VI 2320
applying > 20.000 > 100.000 > 500.000
table Z VI 2330  20.000 > 2.000.000
 100.000  500.000  2.000.000
A 275 220 165 165
B No particular 230 175 120 105
C requirement 195 145 95 85
with respect
D to stress 165 120 70 62
E range 120 85 50 42
F limitation 120 95 75 62
G 105 85 62 55

FIGURE Z VI 2422

EXAMPLE OF CONNECTION FOR RESTRAINED MEMBER

Annex Z VI / 56  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition Subsection Z

ANNEX Z A

RULES FOR DETERMINING REINFORCEMENTS

OF OPENINGS IN CLASS 1 VESSELS

Z A 100 GENERAL RULE FOR

CORROSION ALLOWANCE

For the design of opening reinforcements (determination of the area required, the reinforcement
limits and the areas contributing to the reinforcement) any dimensions measured from surfaces
susceptible to corrosion from the fluid with which they are in contact must take into account the
corroded state, i.e. supposing the surplus of metal for corrosion allowance or possible weld cladding
being removed. If the vessel wall material is subject to corrosion, it is advisable to use a sketch,
dimensioned in the corroded state.
Similarly, where the final dimensions of the as-finished material are not known, the most pessimistic
manufacturing tolerances shall be adopted, in particular for the diameter of the finished opening and
for the thickness of metal contributing to reinforcement.

Z A 200 REQUIREMENTS APPLICABLE TO

REINFORCEMENT OF OPENINGS

Z A 210 OPENINGS IN SHELLS AND FORMED HEADS

Total required reinforcement area A in any plane normal to the vessel surface and passing through
the centre of the opening, for a vessel under internal pressure, shall not be less than:
A = dtrF
where:
d = diameter of the finished opening, in the plane considered.
F = factor enabling to take into account the stress variation due to pressure depending on the
orientation of the meridian section with respect to the reference plane defined by the shell
and nozzle axes. This factor is only used for integral type reinforced openings and its value is
defined in figure C 3233.1. In all other cases F1 = 1.
Integral type reinforced openings are characterised by the insertion of a monoblock butt- or
full-penetration fillet welded to the shell wall. Parts placed on the shell wall, then welded in
such a way that some sections are not attached to it, are not considered to be of the
integral type.

 n° 137-2012 Annex ZA / 1
RCC-M - 2012 Edition Subsection Z

tr = thickness, such that the limits of B 3233.1 applicable to primary stresses are complied with,
assuming that there is no opening.
Reinforcement material shall be distributed around the nozzle in such a way that, in any plane
through the nozzle axis, the reinforcement area on either side of this axis shall not be less than value
A/2 calculated for this plane.

Z A 220 REQUIREMENTS APPLICABLE TO REINFORCEMENT

OF OPENINGS IN FLAT HEADS
Flat heads with openings not exceeding half the head diameter shall have a reinforcement section
whose area shall not be less than:
A = 0.5 dtr
where:
d = diameter of the finished opening, in the plane considered.
tr = thickness such that the limits stipulated in B 3233.1 and B 3233.3 applicable to primary
membrane and bending stresses are respected, assuming that there is no opening.

Z A 300 REINFORCEMENT LIMITS

The boundaries of the area defined in any plane passing through the axis of the opening in which the
additional material thickness may be considered as having a reinforcing function are the
reinforcement limits for this plane.

These limits are given in paragraphs Z A 310 and Z A 320 below.

Z A 310 REINFORCEMENT LIMITS ALONG VESSEL WALL

a) Reinforcement limits are measured along the mid-surface of the vessel which is assumed to be of
nominal thickness. These limits shall be located on either side of the opening axis at a distance
equal to the greater of the two following values:
1) the diameter of the finished opening,
2) the sum: finished opening radius + vessel wall thickness + nozzle wall thickness.

b) In addition, two thirds of the required reinforcement shall be located in a zone between the
nozzle axis and a cylinder with the same axis and a radius equal to the greater of the following
values:

- r + 0.5 Rt

Annex ZA / 2  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition Subsection Z

where: R is the average radius of the shell or of the head,

t is the nominal thickness of the vessel wall,
r is the finished opening radius.
- the sum: finished opening radius + 2/3 of the vessel wall thickness + 2/3 of the nozzle wall
thickness.

Z A 320 REINFORCEMENT LIMITS NORMAL TO

THE VESSEL WALL
The reinforcement limits, measured normal to the vessel wall are located at a distance LN from the
vessel wall as defined in the following paragraphs a) and b), the various notations being listed in
figure ZA 320.1.
a) For type (a), (b) and (e) nozzles in figure Z A 320.1, distance LN, is equal to:

0,5 rm t n  0.5 r2

where:
rm = average radius of the nozzle = ri + 0.5 tn
ri = inside radius of the nozzle
tn = nominal thickness of the nozzle
r2 = radius of the connection between the nozzle and the vessel wall.
In the case of nozzles having tapered inside surfaces, the reinforcement limit shall be determined
using ri and tn values in compliance with sketch (e) of figure Z A 320.1.

b) For type (c) and (f) nozzles of figure Z A 320.1, distance LN is equal to:

0.5 rm t n

where:
rm = ri + 0.5 tn
ri = inside radius of the nozzle
tn = tp + 0.667 X
tp = nominal thickness of the attached pipe
X = slope offset distance, measured along the vessel wall, at the outside surface
(see sketches to ZA 320 (c)).
 = angle between vertical and slope ( 45°).
In the case of nozzles with tapered inside surfaces, the reinforcement limits shall be determined
using ri and tn values defined at the centre of gravity of the reinforcement area as illustrated in
figure ZA 320.1, sketch (f). These values shall be determined by successive approximations.

 n° 137-2012 Annex ZA / 3
RCC-M - 2012 Edition Subsection Z

Z A 400 METAL AVAILABLE

FOR REINFORCEMENT

Metal may be counted as contributing to reinforcement required in Z A 210, provided it is located

inside the reinforcement limits specified in Z A 300, and provided it is in parts covered in a), b), c)
below, and it complies with requirements d), e), f) below:

a) material which forms part of the vessel wall and is in excess of the requirements of B 3233.1
relative to the limitation of the primary membrane stress intensity,

b) material which is in the thickness of the nozzle and is in excess of the requirements of B 3233.1
relative to the limitation of the primary membrane stress intensity if this nozzle is in an integral
part of the vessel wall, or if it is connected to it by a full penetration weld,

c) weld metal which is fully continuous with the vessel wall,

d) the average coefficient of thermal expansion of the metal contributing to the reinforcement under
subparagraphs b) and c) shall be within 15% of the value of the vessel wall material,

e) metal not fully continuous with the shell shall not be considered as contributing to reinforcement.
This is true for partial penetration welded nozzles in particular,

f) material contributing to the reinforcement of one opening shall not be considered as applying to
another opening.

Z A 500 STRENGTH OF THE

REINFORCING MATERIAL

Material in the nozzle wall used for the reinforcement shall preferably be the same as that of the
vessel wall. If the allowable basic stress intensity Sm of the material used for reinforcement is less
than that for the vessel wall, the corresponding metal section shall, before being counted in the
reinforcement section calculation, be reduced in proportion to the following ratio:
Allowable basic stress intensity of the reinforcement metal
Allowable basic stress intensity of the metal constituting the vesselwall

On the other hand, if the allowable basic stress intensity of the nozzle material and weld metal is
greater than that of the material constituting the vessel wall, this difference shall not be taken into
account in evaluating the reinforcement section. In addition, the strength of the material at the point
under consideration shall be used in fatigue analyses.

Annex ZA / 4  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition Subsection Z

FIGURE Z A 210.1

CURVE FOR DETERMINING THE VALUE OF:

F = (1 + cos2 ) / 2 = 1 – (sin2 ) / 2

 n° 137-2012 Annex ZA / 5
RCC-M - 2012 Edition Subsection Z

FIGURE Z A 320.1

NOZZLES: NOMENCLATURE USED

Annex ZA / 6  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition Subsection Z

ANNEX Z D

ANALYSIS OF THE FATIGUE BEHAVIOUR

OF ZONES WITH GEOMETRIC
DISCONTINUITIES

Z D 1000 INTRODUCTION

This annex, referred to in paragraph B 3234.7, concerns the acceptable rules for analyzing fatigue
behaviour in zones with geometrical discontinuities similar to crack-type discontinuities.

The rules in this annex are based upon the standard method in which a magnitude is determined: this
magnitude is compared with a criterion, and used to calculate an allowable number of cycles before
the appearance of fatigue damage, (i.e. before fatigue crack initiation). This magnitude is designated
the initiation factor.

These rules form a part of the elastic analysis of the material covered in B 3230. As specified in
B 3244.b), it is also acceptable to use the experimental analysis rules of annex Z II *.

* It is also acceptable to determine experimentally discontinuity related "effective concentration" factors or

fatigue strength reduction factors which may later be used in an elastic fatigue analysis.

Z D 2000 METHOD OF ANALYSIS USING CALCULATED

STRESSES AT A CHARACTERISTIC DISTANCE d
FROM THE DISCONTINUITY

Z D 2100 GENERAL
Given the stress range in the structure to be analyzed at distance d from the discontinuity, it is
possible to determine the allowable number of cycles for the operating condition under
consideration.
The method of analysis is described in Z D 2200 and the fatigue curves for this method are
presented in Z D 2300.

An alternative approach is also presented in paragraph Z D 3000 which allows the S-N curves given
in annex Z I to be used.

 n° 137-2012 Annex Z D / 1
RCC-M - 2012 Edition Subsection Z

Z D 2200 PROCEDURE
Z D 2210 DEFINITIONS
The terms used in Z D 2220 have the following meaning (cf. Figure Z D 2200):
d : distance to the tip of discontinuity (considered as a crack),
r : radial direction of the polar coordinates, characterized by , the angle between the radial
direction and the crack plane,
 : angle between the radial direction and the crack plane,
t : direction perpendicular to r in the plane of rotation,
z : direction perpendicular to the plane of rotation and tangential to the front of the crack with
which the discontinuity is comparable,
t (d) : stress calculated at distance d, in the direction normal to the radial direction,
n : number of specified occurrences,
N : number of allowable occurrences,
U : fatigue initiation factor.

Z D 2220 EVALUATION METHOD FOR THE FATIGUE

INITIATION FACTOR
The following procedure shall be used:

a) The stress state at a distance d around the tip of the discontinuity (considered as a crack) is
determined using an elastic analysis (1). This distance d is a material constant.

The distance d to be considered is thus specified in each of the initiation curves referred to
in Z D 2300(2).

This stress state is expressed in a set of local polar coordinates whose origin is the crack tip in
compliance with figure Z D 2200.

b) For each value of  used, the procedure in 1) to 8) below is applied.

1) For the value of  considered and for each condition analyzed, the variation of t at the point
located at distance d from the crack tip is determined.

2) For each condition, the extreme values of t are selected and each of these values is assigned
the number of occurrences np of the condition p under consideration. The extreme values
corresponding to the sub-cycles shall be considered in this procedure.

(1) Where finite element programs are used, this method requires special precautions because stresses must be precisely
determined in very small regions in the vicinity of a discontinuity.

In mode I, the σ can be calculated from K as per formula:   

K
where K is the variation amplitude of the stress intensity factor. 2d

(2) For austenitic and austenitic-ferritic stainless steels, this value is approximately equal to 0.06 mm.

Annex Z D / 2  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition Subsection Z

A set of t values with their number of occurrences is obtained at the end of this step.

3) For any combination of 2 values t (k) and t (l) taken from the set of the extreme values of
t there is a variation amplitude t (k, l) determined as follows:
t (k, l) = t (k) - t (l) 
A number of occurrences nkl is associate with each pair (k, l) so that:
nkl = min {nk , nl }

4) The maximum t (m, n) value is determined for the set of t (k, l) whose associated
number of occurrences nkl is not zero. It is corrected to take into account the plasticity*.

5) The value t (m, n) is introduced into the fatigue curves  = f (N) referred to in Z D 2300
after correction of the ratio R according to the following rule:
 (d) min  (d)
if R   , then:   (d) eff  
 (d) max R
1
2

These fatigue curves give the number of cycles Nmn which would be acceptable if the type of
cycle considered were unique.
The initiation factor due to t (m, n) is equal to:
n
U mn  mn
N mn
6) After accounting for the combination t (m, n), a new set of extreme values for t is
established by correcting the number of occurrences as follows:
nm = nm - nmn
nn = nn - nmn

7) The procedure is repeated from 3) until the number of occurrences associated with any
extreme value of t is zero.

8) The cumulative initiation factor associated with the value of  under consideration is then
equal to the sum of the initiation factors determined by applying procedure 1) to 7) above.

c) The procedure presented in b) above is repeated for each value of  used.

d) The initiation factors thus determined shall be less than or equal to 1.0.

*: The correction applied can be limited to 1.15 by default.

 n° 137-2012 Annex Z D / 3
RCC-M - 2012 Edition Subsection Z

Z D 2300 INITIATION CURVES

The initiation curves used in the procedure described in Z D 2200 are determined by correlating the
number of cycles obtained in fatigue experiments which is required to induce propagation of the
crack and the stress range determined by elastic analysis at distance d from the initial crack tip in the
test specimen used in these experiments.
The curves given in Table Z D 2300 can be used if no other data are available.
Furthermore, the curves which integrate a small propagation can be used as an alternative to the
initiation laws in the strict sense of the meaning. They will be substantiated on a case by case basis
and the designer shall provide a guarantee that the propagation under consideration does not affect
the original design.

Z D 3000 USE OF THE S-N CURVES

IN ANNEX Z I

The permissible number of cycles can also be determined by calculating the local strain  as
follows:

- Evaluation of the product . with the following formula: . ( d ) 

 t ( m , n )  2
E
- Determination of the  corresponding to the product ., using the cyclic strain hardening
curve for the material (or a simplified low envelope of this curve), giving the relationship
between . and the strain amplitude (1).

- Evaluation of the allowable number of cycles using the S-N fatigue curves in annex ZI and using
E 
the relationship: Sa  .
3

(1) Until these curves are not integrated in the code, the curves used must be substantiated on a case by case basis.

Annex Z D / 4  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition Subsection Z

FIGURE Z D 2200
ANALYSIS OF DISCONTINUITIES:
NOMENCLATURE

MATERIAL ENVIRONMENT DISTANCE d CURVE

Low-alloy steel,
AIR and PWR 0.05 mm t = 5450(Na) -0.172
type 16MND5

Stainless steel AIR and PWR 0.059 mm t = 9460(Na) -0.246

Ni-Cr-Fe alloy
AIR and PWR 0.046 mm t = 7090(Na) -0.182
(inconel)

TABLE Z D 2300

INITIATION CURVES

 n° 137-2012 Annex Z D / 5
RCC-M - 2012 Edition Subsection Z

Annex Z D / 6  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition Subsection Z

ANNEX Z E

OTHER RULES ACCEPTABLE FOR ANALYZING

CLASS 1 PIPING UNDER CONDITIONS REQUIRING
COMPLIANCE WITH LEVEL A CRITERIA

Z E 100 GENERAL

Z E 110 ACCEPTABILITY OF THE ANALYSIS

The rules in Z E 200 or in Z E 300 may be substituted for the requirements laid down in B 3653.
The general requirements stipulated in B 3653.1 are applicable.

Z E 120 GENERAL PRINCIPLES

Z E 121 REVIEW OF THE SIMPLIFIED METHOD
Subparagraph B 3653 describes a simplified method for analyzing piping under conditions requiring
compliance with level A criteria. Each condition is thus the subject of a simplified analysis, and for
each condition all loads are dealt with using a simplified method, in compliance with the rules
of B 3653.

Z E 122 MIXED METHOD

The method described in Z E 200 introduces two additional approaches not included in the
simplified method:
- in the mechanical analysis of the component performed for a given condition, certain loads may
be subjected to partial detailed analyses, conducted in accordance with the general provisions of
B 3234. This type of analysis is then called a mixed analysis,
- different methods of analysis may be used for various conditions, since certain conditions,
generally the most severe, may be studied using a mixed analysis, while other conditions are
analyzed in compliance with B 3653.

Z E 123 ALTERNATIVE SIMPLIFIED METHOD

The method presented in Z E 300 is an adaptation of the simplified method described in
subparagraph B 3653. In this method, another procedure than that described in B 3653.2 is used to
approximate the Sx (i, j) function of B 3653.2, which may or may not be an envelope function.
Slightly different definitions of thermal terms are employed in this method.

 n° 137-2012 Annex Z E / 1
RCC-M - 2012 Edition Subsection Z

Z E 200 MIXED ANALYSIS METHOD

Z E 210 BASIC ASSUMPTIONS AND REQUIREMENTS

The rules of this paragraph combine:
- the simplified stress calculation rules of B 3653,
- the results of partial analyses performed in accordance with the general provisions of B 3234.
The stress ranges considered between instants i and j are represented by Sx (i, j), function specific to
paragraphs Z E 230, Z E 240 and Z E 250. Any Sx (i, j) function may include terms obtained from
the partial analyses mentioned above.
The stress range Sx (i, j) at the point considered * is equal to the sum of the partial amplitudes
S'x (i, j) and S"x (i, j) where:
- S'x (i, j) is derived from data obtained in a detailed analysis,
S'x (i, j) is determined from the tensor equal to the difference between the two stress tensors
associated with instants i and j, relative to the criterion to be met by taking the maximum
absolute value of the three principle stress differences determined from this tensor, in accordance
with the rules of B 3232.1:
When a welded joint is located in the analyzed zone or at the boundary thereof, a correction shall
be made in accordance with the rules of Z E 215, unless justification is provided.
- S"x (i, j) is derived from data obtained in a simplified analysis, S"x (i, j) is defined in paragraphs
Z E 230.a).2), Z E 240.a).2) and Z E 250.c.2).
The analysis is performed in two steps:
a) load sets are determined in accordance with Z E 220,

b) load sets thus determined are then combined within the entire set of conditions, using a procedure
specific to the individual criterion to be met.
* Generally, the data obtained in the simplified analysis is relative to one zone (all or part of a nozzle, an elbow, etc.)
considered globally. Detailed analyses are performed on carefully selected sections (or points) of this zone.
Therefore, the combinations given here are to be performed for all sections (or points) studied in the detailed
analysis, and the term S"x for a given zone obtained in a simplified analysis, shall be considered for all sections (or
points) belonging to this zone.

Z E 215 CORRECTION OF THE DETAILED ANALYSIS RESULTS

The results obtained by detailed analysis are corrected using the following procedures, when, in this
zone or at its boundary, there is a welded joint whose geometry is not taken into account in this
detailed analysis:
- misalignment,
- weld bead,
- nominal thickness tolerance.

Annex Z E / 2  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition Subsection Z

a) Analysis of primary plus secondary stresses

For each loading covered by the detailed analysis, the sum of the primary and secondary stresses
(or their stress range) is assigned a correction factor before being used in the formulae in
this annex.
This factor x is equal to the ratio of the stress indices given in B 3680, corresponding to this
loading (C1, C2 or C3).
The numerator index takes account of misalignment, the denominator index is calculated with a
nil misalignment.
The limits on the values of these indices shall be respected. Certain indices are not affected by
misalignment. In this case, no correction need be applied.

b) Analysis of total stress

For each loading calculated by detailed analysis, the total stress (or its range) used in Z E 240
shall be evaluated using the following formula:
S'T = S'T.C. + (Ki i – 1) S'L.C.
where:
S'T = Total stress (or its range) relating to the load concerned.
S'T.C = Total calculated stress (or its range) for the load concerned.
S'L.C = Uncorrected, calculated linear stress (or its range) for the load concerned.
Ki = Welded joint related stress index K1, K2 or K3 of B 3680, according to the type of load
concerned.
i = Correction factor of the linearised primary plus secondary stress resulting from the
detailed analysis as defined in a) above.

Z E 220 LOAD SET SELECTION

a) For any condition to be subjected to a simplified analysis in accordance with the provisions of
B 3653, the load sets are selected within each condition in accordance with the general rules
of B 3653.2.

b) For any condition to be subjected to a detailed partial analysis, certain points in time are
selected: in general, all points in time at which the loading on the zone analyzed is significant.
The extremes associated with sub-cycles are considered as fully significant points in time.
All conditions are thus examined and a list of points in time is established. Each point in time is
characterized by a tensor of total stresses, a tensor of linearised stresses, and the values of the
parameters used to determine the S"x (i, j) functions.

 n° 137-2012 Annex Z E / 3
RCC-M - 2012 Edition Subsection Z

Z E 230 REQUIREMENTS APPLICABLE TO RANGES

OF THE SUM OF THE PRIMARY AND
SECONDARY STRESSES
a) The requirements of B 3653.3.a) are supplemented by the following provisions:
1) if the two load sets i and j, for which Sn (i, j) is determined, belong to one or two conditions
subjected to a simplified analysis, Sn (i, j) is obtained using equation (10) of B 3653.3.a),

2) if the two load sets or instants i and j belong to the conditions p and q, respectively, and p and
q are subject to a detailed partial analysis (p and q, may be different or identical).
Sn (i, j) = S'n (i, j) + S"n (i, j)  3 Sm (10')

3) if both load cases i and j belong respectively to 2 conditions analyzed, one (1) in partial
detailed analysis and the other (j) in simplified analysis,
Sn (i, j) = S'n (i, o) + S"n (o, j) + S"n (i, j)  3 Sm (10")
where the terms S'n (i, o) and S"n (o, j) contain the stresses calculated by partial detailed
analysis and simplified analysis, respectively, for the same loading and S"n (i, j) is related to
loads subject to simplified analysis for each of the two load sets i and j concerned.

b) If equation 10 (10, 10' 10") cannot be satisfied for one or several combinations of two states, the
alternative rules of Z E 250 may be used.

c) The notations used in equations (10') and (10") are defined below:
S'n = range of the sum of the primary plus secondary stresses resulting from the partial detailed
analysis and corrected in accordance with Z E 215 a).
S'n is obtained by adding the corrected values for each of the loads considered.
S"n = range of the sum of primary plus secondary stresses resulting from the simplified analysis.
o = state for which all associated tensors are equal to zero.

Z E 240 REQUIREMENTS APPLICABLE

TO TOTAL STRESS RANGE
a) The requirements of B 3653.4 are supplemented by the following provisions:
1) if the two loads sets i, and j for which Sp (i, j) is determined, belong to one or two conditions
subjected to a simplified analysis, Sp (i, j) is provided by equation (11) of B 3653.4.a),

Annex Z E / 4  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition Subsection Z

2) if the two load sets i and j belong to conditions p and q which are subjected to a detailed
partial analysis (p and q may be different or identical):
Sp (i, j) = S'p (i, j) + S"p (i, j) (11')
where:
- if the loads of thermal and pressure origin are subjected to a detailed analysis:
S'p (i, j) = S'ppta (i, j) and :
S"p (i, j) = S"pm (i, j) = K2C2DoMi (i, j)/2 I
- if only thermal loads are subjected to this type of analysis:
S'p (i, j) = S'pta (i, j) and :
S"p (i, j) = S"ppm (i, j) = [ K1C1DoPo (i, j) ] /2t + S"pm (i, j)

3) if the two load sets i and j belong to two conditions, one subjected to a detailed partial
analysis and the other to a simplified analysis, respectively, only the thermal part of the
detailed analysis is used:
Sp (i, j) = [S'p (i, o) + S"p (o, j) ]+ S"p (i, j) (11")
where the terms S'p (i, o) and S"p (o, j) contain the stresses calculated by partial detailed
analysis and simplified analysis respectively, for the same loads and S"p (i, j) is related to
loads subject to simplified analysis for each of the two sets i and j concerned.

b) The nomenclature used in equations (11') and (11") are defined below:
S'p = range of the total stresses resulting from the partial detailed analysis and corrected in
accordance with Z E 215 b). S'p is obtained by adding the corrected values for each of the
loads considered.
S"p = range of the total stresses resulting from the simplified analysis.
o = state for which all associated tensors are equal to zero.

Z E 250 SIMPLIFIED ELASTOPLASTIC ANALYSIS

a) If equation (10) cannot be satisfied for a combination of two load sets i and j selected in
accordance with Z E 220, equation (12) and (13) shall be satisfied for this combination.

b) The requirements of B 3653.5.b) relative to thermal expansion stress range are applicable.

c) B 3653.5.c) is supplemented by the following provisions.

1) if the two load sets i and j, for which Sq (i, j) is determined: belong to one or two conditions
subjected to a simplified analysis, Sq (i, j) is provided by equation (13) of B 3653.c),
2) if the two load sets i and j belong to conditions p and q which are subjected to a detailed
partial analysis (p and q may be different or identical):
Sq (i, j) = S'q (i, j) + S"q (i, j)  3 Sm (13')

 n° 137-2012 Annex Z E / 5
RCC-M - 2012 Edition Subsection Z

3) if both load sets i and j belong respectively to 2 conditions analyzed, one in partial detailed
analysis and the other in simplified analysis,
Sq (i, j) = S'q (i, o) + S"q (o, j) + S"q (i, j)  3 Sm (13")
where the terms S'q (i, o) and S"q (o, j) contain the stresses calculated by partial detailed
analysis and simplified analysis respectively, for the same loads and S"q (i, j) is related to
loads subject to simplified analysis for each of the two load sets i and j concerned.

d) The terms used in the equations (13') and (13") are defined below:
S'q = range of the linearised primary plus secondary stresses, obtained and corrected in
accordance with Z E 215 a).
S'q is obtained by adding the corrected values for each of the loads considered.
S"q = range of the sum of primary plus secondary stresses obtained by simplified analysis.

Z E 260 PROCEDURE FOR CALCULATING THE USAGE FACTOR

For all conditions requiring compliance with level A criteria, the usage factor may be determined
using the following general procedure:

a) Selection of instants or load sets

Instants or load sets are selected in accordance with Z E 220. Significant times representative of
total and linearised stress variations are selected for all conditions subjected to a detailed
partial analysis.
The number of occurrences np of condition p is associated with each instant or load set k arising
from condition p. The reference of the condition to which the instant or load set belongs
is retained.
The instants capable of maximizing the value Salt covered in d) below, which depends on the
stress range and the division into "mechanical" and "thermal" parts imposed on this range, are
also considered significant within the meaning of this paragraph.

b) Construction of the [Sp] matrix of the amplitudes of total stress differences

The various instants or load sets k and l selected in point a) corresponding to conditions p
and q (p and q may be different or identical) are combined in pairs. The total stress range
between k and l, designated Sp (k, l) is determined in accordance with Z E 240.

Annex Z E / 6  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition Subsection Z

c) Construction of the [Ke] matrix associated with the ranges

of linearised stress differences
An elastoplastic stress correction factor Ke (p, q) determined in accordance with B 3653.6.a).2)
from the linearised stress range Sn (p,q) is assigned to each set of conditions p and q. The
Sn (p, q) range is equal to the largest of the Sn (k, l) ranges determined in accordance with
Z E 230 for any pair of instant or load sets k and l belonging to the pair of the conditions p and q.

d) Construction of the [S'alt ] matrix of the alternating stress intensities

Let instants or load sets k and l belong to situations p and q respectively,
S'alt (k,l) is defined as follows:
S alt (k, l) 
1
2
  
K e mech
pq
S p mech kl  K e ther pq Sp ther kl 
E
S'alt (k, l)  c Salt (k, l)
E
where:
Ec = Modulus of elasticity associated with the fatigue curve applicable to the material.
E = Modulus of elasticity used in calculating the stresses at the point considered.
Sp mech (k,l): range of the mechanical part of the total stress Sp, between the load sets k and l. It
is calculated from the loads of mechanical origin comprising pressure, weight,
earthquake (inertial and movement of anchors), as well as the effect of thermal
expansion.
Ke mech (p,q): elastoplastic stress correction factor for the mechanical part calculated in
compliance with B 3234.6 b, from the maximum range of primary plus secondary
stresses Sn (p,q), calculated in compliance with ZE 230, during situations p and q
to which the load sets k and l belong and the value of Sm defined in B 3234.2.
Sp ther (k,l): range of the thermal part of the total stress Sp, between the load sets k and l. It is
calculated from the loads of thermal origin comprising those of temperature
gradients in the walls and the temperature variations on either side of thickness
and material discontinuities. It is acceptable to take as the value of Sp ther, the
difference between the total Sp and Sp mech adopted above.
Ke ther (p,q): elastoplastic stress correction factor for the thermal part, calculated in the case of
austenitic stainless steels, by the following formula:

 1 
1.86 1  
K e ther  max  1. 66  ( S n / S m ) 

 n° 137-2012 Annex Z E / 7
RCC-M - 2012 Edition Subsection Z

from the maximum range of primary plus secondary stresses Sn (p,q) calculated
in compliance with ZE 230, during situations p and q to which the load sets k
and l belong and the value of Sm defined in B 3653.3.
For ferritic steels, the formula used shall be validated on a case by case basis.
It is acceptable not to impose a mechanical/thermal division but to apply the expression of the
factor Ke mech for correction of the total stress Sp.
An upper limit on the global effect of plastic stress corrections can be introduced if the results of
elastoplastic studies are available, obtained for similar geometric configurations subjected to
envelope transients and loads, increasing the loads and transients taken into account in the
behaviour analyses.

e) Definition of n'p the fictitious number of occurrences associated

with situation p
It is acceptable to consider that two instants or load sets suffice to represent a condition (or a sub-
cycle). Therefore, ensure that the load sets of any condition p are not considered more than a
total of 2 np times and that the number of possible contributions of each load set of p to the usage
factor calculation does not exceed np.
The maximum number of times that condition p load sets may be considered is referred to as the
fictitious number of occurrences associated with condition p and is written n'p. If condition p has
sp sub-cycles:
n'p = 2 (sp + 1)np.

f) Usage factor calculation

1) Let two instants or load sets k and l belong to conditions p and q, respectively, where p and q
may be different or identical. A number of occurrences nkl is assigned to each value S'alt (k, l)
so that:
nkl = min. { nk, nl, n'p, n'q }
where nk is the number of occurrences associated with the time or load set k.

2) The maximum value S'alt (m, n) is selected from the set of S'alt (k, l) whose number of
occurrences nkl is not zero.

3) The value S'alt (m, n) is introduced into the fatigue curves of the figures in Z I 4.0 with the
value Sa = S'alt (m, n) as ordinate.
These fatigue curves give the number of cycles which would be acceptable if only this type of
cycle were considered. Let Nmn be this permissible number of cycles.
The usage factor due to S'alt (m, n) is equal to:
n
U mn  mn
N mn

If Nmn is greater than 106, this usage factor will be zero.

Annex Z E / 8  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition Subsection Z

4) The number of occurrences associated with each time and condition is recalculated as follows,
where instants m and n belong to conditions p and q:
nm = nm - nmn
nn = nn - nmn
n'p = n'p - nmn
n'q = n'q - nmn
If n'p = 0 for example, the number of occurrences nk for any instant or load set k resulting
from condition p will be 0.
5) The procedure is then repeated from point 1) until the fictitious number n'p associated with
any condition p is zero.

g) Calculation of the cumulative usage factor

The cumulative usage factor is equal to the sum of the usage factors determined with the above
procedure. The cumulative usage factor shall be less than 1.

h) Special rules for considering seismic loads

In fatigue analyses, specified seismic loads are considered as follows:
1) let Ns be the number of specified earthquakes and ns be the number of cycles constituting
each of these earthquakes,
2) select the Ns/2 most penalizing combinations of two load sets in accordance with
Z G 260.f).2),
3) for any combination (m, n) selected in accordance with 2) above, there is a unit usage factor u
(m, n) determined as follows:
a) calculate the unit factor u1 (m, n) resulting from the superposition of the range of seismic
induced moments and the combination (m, n). Then detemine S'alt (m, n) in accordance
with Z E 260.d), the terms Sn (p, q) and Sp (m, n) include the seismic term superposed in
accordance with the procedure described in B 3653.3.c).
The unit usage factor u1 (m, n) is equal to 1/N1 (m, n) where N1 (m, n) is the permissible
number of cycles determined by applying the fatigue curves in figures Z I 4.0 where
Sa = S'alt (m, n),
b) determine the usage factor u2 (m, n) resulting from the application of (2ns - 1) seismic
cycles, considered as sub-cycles:
[ S'alt (m, n) ] seismic sub-cycles only =
[EcKe (p, q) K2C2Do (M2S1 + M2S2 + M2S3)1/2 ] / 4IE*
Ke (p, q) is calculated in accordance with B 3653.6.a).2) from the Sn (p, q) range including
the seismic term, given in (a) above,
K2 and are the stress indices given in B 3680 for the component analyzed,

* See B 3683.1 d).

 n° 137-2012 Annex Z E / 9
RCC-M - 2012 Edition Subsection Z

Do and I are defined in B 3653.3,

u2 (m, n) is equal to (2ns - 1)/N2 (m, n) where N2 (m, n) is the permissible number of
cycles determined by applying the fatigue curves determined by applying the fatigue
curves in figures Z l 4.0 where:
Sa = [ S'alt (m, n) ] seismic sub-cycles only.
c) u (m, n) = u1 (m, n) + u2 (m, n)

4) The procedure described in 3) is repeated for the Ns/2 most severe combinations. The
procedure for calculating the usage factor is then continued without considering earthquake
induced stresses.

Z E 270 THERMAL RATCHET

The requirements of B 3653.7 are applicable as supplemented by the following provisions:

a) If the two considered load sets i and j belong to one or two conditions analyzed by means of
simplified analysis, the provisions of B 3653.7 b) to d) are applied without modification.

b) If the two load sets or instants i and j belong to one or two conditions analyzed by means of
detailed partial analysis, one of the following two rules shall be complied with:
1) if thermal and pressure stresses are subjected to detailed analysis, B 3653.7 b) to d) shall be
applied with the following values being adopted for (i, j) and m:
-  (i, j) is the linear thermal bending stress range between states i and j,
- m is the maximum pressure membrane stress during the two conditions from which states
i and j are taken.
2) If only the thermal stresses are subjected to detailed analysis:
-  (i, j) shall be as defined in 1) above
- m shall be as defined in B 3657.7.c).

c) If the two load sets or instants i and j belong to two conditions, one of which (i) is subjected to
detailed partial analysis and the other (j) to simplified analysis, B3653.7 b) to d) shall be applied
with the following values being adopted for  (i, j) and m :
-  (i, j) =  (i, o) +  (o, j)
where:  (i, o) is the linear thermal bending stress range between states i and o.
1
  (o, j)  E T1 (o, j)
2 (1  )

Annex Z E / 10  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition Subsection Z

12  t/2
T1 (o, j) 
2
  t/2 y Tj( y)  dy
t
where:
Tj (y) is defined in accordance with B 3653.4.b).1). j being the state selected to define the load
set considered.
m is defined in accordance with B 3653.7.c).

Z E 300 SIMPLIFIED ALTERNATIVE METHOD

Z E 310 BASIC ASSUMPTIONS AND REQUIREMENTS

Primary plus secondary stress and total stress ranges must remain within permissible limits
whenever going from one system state to another. This transition is represented by a combination of
two loading sets which do not necessarily belong to the same condition.
In this method, the stress ranges between load sets i and j are represented by a specific Gx (i, j)
function for each of the paragraphs Z E 330, Z E 340 and Z E 350. In accordance with B 3653.2 it is
assumed that all pairs of load states corresponding to the set of conditions may be correctly
represented by a group of load sets selected within each condition in accordance with Z E 320.
These load sets are then combined with load sets from the set of conditions using a procedure
specific to the criterion checked.
In this procedure, any sub-cycles are considered as conditions.

Z E 320 LOAD SET SELECTION

For each point in time there is a corresponding component load state characterized by the values of
the following variables at that point in time:
- the service pressure Po,
- the applied moments,
- the thermal variables DT1, DT'2, Ta and Tb defined below:
Let:
t = wall thickness of the piping component under consideration
y = radial position in the thickness, measured from the mid-thickness and considered as
positive toward the outside: - t/2  y  t/2
T(y) = temperature reached at depth y at the time under consideration.
To = T (t/2) = value of T(y) at the outside skin
Ti = T (- t/2) = value of T(y) at the inside skin.

 n° 137-2012 Annex Z E / 11
RCC-M - 2012 Edition Subsection Z

The temperature distribution T(y) can be broken down into three parts as per figure Z E 320.a):
- a constant through the thickness equal to the average value of T(y) through the thickness:
1 1 / 2
T  1 / 2 T( y)  dy
2
T may be used to determine thermal expansion.
The average values for T determined at the time considered in zones a and b whose width is
d a t a and d b t b on either side of a geometric and/or material discontinuity. These values are
designated Ta and Tb respectively,

- a linear distribution with an average value equal to 0 and a variation y given by the following
relationship:
12  t/2
V
2   t/2 y T ( y)  dy
t
Value T1 is equal to the difference in temperature between the outside skin and the inside skin,
where the temperature distribution through the wall is linearised.

- a non-linear distribution, with an average value equal to 0 and a moment of zero in relation to the
neutral axis. The value T'2 corresponds to the non-linear part of the thermal gradient through
the wall-thickness.
T'2 = Ti - T + 1/2 T1
Load sets are selected from each condition using one of the following methods:

a) either by considering the various loads as independent and establishing fictitious load sets from
the set of maximum values or the set of minimum value for the variables Po, Mi, M*, T1, T'2
or (Ta - Tb) of Gx (i, j) function (Fig. Z E 320.b).1) under the condition analyzed.

b) or, in the method presented in a) above, by replacing the extreme values of variables T1, T'2
and (Ta - Tb) by the values for these variables at the times when a G'x function of time, passes
through extreme values (Fig. Z E 320.b).2)), during the condition analyzed. This method may
only be used when the T1, T'2 and (aTa - b Tb) values, thus selected, have the same sign and
the symbol  corresponds to the thinner of the two parts located on either side of the
discontinuity.
To meet equation (10):
G'n = E T1/2 (1 - n) + C3Eab (a Ta - b Tb)
For equation (11):
G'p = K3 E  T1/2 (1 - n) + K3C3Eab (aTa - bTb) - E  T'2/ (1 - n)
When using this method, all parameters and in particular the terms T1 and T2, which
correspond to the thickest parts of the zone analyzed, shall be determined in the most penalizing
fashion possible.

Annex Z E / 12  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition Subsection Z

Z E 330 REQUIREMENTS APPLICABLE TO THE RANGE

OF THE SUM OF THE PRIMARY AND SECONDARY
STRESSES
a) The equation (10) below shall be satisfied by any combination of two load sets i and j, within
each condition, in accordance with Z E 320:
Gn (i, j) = C1Do | Po (i, j) | /2t + C2DoMi (i, j) | /2 I + E  | T1 (i, j) | /2 (1 - ) +
C3Eab | (a Ta - b Tb) (i, j) |  3 Sm (10)

b) If equation (10) cannot be met for one or more combinations of two states, the alternative rules in
Z E 350 may be used.

c) The following are associated with each load set i defined in compliance with Z E 320:
- a service pressure value Po(i),
- a value for applied moments,
- a value for each of the thermal variables T1, Ta and Tb defined in Z E 320.

The symbols used in equation (10) are defined below:

Po (i, j) = Po (i) - Po (j) defined in B 3653.3
Mi (i, j) = defined in B 3653.3
T1 (i, j) = T1 (i) - T1 (j)
(a Ta - bTb) (i, j) = (a Ta - b Tb) (i) - (a Ta - b Tb) (j)
The other symbols are defined in B 3653.3.

Z E 340 REQUIREMENTS CONCERNING

THE TOTAL STRESS RANGE
The value Gp used in determining the usage factor (Z E 360) is defined as follows, for each
combination of two load sets i and j under consideration:
Gp (i, j) = K1C1Do | Po (i, j) | /2t + K2C2Do | Mi (i, j) | /2I + K3E | T1 (i, j) | /2 (1 - ) +
K3C3Eab | (a Ta - b Tb) (i, j) |+ E  | T2 (i, j) | /(1 - ) (11)

where:
T2 (i, j) is determined in accordance with B 3653.4. T2 (i, j) may be replaced by
T'2 (i, j) = T'2(i) - T'2(j) where T'2 is determined in accordance with Z E 320.

The other symbols are defined in Z E 330.

 n° 137-2012 Annex Z E / 13
RCC-M - 2012 Edition Subsection Z

Z E 350 SIMPLIFIED ELASTOPLATIC ANALYSIS

a) When equation (10) of Z E 330 cannot be satisfied for a combination of two load sets i and j,
equations (12) and (13) shall be met for this combination.

b) Requirements concerning thermal expansion stress ranges

Let M* be the moment due to the thermal expansion and to the thermal anchor point movements.
Loads sets i and j determined in compliance with Z E 320 each include an extreme value of M*.
Equation (12) shall be satisfied for each combination (i, j) analyzed:
Ge (i, j) = C2Do|M* (i, j)|/2I < 3 Sm (12)

where:
M* (i, j) = M* (i) - M* (j)

c) Requirements applicable to the range of the sum of primary plus secondary stresses
Equation (13) shall be satisfied for all combinations (i, j) analyzed:
Gq (i, j) = C1Do | Po (i, j) | /2t + C2DoMi/2 I + C'3Eab | (a Ta - b Tb) (i, j) | < 3 Sm (13)

where:
C'3 = coefficient given in B 3683.2 for the component analyzed
Mi = moment Mi defined in B 3652
The other symbols are defined in Z E 330.

Z E 360 PROCEDURE FOR CALCULATION OF THE USAGE FACTOR

a) A Salt (i, j) value is determined for each combination of two load sets i and j obtained in
accordance with Z E 320:

Salt (i, j) 
1
2
K  G p mech ij  K e ther pq G p ther ij 
e mech pq

Gp mech (i, j): range of the mechanical part of the total stress Gp, between the load sets i and j. It
is calculated from the loads of mechanical origin comprising pressure, weight,
earthquake (inertial and movement of anchors), as well as the effect of thermal
expansion.
Ke mech (p,q): elastoplastic stress correction factor for the mechanical part calculated in
compliance with B 3234.6 b, from the maximum range of primary plus secondary
stresses Gn (p,q), calculated in compliance with ZE 330, during situations p and q
to which the load sets i and j belong and the value of Sm defined in B 3653.3.

Annex Z E / 14  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition Subsection Z

Gp ther (i, j): range of the thermal part of the total stress Gp, between the load sets i and j. It is
calculated from the loads of thermal origin comprising those of temperature
gradients in the walls ''Ta - Tb'', ''T1'' and ''T2'' defined in B 3653.3 and B 3653.4
or ''T'2'' defined in ZE 320.
Ke ther (p,q): elastoplastic stress correction factor for the thermal part, calculated in the case of
austenitic stainless steels, by the following formula:

 1 
1.86 1  
K e ther  max  1.66  ( S n / S m ) 

from the maximum range of primary plus secondary stresses Gn (p,q) defined in
ZE 330.a, during situations p and q to which the load sets i and j belong and the
value of Sm defined in B 3653.3.
For ferritic steels, the formula used shall be validated on a case by case basis.
It is acceptable not to impose a mechanical/thermal division but to apply the expression of the
factor Ke mech for correction of the total stress Sp.
An upper limit on the global effect of plastic stress corrections can be introduced if the results of
elastoplastic studies are available, obtained for similar geometric configurations subjected to
envelope transients and loads, increasing the loads and transients taken into account in the
behaviour analyses.

b) Seismic loads are accounted for in accordance with B 3653.6.b), by replacing the reference to
B 3653.6.a) with a reference to Z E 360.a):

Z E 370 THERMAL RATCHET

The requirements of B 3653.7 are applicable, with the requirements of Z E 330 being adopted for
definition of T1 (i, j).

 n° 137-2012 Annex Z E / 15
RCC-M - 2012 Edition Subsection Z

FIGURE Z E 320.a

BREAKDOWN OF THE TEMPERATURE DISTRIBUTION

THROUGH THE WALL THICKNESS

Annex Z E / 16  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition Subsection Z

1 - OPTION : INDEPENDENT LOADS

2 - OPTION : DEPENDENT LOADS

FIGURE Z E 320 b)
EXAMPLES OF VARIOUS PARAMETERS AS A FUNCTION OF
TIMES AND LOAD SET SELECTION

 n° 137-2012 Annex Z E / 17
RCC-M - 2012 Edition Subsection Z

Annex Z E / 18  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition Subsection Z

ANNEX Z F

RULES ASSOCIATED WITH

LEVEL D CRITERIA

Z F 1100 SCOPE

The rules in this annex may be used to analyze the behaviour of components under conditions
requiring compliance with level D criteria.
In its present form, this annex applies to pressure retaining components and to their supports. The
rules for core support structures will be given later.

Z F 1200 PURPOSE

Z F 1210 INTENT OF THE LEVEL D CRITERIA

The rules associated with level D criteria presented in Z F 1300 aim, as specified in B 3144, to
protect components from plastic, elastic or elastoplastic instability. The object of these rules is thus
neither to ensure the satisfactory operation of the components during or after the condition
considered, nor to determine if it is possible to put components back into service (see B 3110).
The rules relative to the evaluation of the component resistance to fast fracture are not covered in
this annex. Resistance to fast fracture is to be evaluated in compliance with the provisions of
B 3260.

Z F 1220 FURTHER PROVISIONS

a) Because of the nature of the conditions usually considered when verifying level D criteria, this
annex includes additional provisions relative to the methods of system analysis and to the need
for consistency between the system analysis and the analysis of the component or component
part.
The result is that, where the rules of this annex are applied, the method of analysis and the
corresponding criteria to be used for the analysis of a specific component or component part shall
be stipulated in the equipment specification taking the method of system analysis employed into
account.

 n° 137-2012 Annex Z F / 1
RCC-M - 2012 Edition Subsection Z

b) As a complement to the provisions of Z F 1210 specifying the nature of the types of damage
covered by the rules of this annex, it should be noted that the zone or component to which rules
shall be applied to meet safety objectives is not stipulated in this annex*.
When the rules in this annex are applied, the equipment specification shall provide the above
information.

c) Protection shall be provided against ductile tearing of the pressure boundary. The criterion
adopted will be stipulated in the equipment specification, and its choice will be justified in the
stress report.
* One example of this is that according to the definition of conditions requiring level D criteria, the rules in
Z F 1300 are not applicable to the part of the component in which the failure is postulated if this part does not
contribute in the overall stability of the component.

Z F 1300 RULES ASSOCIATED WITH LEVEL D CRITERIA

Z F 1310 GENERAL
a) Z F 1320 gives the general rules applicable to all types of components. Specific rules which may
limit the applicability of the general rules in Z F 1320, are given in the following paragraphs:
- Z F 1330 : Vessels,
- Z F 1340 : Pumps,
- Z F 1350 : Valves,
- Z F 1360 : Piping,
- Z F 1370 : Components supports,
- Z F 1380 : Core support structure,
- Z F 1390 : Metal containment.
In case of conflict between the general rules of Z F 1320 and the specific rules of Z F 1330 to
Z F 1390, the specific rules are applicable.

Z F 1320 DESIGN ANALYSIS

Z F 1321 TERMS RELATED TO ANALYSIS
In addition to the definitions given in B 3200, the following terms are defined:

Annex Z F / 2  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition Subsection Z

Z F 1321.1 Elastoplastic analysis

a) Elastoplastic analysis is a method for studying the structural behaviour of components subjected
to loads by considering the strain hardening characteristics of the material, (determined by the
true stress-strain curve), by considering the influence of the strain rate on this curve and by
considering the permanent overall deformations and the stress redistributions which may occur in
the structure.
An elastoplastic analysis is essentially distinguished from a limit analysis (B 3243) because it
accounts for the actual strain hardening characteristics of the material.

b) The true stress-strain curve shall be adjusted so that the yield strength corresponds to the value
shown in tables Z I 2.1 and Z I 2.2, at the temperature considered and shall be included and
justified in the stress report. However, for the detailed analysis of a specific zone, the
characteristics obtained from tests which may have been performed on that zone may be used.
The rate effects on the elastoplastic flow curve may also be taken into consideration when
verification tests have been performed.

c) The criterion and the corresponding plastic flow rule used to perform the elastoplastic analysis,
may be those of the maximum shear stress (Tresca) or those of the maximum distortion energy
method (Von Mises).

d) An elastoplastic analysis may be performed to determine the collapse load for a given
combination of load applied to a given structure. The collapse load is the load for which
permanent plastic distortion is equal to elastic distortion. Computations shall be interpreted using
the same bases as during an experimental analysis (see Z II 143). The symbol representing the
collapse load is Pc.
An approximation of the collapse load Pc can be obtained by using the limit analysis method
defined in B 3241. This lower bound collapse load is designated CL.

e) An elastoplastic analysis may be used to determine the plastic instability load for a given
combination of loads applied to a given structure.
The plastic instability load is the load corresponding to the point on the force deformation curve
where the tangent is horizontal. The symbol representing the plastic instability load is PI.

f) An elastoplastic analysis may be used to determine the load, or combination of loads associated
with a particular strain within the structure. When a strain limit is imposed, the load
corresponding to this strain limit is designated by the symbol Ps.

g) An elastoplastic analysis may be used to calculate the stresses.

Z F 1321.2 Experimental method

a) The collapse load may be determined by tests performed in accordance with Z II 122 and
interpreted in accordance with Z II 143. The symbol representing the collapse load is Pc.

 n° 137-2012 Annex Z F / 3
RCC-M - 2012 Edition Subsection Z

b) The plastic instability load of the structure may be determined by test. If failure occurs before
plastic instability, the failure load shall be used. The symbol representing the instability
load is PI.

c) The loads corresponding to a particular strain in a structure may be determined by tests which
may be performed in accordance with annex Z II. When a strain limit is imposed, the load
associated with the limit is designated by the symbol Ps.

d) An experimental stress analysis may be used to provide data relative to the inelastic response of
the component.

Z F 1322 METHODS FOR ANALYSIS

Z F 1322.1 System analysis
a) The analysis of the system or sub-system used to determine the loads which are applied to
components, and which shall be indicated, in compliance with Z F 1220 a), in the equipment
specification of a given component, is generally a dynamic analysis due to the nature of the
events usually postulated. While an inelastic analysis of the system is possible (Z F 1324), the
analysis is generally based on the assumption of elastic behaviour.
The use of the latter type of analysis requires, however, that the strains in the supports are such
that the system analysis is not invalidated. Strains which may normally be allowable may thus be
prohibited. This also implies that the component may not be analyzed:
- by plastic instability analysis, or
- by analysis of the load corresponding to a strain limit of the component,
as minor strains associated with the selection of elastic analysis if the system are incompatible
with the large strains assumed in these component analyses.

b) Where elastic analysis of the components and of the system is used, only primary stresses shall
be taken into account when verifying the level D criteria for the component.
Therefore, in a globally elastic analysis of the system, it is acceptable to eliminate the constraint
which may introduce secondary stresses and to analyze the resulting load redistribution. If the
overall stability of the structure is not affected, the load components corresponding to the
constraints eliminated are secondary in nature and do not have to be taken into account in the
verification of criteria applicable to the component.

Z F 1322.2 Component analysis

The evaluation of the component behaviour under conditions for which level D criteria are
specified, may be performed using any one of the methods indicated from a) to e) below, on
condition that the limitations in Z F 1323 to Z F 1325, are taken into account.

a) Elastic analysis. Primary stresses shall be evaluated.

Annex Z F / 4  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition Subsection Z

b) Determination of the collapse load by:

1) limit analysis (B 3241.1),
2) elastoplastic analysis (Z F 1321.1 (d)),
3) test (Z F 1321.2 (a)).

c) Determination of the plastic instability load by:

1) elastoplastic analysis (Z F 1321.1 (e)),
2) test (Z F 1321.2 (b)).

d) Determination of the load or the stress corresponding to a strain limit by:

1) elastoplastic analysis (Z F 1321.1 (f)),
2) test (Z F 1321.2 (c)).

e) Determination of the stresses by inelastic analysis:

1) elastoplastic analysis (Z F 1321.1),
2) test (Z F 1321.2 (d)).
The rules of Z F 1323 to Z F 1325 are summarized in table Z F 1322.2.1.

Z F 1323 ELASTIC ANALYSIS OF THE SYSTEM - METHOD FOR EVALUATING

PRIMARY STRESSES IN THE COMPONENT
Z F 1323.1 Elastic system analysis and elastic component analysis
Elastic system analysis and elastic component analysis are acceptable methods if the conditions a) to
c) below are met:

a) For component supports to which subsection H is applicable (including the attachment weld to
the component)
1) The primary stress limits in B 3233 shall be met. The allowable basic stress intensity Sm shall
be taken as equal to the lower of the following values:
- 100 % of the yield strength given in annex Z I,
- 0.7 Su, where Su is the tensile strength of the material,

2) The primary stress limits in Z VI 2461.2 to Z VI 2461.4 applicable to bolting shall be met,
with allowable stress intensities Ftb and Fvb taken as equal to the following values:
- Ftb = min (0.7 Su ; Sy)
- Fvb = min (0.42 Su ; 0.6 Sy)

the mechanical properties of the material shall be those at the appropriate temperature. The
values of Su to be used shall be included and justified in the stress report.

 n° 137-2012 Annex Z F / 5
RCC-M - 2012 Edition Subsection Z

b) For components
1) The primary stress limits in B 3233 shall be met, with the allowable basic stress intensity Sm
taken as equal to the lower of the following values:
- 2.4 Sm or 0.7 Su for materials in table Z I 1.2,
- 0.7 Su for materials in table Z I 1.1,

2) The primary stress limits in B 3251 applicable to bolting shall be met, with the allowable basic
stress intensity Sm taken as equal to the lower of the following values:
- 2.4 Sm or 0.7 Su for materials in table Z I 1.3,
the mechanical properties of the material shall be those at the appropriate temperature. The
values of Su to be used shall be included and justified in the stress report.

c) The primary shear stress limits in B 3238.2 for components, and in H 3226.2 for supports, shall
be met, with the allowable basic stress intensity Sm taken as equal to the lowest of the following
values:
- 2.4 Sm or 0.7 Su for materials in table Z I 1.2,
- 0.7 Su for materials in table Z I 1.1,
- 2.4 Sm or 0.7 Su for materials in table Z I 1.2,
the mechanical properties of the material shall be those at the appropriate temperature. The
values of Su to be used shall be included and justified in the stress report.

Z F 1323.2 Elastic system analysis and collapse load component analysis

Elastic system analysis and collapse load component analysis are acceptable methods if the rules of
Z F 1323.1 a) are satisfied for component supports for which subsection H is applicable, and if the
rules a) to c) below are applied:
a) Specified loads are less than 90% of the collapse load determined by limit analysis (B 3241.2),
by elastoplastic analysis (Z F 1321.1.), or by test (Z F 1321.2 a).

b) If a limit analysis is employed the yield strength value shall be 230% of the value of Sm at the
appropriate temperature shown in the table in annex Z I.

c) If deformation limits are stated in the equipment specification, this method shall not be used to
analyze the behaviour of the portion of the component to which these limits are applicable.

Z F 1323.3 Elastic analysis of the system and plastic instability analysis

of the component (or strain limit load analysis of the component)
These combinations of analyses are not acceptable.

Annex Z F / 6  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition Subsection Z

Z F 1324 INELASTIC SYSTEM ANALYSIS - METHODS FOR EVALUATING

PRIMARY STRESSES IN THE COMPONENT
Z F 1324.1 Inelastic system analysis and elastic analysis of the component
This method is acceptable if the primary stress limits of B 3232 are satisfied both for the
components and their supports where Sm is the greater of the two following values:
- 0.7 Su,
- Sy + 1/3 (Su - Sy),
and the mechanical properties of the material are taken at the appropriate temperature. The values of
tensile strength Su, shall be included and justified in the stress report.

Z F 1324.2 Inelastic system analysis and component collapse load analysis

This method is acceptable if the rule of Z F 1323.2 are applied.

Z F 1324.3 Inelastic system analysis and component plastic

instability analysis
This method is acceptable if the loads applied are less than the greater of the two following values:
- 70 % of the plastic instability load PI,
- 100 % of the loads which would result in membrane stress intensity of:
Sy + 1/3 (SI - Sy)
where:
SI is the true effective stress associated with the plastic instability.

Z F 1324.4 Inelastic system analysis and strain limit load analysis

for the component
This method is acceptable if the applicable loads are less than those required to satisfy Z F 1324.3,
and less than 100% of the load Ps associated with the specified strain limits.

Z F 1324.5 Inelastic system analysis and component inelastic analysis

This method is acceptable if the rules of Z F 1324.1 are applied.

 n° 137-2012 Annex Z F / 7
RCC-M - 2012 Edition Subsection Z

Z F 1325 REQUIREMENT CONCERNING STABILITY UNDER

EXTERNAL PRESSURE
The allowable external pressure is defined in annex Z IV. A larger value may be accepted if ovality
does not exceed 1%, it should not however exceed 250% of the allowable pressure. When dynamic
pressures or loads are involved, a dynamic instability analysis may be performed, in which case the
allowable external pressure or loads, shall not exceed 75% of the dynamic instability pressure
or loads.

Z F 1330 VESSELS
The rules of Z F 1320 may be used.

Z F 1340 PUMPS
The rules of Z F 1320 may be used.

Z F 1350 VALVES
The following rules may be used instead of those given in ZF 1320:
a) the pressure of the condition for which the level D criteria must be met shall not be more than
twice that of the maximum allowable pressure at the temperature of the condition in question,
b) equation (9) in B 3552.2 shall be verified at 260°C:
- a stress limit equal to the lesser of 3.6 Sm or 1.05 Su shall be used.
- taking one of the following alternatives for calculating the stress Peb due to the mechanical
load transmitted by the piping,
 either term Peb from B 3552.2 and applying to it a factor of:
 1.3 in the case of ferritic steel piping,
 1.5 in the case of austenitic steel piping,
 or the actual value of the external loads (axial load, bending and twisting torques) applied
to the valve in conditions where level D criteria must be met, multiplied by ratio Cb/Gb.
- the maximum permissible pressure ps at 260°C shall be used as the pressure term.
The verication of equation (9) is only formally required if term Peb , as calculated during
verification of a level 0 criterion, was determined using the true value of the external moments
applied to the valve.

Annex Z F / 8  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition Subsection Z

Z F 1360 PIPING
a) The general rules in Z F 1320 can be applied to piping except for the provisions of Z F 1323.1.b),
Z F 1324.1, Z F 1324.5.

b) When the rules in Z F 1324.3 are applied, only the 0.7 PI limit is applicable to the component.

Z F 1370 COMPONENT SUPPORTS

As an alternative rule to the provisions in Z F 1323, the following criteria may be used:
a) For linear-type supports, the allowable stresses determined in subsection H may be increased by
a factor r determined in accordance with the following provisions:

 1.66
r  min  if Su  1.2 Sy
 1.167 S u / S y

r = 1.4 if Su  1.2 Sy
where:
Sy is the yield strength of the material,
Su is the tensile strength of the material.
These values are given in annex Z I and taken at the appropriate temperature.

b) For the linear supports, a limit analysis performed in compliance with subsection H may also be
used, with an overall factor of 1.1 applied to the loading.

c) In addition to complying with the provisions of paragraphs a) and b) above, the compressive load
shall be limited to 2/3 of the critical buckling strength at the appropriate temperature. When
performing this analysis, all the local instabilities shall be considered.

d) In the special case of eye bars, the sum of the linearized membrane and bending stresses shall be
limited to the yield strength of the material taken at the appropriate temperature.

e) The specified loads shall not exceed 80% of the ultimate collapse load Lt obtained by test, when
Lt is the load at which the horizontal tangent to the force deformation curve occurs or 80% of the
loading applied during the test on a prototype or model.
When this method is used, it is necessary to ensure that the test provides a conservative estimate
of the strength of the component by paying special attention to scale effect, dimensional
tolerances and difference which may exist for the mechanical properties of the materials.

f) The provisions of paragraphs b) and e) above shall only be applied in the case of an elastic
system analysis where plasticizing of the supports might not invalidate this analysis.

 n° 137-2012 Annex Z F / 9
RCC-M - 2012 Edition Subsection Z

TABLE Z F 1322.2.1

LEVEL D CRITERIA:
LIMITS APPLICABLE TO LOADS OR STRESSES

* Use the greatest of the specified limits.

** Use the smallest of the specified limits.

Annex Z F / 10  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition Subsection Z

NOTES RELATIVE TO TABLE Z F 1322.2.1

(1) The value of Su at temperature shall be specified and justified in the stress report.

(2) Pc designates the collapse load determined in compliance with Z F 1321.1.d).

CL designates the load determined by limit analysis in compliance with B 3241.

(3) The allowable stress limits selected from this table shall be used in conjunction with the
applicable paragraphs, Z F 1323 and Z F 1324, to determine the limits of Pm, PL and Pb.

(4) SI is the true effective stress associated with the plastic instability (Z F 1324.3).

(5) In the case of compressive loads or stresses, the stability requirements of Z F 1325 shall be
complied with.

(6) This method is not authorized when the strain limits are stated in the equipment specifications.

(7) Ps designates the load associated with the strain limit imposed on the component
(Z F 1321.1.f)).

(8) Criteria not applicable to piping.

(9) Only limit 0.7 PI is acceptable for piping.

(10) Also see specific rules in Z F 1370.

(11) Shear stress limits in Z F 1323.1 c) to be added to the rules.

 n° 137-2012 Annex Z F / 11
RCC-M - 2012 Edition Subsection Z

Annex Z F / 12  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition Subsection Z

ANNEX Z G

FAST FRACTURE RESISTANCE

Z G 1000 INTRODUCTION

Z G 1100 SCOPE
This appendix presents acceptable provisions for fast fracture prevention, which satisfy the
requirements of B 3260. Fast fracture damage is considered here to include brittle fracture and
ductile tearing.
Its intent is to provide a tolerance to potential defects of significant sizes, whatever their origin,
providing a "sturdy" design from this point of view.
In particular, allowable pressure temperature (P-T) curves may be established according to these
provisions, for use in operating and test conditions.
Rules given in this appendix are applicable to the components meeting RCC-M class 1 design and
construction rules.
Type of components covered are:
- pressure vessels shells, nozzles and heads, and welds,
- piping and nozzles, and welds (butt or dissimilar),
- pump casings, and welds.
This appendix is not intended to provide justification for acceptance of defects which may be
encountered during manufacturing or in service, although some of the methods set forth in this
appendix may be applied in such cases. In particular, it does not cover the in-service propagation of
defects which may be considered separately, at the operating stage, to establish the surveillance
programs.
Any deviation from the provisions given in this appendix should be identified and justified.

Z G 1200 METHODOLOGY
Z G 1210 APPROACH
When checking for fast fracture resistance, the manufacturer must apply the following steps in the
order provided, as illustrated in figure Z G 1210:
- application of screening criteria given in Z G 2000: if screening criteria are met no analysis is
necessary,

 n° 137-2012 Annex Z G / 1
RCC-M - 2012 Edition Subsection Z

- conventional fast fracture analysis, according to Z G 3000, intended to obtain a design

tolerance towards potential defects. To this aim, conventional defects are postulated with no
direct link to potential manufacturing defects or in-service degradation. Specified data are taken
into account and conventional safety margins are verified. This analysis method is also
dedicated to:
*
- establishing P-T curves giving allowable operating pressure as a function of temperature ,
- determining minimum temperatures for hydrostatic tests.
- detailed fast fracture analysis according to Z G 4000, which consists in determining the
maximum defect size for which the prescribed safety margins are just met. The methods used in
that case should be consistent with those applied at the in-service surveillance stage. After the
analysis, the zone can be declared "sturdy" with regard to fast fracture resistance only if
justification can be provided that it is impossible for any defect larger than the justified defect to
develop, taking into account manufacturing procedures implemented and inspections of the
relevant zone.

Z G 1220 GENERAL ANALYSIS PRINCIPLES

The analysis methods described in this appendix are based on fracture mechanics concepts. They
consist in:
- postulating a defect in each zone analyzed,
- determining a characteristic value of the crack-extension force for the defect at the crack tip,
resulting from the load applied and the presence of the defect,
- comparing this value to the material toughness, which is a function of the material and the
temperature at the point on the crack front under consideration.

Z G 1230 CRITERIA
Criteria used in this appendix aim to prevent crack instability risk, with safety margins depending on
loading condition category imposed when comparing crack-extension force with material toughness
properties. In addition, complementary conditions are imposed on margins against onset of
crack-extension.

*
A conventional assumption of a ¼ thickness defect in the core shell pressure vessel, a safety coefficient of 2 applied
on the pressure load only and the KIC value defined in figure Z G 6110, may be applied additionally, if required in
the equipment specification.

Annexe Z G / 2  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition Subsection Z

Sizing, Material, Input loading

Screening criteria
(Z G 2000)
- Zones concerned "Sturdy" zone with
yes regard to fast fracture
- Chemical composition
- Minimum material toughness (no analysis required)
- Maximum applied loads

no

Conventional analysis rules

(Z G 3000)
- Conventional defect yes Sturdiness
- Safety coefficients demonstration with
- Specified data regard to fast fracture

no

Detailed analysis
(Z G 4000)
- Determination of justified defect
- Specified data
- Safety coefficients

Size consistent with

potential defect size yes

no

Zone not sturdy with regard to

fast fracture.
Case by case approach

FIGURE Z G 1210:
GENERAL LOGIC FOR FAST FRACTURE PREVENTION APPROACH

: Revision of initial assumptions

 n° 137-2012 Annex Z G / 3
RCC-M - 2012 Edition Subsection Z

Z G 2000 SCREENING CRITERIA

Z G 2100 GENERAL
Prevention against fast fracture risk is considered satisfied if the applicable conditions of Z G 2000
are met. For application of conditions, the other RCC-M requirements are considered as being
complied with.
It shall be recalled that this appendix is limited to evaluating tolerance to defects, as stipulated in
Z G 1100. The screening do not prevent the risk of in-service crack growth of defect under variable
loads.

Z G 2200 FERRITIC COMPONENTS

Z G 2210 VESSELS
Zones which comply with all the following conditions are considered satisfactory in terms of fast
fracture resistance, without further need for analysis:
- KV uppershelf KVPS  100 J
- P content  0.008%
- S content  0.008%
- Tfluid – end-of-life RTNDT  30°C.

Z G 2220 PIPING
(Later)

Z G 2230 CAST MATERIALS

(Later)

Z G 2300 AUSTENITIC OR AUSTENITIC-FERRITIC COMPONENTS

Z G 2310 VESSELS
Fast fracture analysis is not required if the following conditions are safetied:
- use of base materials with KV toughness value at 20°C  100 J,
- TIG welds technology with KV toughness value at 20°C  60 J.

Annexe Z G / 4  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition Subsection Z

Z G 2320 PIPING
Fast fracture analysis is not required if the following conditions are satisfied:
- Used of forged materials with KV toughness value at 20°C  100 J, or TIG welds technology
with KV toughness value at 20°C  60 J,
- Limitations of external moments as follows: if the equation member due to primary moments in
faulted conditions, determined using equation (9) in B 3600, is equal to  Sm, and if the equation
member due to secondary moments, determined using equation (12) in B 3600, is equal to  Sm,
the following condition shall be met :
.  + 0.2   2.1 for specified KV toughness value at 20°C  60 J,
.  + 0.2   2.6 for specified KV toughness value at 20°C  100 J.

Z G 2330 CAST MATERIALS

(Later)

Z G 2400 DISSIMILAR WELDS

(Later)

Z G 3000 CONVENTIONAL FAST FRACTURE ANALYSIS

Z G 3100 GENERAL
Z G 3110 SELECTION OF ZONES ANALYZED
Fast fracture risk is linked to three parameters: potential defects, applied stresses and material
toughness. Consequently, zones subjected to fast fracture analysis shall be selected considering the
following parameters:
- the total stress levels,
- the toughness of materials, including likelihood of in-service embrittlement,
- the manufacturing and/or inspection difficulties related to geometrical or metallurgical
complexities.
Complementary requirements may be included in the component specification.

Z G 3120 SELECTION OF TRANSIENTS

Transients to be considered shall be the most significant in terms of the stresses which they are
likely to induce and the associated temperatures, considering their impact on the toughness of the
material.

 n° 137-2012 Annex Z G / 5
RCC-M - 2012 Edition Subsection Z

Z G 3130 CONSIDERATION OF CLADDING

In applying this appendix to clad components, the cladding may be taken into account in
determining the temperatures fields and stresses, as well as the neutron fluence, but shall be
disregarded for the purpose of fast fracture analyses.

Z G 3200 FERRITIC VESSELS

Z G 3210 CONVENTIONAL DEFECTS
Conventional defects are considered as surface defects with:
- ac depth equal to:
- min (1/2 thickness, 10 mm) for thicknesses  40 mm,
- min (1/4 thickness, 20mm) for thicknesses > 40 mm,
- and a length cc ensuring a depth/length ratio ac/2cc = 1/6.
In the particular case of nozzle corners, the thickness to be considered for defect depth of the
reference defect ac determination is the thickness of adjacent shell, and the ac/2cc ratio can be taken
as equal to 1/2.
For semi-elliptical defects, both ends of the defects must be analyzed: the point on the crack front
located at the deepest part (point A in figure Z G 3210) and the edge located at the surface (point B).
Conventional defects are postulated in the most stressed location in the selected zone according to
Z G 3110, and their planes are assumed to be normal to the direction of the maximum principal
stresses.
Defects smaller than the reference defect must also be analyzed to ensure that they are not more
severe.

Cladding
(ignored)
ac A

Conventional
defect

FIGURE Z G 3210. CONVENTIONAL REFERENCE DEFECT

Z G 3220 CALCULATION METHOD

Fast fracture resistance is evaluated for each zone selected according to Z G 3110, and for each
transient selected according to Z G 3120, for all conditions requiring compliance with levels A, C, D
and T criteria. The evaluation shall be made for significant points in time during the course of the
conditions under analysis.

Annexe Z G / 6  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition Subsection Z

For each point in time selected, the value of the stress intensity factor Kcp is determined in
accordance to Z G 5000 on the basis of the reference defect points defined according to Z G 3210.
This value takes into account the total stresses resulting from the condition analyzed and includes a
plasticity correction. The value Kcp which characterizes the extension force of the defect is thus
compared to the material toughness KIC at the end of the defect studied for the evaluation of crack
instability risk in the brittle and transition region, and compared to the KJC or KJ-a value for the
evaluation of the ductile tearing resistance. In the former case, J based approach may be substituted
to the Kcp approach.

With regard to compliance with Z G 3234 criteria, the following conditions are applicable:
a) Kcp  KIC, where KIC is determined in accordance with Z G 6110, on the basis of the material
temperature at defect end and at the transient point in time considered, as well as material
reference transition temperature RTNDT. Provided that the analysis is conducted to cover the
entire service life of the component, the effects of various types of ageing on the RTNDT shall be
taken into account in accordance with Z G 6120.
b) When condition a) is not reached and the material temperature enters into the ductile brittle
transition region in a domain of continuously decreasing K value, the applied warm prestress
effect may be taken into account once justification has been provided that no further load
increase is anticipated. Fast fracture prevention is considered verified, under condition that
justifications are provided.
c) The crack-extension force curve determined according to Z G 5220 is tangential to material
tearing resistance curve J - a defined in Z G 6140, within the range of validity of both curves.
This verification may be substituted by verification that KJ is less than or equal to KJ-a.
The KJC and KJ-a values are issued from the curve representing tear resistance J - a for the
material at the temperature of the defect end at the transient point in time considered, as follows:
KJC is the ductile tearing crack initiation toughness, corresponding to JIC.
KJ-a is the toughness corresponding to a ductile tearing a within the range of validity of the
material data.
KIC, KJC and KJ-a envelope values are provided in Z G 6000.
Criteria to be verified when comparing the extension force of the defect Kcp and the toughness
KIC, KJC or KJ-a, are specified in Z G 3230.

Z G 3230 CRITERIA
Z G 3231 General
The criteria defined in this chapter aim at preventing crack instability, with margins depending on
criteria level stipulated in the equipment specification, as shown in Table Z G 3230, column (1). In
principle, these margins are applicable in the brittle and ductile regions. In addition, in the ductile
region complementary conditions are imposed on margins against onset of crack-extension, as
indicated in column (2). Alternatively, in the ductile region, the criteria indicated in column (3) may
be substituted for the verification of column (1) and (2) criteria. These criteria are stipulated in
paragraphs Z G 3232 to Z G 3235.

 n° 137-2012 Annex Z G / 7
RCC-M - 2012 Edition Subsection Z

SAFETY MARGIN
SAFETY MARGIN ENVELOPE MARGIN
AGAINST BRITTLE
AGAINST ONSET AGAINST ONSET AND
FRACTURE RISK OR
LOADING CONDITION OF CRACK- INSTABILITY OF
DUCTILE TEARING
EXTENSION CRACK-EXTENSION
INSTABILITY
(1) (2) (3)

Level A criteria 2 1.3 1.6

Level C criteria and tests 1.6 1.1 1.3

Level D criteria 1.2 - 1.0

Table Z G 3230 Safety margins to verify for analysis of fast fracture resistance with regard to
instability and onset of crack-extension risks, depending on criteria levels

Z G 3232 Level A and B Criteria

Criteria to be met for conditions requiring compliance with level A and B criteria are given below:
- In the brittle and transition temperature ranges (T  RTNDT + 60°C):
KCP  KIC /2
- In uppershelf temperature range (T > RTNDT +40°C):
KCP  KJC /1.6, or
KCP  KJC /1.3, and verification that a safety margin of 2 is verified against ductile tearing
instability.
Tearing instability verification may be covered by the following condition relating to analyzing a
propagated defect identical in shape (2cp/ap = 6) and position to the reference defect, but 3mm*
deeper than the reference defect described in Z G 3210: ap = ac + 3 mm:
KCP (defect ap)  KJ-a / 2
where KCP is the total stress intensity factor, including plastic correction.
Values of KIC are defined in accordance with Z G 6110 on the basis of the material temperature T at
the point in time and at the point on the crack front under analysis, and the transition temperature
RTNDT at the same point. Effects due to ageing are taken into account in accordance with Z G 6120.
KJC values are given in Z G 6140.

* A higher tearing value may be used, provided that validated material data is available.

Annexe Z G / 8  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition Subsection Z

Z G 3233 Level C criteria

Criteria to be met for conditions requiring compliance with level C criteria, are given below:
- In the brittle and transition temperature range (T  RTNDT + 60°C):
KCP  KIC /1.6
- In the uppershelf temperature range (T > RTNDT +40°C):
KCP  KJC /1.3, or
KCP  KJC /1.1, and verification that a safety margin of 1.6 is verified against ductile tearing
instability.
Tearing instability verification may be covered by the following condition relating to analyzing a
propagated defect identical in shape (2cp/ap = 6) and position to the reference defect, but 3mm*
deeper than the reference defect described in Z G 3210:ap = ac + 3 mm:
KCP (defect ap)  KJ-a / 1.6
where KCP is the total stress intensity factor, including plastic correction.
Values of KIC are defined in accordance with Z G 6110 on the basis of the material temperature T at
the point in time and at the point on the crack front under analysis, and the transition temperature
RTNDT at the same point. Effects due to ageing are taken into account in accordance with Z G 6120.
The KJC values are given in Z G 6140.

Z G 3234 Level D criteria

Criteria to be met for conditions requiring compliance with level D criteria, are given below:
- In the brittle and transition temperature range (T  RTNDT + 60°C):
KCP  KIC /1.2
- In the uppershelf temperature range (T > RTNDT +40°C):
KCP  KJC /1.0, or
verification that a safety margin of 1.2 is verified against ductile tearing instability.
Tearing instability verification may be covered by the following condition relating to analyzing a
propagated defect identical in shape (2cp/ap = 6) and position to the reference defect, but 3mm*
deeper than the reference defect described in Z G 3210: ap = ac + 3 mm:
KCP (defect ap)  KJ-a / 1.2
where KCP is the total stress intensity factor, including plastic correction.
Values of KIC are defined in accordance with Z G 6110 on the basis of the material temperature T of
the material at the point in time and at the point on the crack front under analysis, and the transition
temperature RTNDT at the same point. Effects due to ageing are taken into account in accordance
with Z G 6120. KJC values are given in Z G 6140.

*
A higher tearing value may be used, provided that validated material data is available.

 n° 137-2012 Annex Z G / 9
RCC-M - 2012 Edition Subsection Z

Z G 3235 Level T criteria

In hydrostatic test conditions requiring compliance with level T criteria, the provisions of Z G 3233
shall be applied.
In addition, it is recommended that the wall temperature during the first pressure test meet the
following condition:
T  RTNDT + 30°C
Where RTNDT is the transition temperature of the material at the crack tip.

Z G 3300 FERRITIC PIPING

(Later)

Z G 3400 AUSTENITIC** AND AUSTENITIC-FERRITIC VESSELS

Z G 3410 CONVENTIONAL REFERENCE DEFECTS
The defects considered for fast fracture evaluation may be determined according to Z G 3210.

Z G 3420 CALCULATION METHOD

The provisions given in Z G 3220 are applicable.

Z G 3430 CRITERIA
Z G 3431 General
The general provisions given in Z G 3231 are applicable.

Z G 3432 Level A and B Criteria

Criteria to be met for conditions requiring compliance with level A and B criteria are given below:
KJ  KJC /1.6, or
KJ  KJC /1.3, and verification that a safety margin of 2 is verified against ductile tearing
instability.

**
Analysis is generally not required for austenitic vessels, taking into account the exemption criteria stipulated in
ZG 2310 and the specifications in the present code.

Annexe Z G / 10  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition Subsection Z

Tearing instability verification may be covered by the following condition relating to analyzing a
propagated defect identical in shape (2cp/ap = 6) and position to the reference defect, but 3mm*
deeper than the reference defect described in Z G 3210: ap = ac + 3 mm:
KJ (defect ap)  KJ-a / 2
where KJ is the total stress intensity factor, including plastic correction.
The KJC and KJ-a values are defined in accordance with Z G 6200.

Z G 3433 Level C criteria

Criteria to be met for conditions requiring compliance with level C criteria are given below:
KJ  KJC /1.3, or
KJ  KJC /1.1, and verification that a safety margin of 1.6 is verified against ductile tearing
instability.
Tearing instability verification may be covered by the following condition relating to analyzing a
propagated defect identical in shape (2cp/ap = 6) and position to the reference defect, but 3mm*
deeper than the reference defect described in Z G 3210: ap = ac + 3 mm:
KJ (defect ap)  KJ-a / 1.6
where KJ is the total stress intensity factor, including plastic correction.
The KJC and KJ-a values are defined in accordance with Z G 6200.

Z G 3434 Level D criteria

Criteria to be met for conditions requiring compliance with level D criteria are given below:
KJ  KJC, or

verification that a safety margin of 1.2 is verified against ductile tearing instability.
Tearing instability verification may be covered by the following condition relating to analyzing a
propagated defect identical in shape (2cp/ap = 6) and position to the reference defect, but 3mm*
deeper than the reference defect described in Z G 3210: ap = ac + 3 mm:
KJ (defect ap)  KJ-a / 1.2
where KJ is the total stress intensity factor, including plastic correction.
The KJC and KJ-a values are defined in accordance with Z G 6200.

*
A higher tearing value may be used, provided that validated material data is available.

 n° 137-2012 Annex Z G / 11
RCC-M - 2012 Edition Subsection Z

Z G 3435 Level T criteria

In hydrostatic test conditions where level T criteria are required, no specific criteria is required on
the fast fracture resistance of austenitic steel components.

Z G 3500 AUSTENITIC OR AUSTENITIC-FERRITIC PIPING

(Later)

Z G 3600 OTHER COMPONENTS

(Later)

Z G 4000 DETAILED FAST FRACTURE

ANALYSIS METHOD

Z G 4100 GENERAL
Z G 4110 SCOPE
This detailed analysis rules in this chapter are applicable to the selected zones stipulated in
Z G 1110 where these are no obvious design solutions to allow the conventional method to be used
(choice of materials, dimensions, drawings, loads, etc.). The purpose of these analyses is to
determine the size of critical defects.

Z G 4120 APPROACH
The detailed analysis approach consists in calculating the largest ‘critical’ defect for which the
prescribed safety margin are just met, using the data measured on parts if necessary.
The range of methods which may be used are not limited, but the methods chosen should preferably
be consistent with those applied at the in-service surveillance stage.

Following detailed analysis, the zone is considered sturdy with regard to fast fracture resistance,
provided that it is demonstrably impossible for any defect larger than the critical defect to develop,
taking into account the manufacturing procedures implemented, or that no such defect has been
detected by the appropriate inspections in the corresponding zone.

Z G 4200 VESSELS
(Later)

Annexe Z G / 12  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition Subsection Z

Z G 4300 PIPING
(Later)

Z G 5000 METHODS FOR DETERMINING

ANALYSIS PARAMETERS

Z G 5100 DETERMINATION OF STRESS INTENSITY

FACTORS K
Z G 5110 GENERAL
The stress intensity factor is determined from the defect size under consideration, its position and
the stresses associated with the condition under analysis.
This determination may be performed in accordance with the following procedure (other methods
may also be used subject to justification):
a) Determine the distribution of stresses associated with the condition under analysis, at the point in
time under consideration; all applied loads are taken into account, whatever of their nature.
The stress fit is carried out over a distance part L of the wall thickness of studied zone, and
only by taking into account the stresses normal to the postulated defect plane.
The distribution of normal stress  (x), or a conservative envelope of this distribution, is fitted by
a polynomial with variable x, in the following form:
 (x) = o + 1 (x/L) + 2 (x/L)2 + 3 (x/L)3 + 4 (x/L)4
x is the distance to the wall 0  x  t if t is the thickness of the studied zone.
L is the distance over which the stress is expressed by the polynomial: 0  L  t
b) The stress intensity factor KI is then determined by associating an influence function to each
terms in the polynomial expression.
Influence functions are represented by io, i1, i2 and i3 and are a function of crack geometry, the
zone in which the postulated crack is located, and the a/L ratio, where a is the crack depth.
The stress intensity factor KI is expressed as follows:
KI = (a)1/2 ( o io + 1 (a/L) i1 + 2 (a/L)2 i2 + 3 (a/L)3 i3 )
The influence functions are given in Z G 5120.

c) Plastic zone correction must be applied to the stress intensity factor according to the following
procedure: (other methods may be subject to justification):
- determine the radius ry of the plastic zone at the defect tip, as follows:

2
1  K I 
r 
y 6π  R 
 p 
where Rp is the yield strength value for the material at the crack tip at the temperature of the
point in time considered; this value is given in the RCC-M Appendix Z I, and KI is the stress
intensity factor at the crack tip, regardless of the end of the defect being corrected.

 n° 137-2012 Annex Z G / 13
RCC-M - 2012 Edition Subsection Z

- determine the corrected value of the intensity factor KCP as follows:

a  ry
K CP  K I
a
where KI is the stress intensity factor determined at the end of the defect considered, and
where the value of  is determined as follows, except if otherwise justified:
- if ry  0.05 (t-a): =1
2
 ry - 0.05 (t - a) 
- if 0.05 (t-a) < ry  0.12 (t-a): α  1  0.15  
 0.035 (t - a) 
- if ry > 0.12 (t-a):  = 1.6
where t is the wall thickness at the section under analysis and a is the crack depth.

Z G 5120 INFLUENCE FUNCTIONS

The influence functions are expressed as io, i1, i2, and i3. The values are a function of a/t, a/c, and
R/t, as well as the orientation of the defect studied, and the zone in which it is postulated (where a is
the crack depth, t is the thickness of the wall in the zone in which the defect is postulated, c is half
the length of the defect, and R is the internal radius of the shell studied, as illustrated in figure
Z G 5120).
The values are given in tables Z G 5121 and Z G 5122 for semi-elliptical circumferential and
longitudinal defects with eccentricity 2c/a = 6 for the tip and edge of the crack.
Where the data indicated in these tables are not applicable, stress intensity factors can be determined
according to methods provided in Appendix 5.4 of the RSE-M or on an individual case basis.

a/t io i1 i2 i3

0.00 0.976 0.611 0.478 0.405

0.25 1.023 0.626 0.483 0.407
0.50 1.161 0.675 0.509 0.422

Table Z G 5121.a:
Influence functions at the tip of the crack (point A), for a semi-elliptical circumferential crack with
ratio a/c = 1/3 postulated in a hollow cylinder with ratio R/t = 10. These functions are also
applicable to shells with an R/t ratio of less than 10.

a/t io i1 i2 i3

0.00 0.613 0.089 0.028 0.013

0.25 0.659 0.098 0.034 0.017
0.50 0.767 0.132 0.050 0.026

Table Z G 5121.b:
Influence functions at the edge of the crack (point B), for a semi-elliptical circumferential crack with
ratio a/c = 1/3 postulated in a hollow cylinder with ratio R/t = 10. These functions are also
applicable to shells with an R/t ratio of less than 10.

Annexe Z G / 14  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition Subsection Z

a/t io i1 i2 i3

0.00 0.976 0.611 0.478 0.405

0.25 1.024 0.626 0.483 0.406
0.50 1.191 0.683 0.511 0.423

Table Z G 5122.a:
Influence functions at the tip of the crack (point A), for a semi-elliptical longitudinal crack with ratio
a/c = 1/3 postulated in a hollow cylinder with ratio R/t = 10. These functions are also applicable to
shells with an R/t ratio of less than 10.

a/t io i1 i2 i3
0.00 0.613 0.089 0.028 0.013
0.25 0.665 0.100 0.035 0.018
0.50 0.810 0.146 0.057 0.031

Table Z G 5122.b:
Influence functions at the edge of the crack (point B), for a semi-elliptical longitudinal crack with
ratio a/c = 1/3 postulated in a hollow cylinder with ratio R/t = 10. These functions are also
applicable to shells with an R/t ratio of less than 10.

2c

a
R t

Figure Z G 5120

 n° 137-2012 Annex Z G / 15
RCC-M - 2012 Edition Subsection Z

Z G 5200 DETERMINATION OF CRACK-EXTENSION FORCE J

Z G 5210 GENERAL
The crack-extension force J used in the ductile range may be evaluated using any of the following
methods:
- direct analysis of the cracked part,
- using the correlation stipulated in Z G 5220 between KCP as described in Z G 5100 and J,
- using the reference stress method.

Z G 5220 DETERMINATION OF CRACK-EXTENSION FORCE J

In determining the crack-extension force curve, crack depth is adapted as a parameter. The J integral
defined in Z G 5210 is computed for a series of cracks with increasing dimensions, with similar
outlines to those of the reference defect defined in Z G 3210, where dimension a of the cracks is
measured along the supporting line segment defining the section under analysis.
For each value a of the crack depth, J may be computed from the stress intensity factor KCP
determined in accordance with Z G 5100, using the following equations:

(1  ν 2 )K I 2
J at the tip of the defect (point A),
E
K CP 2
J at the edge of the defect (point B),
E

Z G 5230 PIPING ANALYSIS

(Later)

Z G 6000 MATERIAL PROPERTIES

Z G 6100 TOUGHNESS PROPERTIES OF FERRITIC MATERIAL

Z G 6110 KIC TOUGHNESS CURVE
For the materials covered by procurement specifications in M 2110 and M 2120, critical stress
intensity factor value KIC may be determined from the curve shown in figure Z G 6110, given:
- material temperature T at the point in time and the defect end for which fast fracture analysis is
being performed,
- the reference transition temperature RTNDT for the material under consideration, as defined in
MC 1200. Where the material is likely to be exposed to the effect of ageing (thermal, irradiation,
deformation, etc.), this shall be taken into account in accordance with Z G 6120, for the location
under consideration.

Annexe Z G / 16  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition Subsection Z

KIC MPa m

T – RTNDT (°C)

Figure Z G 6110
Reference toughness curve for low-alloy steels
covered by specifications M.2110 and M.2120

Other reference transition temperatures, such as the FATT index method, To, or other reference
curves, may be proposed if justification is provided.
The KIC = f(T-RTNDT) curve shown in figure Z G 6110 is based on the lower bound of static
toughness test results corresponding to initiation of crack propagation instability. These results have
been measured as a function of temperature on specimens of low-alloy manganese-nickel-
molybdenum steels, covered by procurement specifications M 2110 and M 2120 of Section II.
The analytic expression of the curve is as follows, in the range T - RTNDT ≤ 60°C.
0.038 T  RT NDT 
K IC  40  0.09 ( T  RTNDT )  20 e

where KIC is expressed in MPa m , and T and RTNDT are expressed in °C.
For materials not covered by M 2000 specifications, applicable toughness curves shall be developed
on an individual case by case basis, taking into account all potential sources of dispersion which are
likely to negatively affect the results, regardless of whether this dispersion results from the material
or the test techniques used.

 n° 137-2012 Annex Z G / 17
RCC-M - 2012 Edition Subsection Z

Z G 6120 AGEING EFFECTS

Z G 6121 General
Various ageing mechanisms may affect the low-alloy steels covered by specifications M 2110 and
M 2120, according to the conditions to which the steels are exposed in service. Z G 6120 describes
methods for evaluating the effects of irradiation, thermal ageing, and strain ageing on toughness KIC.
Embrittlements caused by several mechanisms are not cumulative. Only the mechanism which
causes the highest level of embrittlement should be considered.

Z G 6122 Irradiation Effects

a) General
Where materials may be exposed to irradiation, the resulting embrittlement shall be evaluated.
This embrittlement mainly depends on:
- the energy spectrum of the neutrons
- the fluence
- the irradiation temperature
- the sensitivity of the material to irradiation, which is mainly a function of its chemical
composition.
The evolution of material toughness under irradiation may be determined by applying
paragraph b) below to evaluate the reference transition temperature shift. Other laws may be
used if adequate justification is provided.

b) For parts meeting the requirements of M 2110 and M 2120, and the associated welded joints
and heat affected zones, the reference transition temperature shift may be determined by the
following formula and the specific data:
RTNDT = [ 22 + 556 (% Cu - 0.08) + 2778 (% P - 0.008) ] [f/1019]1/2
Where:
RTNDT = transition temperature shift expressed in °C.
f = fluence expressed in neutrons per cm², where only neutrons having energy greater
than 1 MeV are considered (fluence may be expressed in other units of neutron
damage on condition that an appropriate adjustment is made to the constant 1019).
% Cu = copper content (by weight) of the material. Where the content is less than 0.08%,
the value 0.08% shall be introduced into the formula.
%P = phosphorus content (by weight) of the material. Where the content is less than
0.008%, the value 0.008% shall be introduced into the formula.
This formula may be applicable to any neutron fluence from 1018 and 8.1019 n/cm2 and for any
irradiation temperature from 275°C to 300°C. For temperatures below 275°C, irradiation effects
must be increased. Conversely, the irradiation influence must be reduced for temperatures above
300°C. The correction factor used shall be justified in all cases.

Annexe Z G / 18  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition Subsection Z

Z G 6123 Thermal Ageing Effects

For parts meeting the requirements of M 2110 and M 2120, and the associated welded joints, the
envelope of the reference transition temperature RTNDT allowing for thermal ageing may be
evaluated using the following formula:
RTNDT aged = RTNDT initial + RTNDT ageing
The shifts in RTNDT ageing are given in table Z G 6123. Shifts depend on the temperature and
ageing time, as well as the phosphorus content.
For the base metal, the heat affected zone (HAZ) located under the cladding must be distinguished
from the rest of the base metal. When studying a semi-elliptical defect as defined in Z G 3210, the
properties obtained for the HAZ may be applied to the edge of the defect. The properties obtained
for the base metal may be applied to the tip of defects as defined in Z G 3210.
The shift in RTNDT ageing for the welded joint may be taken as identical to the shift in
RTNDT ageing for the base metal.
The three situations may be expressed as follows:
- Base metal (BM) outside the HAZ:
RTNDT aged BM = RTNDT initial BM + RTNDT ageing BM
- Base metal HAZ: RTNDT aged HAZ = RTNDT initial BM + RTNDT ageing HAZ
- Welded joints (WJ): RTNDT aged WJ = RTNDT initial WJ + RTNDT ageing BM

Base metal RTNDT ageing (°C) HAZ RTNDT ageing (°C)

300°C 325°C 350°C 300°C 325°C 350°C

P 40 60 40 60 40 60 40 60 40 60 40 60
(ppm) years years years years years years years years years years years years
40 2 2 4 5 8 9 0 0 0 0 10 13
60 3 3 6 7 12 14 0 0 3 7 11 17
80 4 4 8 10 16 18 0 0 9 15 33 40

Table Z G 6123
Reference transition temperature shifts for toughness:
RTNDT ageing due to thermal ageing.

Z G 6124 Strain Ageing Effects

For parts meeting on requirements of M 2100, and the associated welded joints, the envelope of the
reference transition temperature RTNDT allowing for strain ageing may be evaluated using the
following formula:
- Base metal (BM) outside the HAZ:
RTNDT BM strain = RTNDT initial BM + RTNDT strainf BM
Base metal HAZ: RTNDT HAZ strain = RTNDT initial BM + RTNDT strain HAZ
Welded joints (WJ): RTNDT WJ strain = RTNDT initial WJ + RTNDT strain BM

 n° 137-2012 Annex Z G / 19
RCC-M - 2012 Edition Subsection Z

with: RTNDT strain BM = 15°C

RTNDT strain HAZ = 0°C
When studying defects postulated outside welded joints, the properties obtained for the HAZ may be
applied to the edge of the defect when studying a semi-elliptical defect as defined in Z G 3210. The
properties obtained for the base metal may be applied for the tip of semi-elliptical defects as defined
in Z G 3210. For defects postulated on welded joints, the properties to be applied depend on the
position of the ends of the defects under consideration.

Z G 6130 APPLICATION OF KIC CURVE TO OTHER FERRITIC COMPONENTS

(Later)

Z G 6140 DUCTILE TEARING TOUGHNESS OF FERITIC MATERIALS

Z G 6141 Resistance to Onset of Crack-Extension
Resistance to onset of crack-extension is expressed by the values of JIC or KJC. These two variables
are related as follows:
E J IC
K JC 2 
1 2

JIC is the value of J at the onset of crack-extension, as defined in ASTM standard E.813.
Table Z G 6141 gives values of JIC and KJC applicable to all low-alloy manganese-nickel-
molybdenum steels covered in the procurement specifications M 2110 and M 2120. The values
indicated in the table below constitute lower bounds for the above-mentioned products. More
suitable values may be used, provided adequate justification is given.

Z G 6142 Crack-Extension Resistance Curves

The JR-a crack-extension resistance curve gives a conservative value of the crack-extension a as a
function of the value of J.
Curves applicable to the low-alloy manganese-nickel-molybdenum steels covered by M 2110 and
M 2120 are given in figure Z G 6142, which use the JIC and dJ/da data given in table Z G 6141.
Resistance curves other than those given in this figure may be used provided adequate justification
is given.

Annexe Z G / 20  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition Subsection Z

KJC JIC dJ
TEMPERATURE MATERIAL (MPa )
RANGE MPa m  (kJ/m2) da

Base metal, S  0.005 200 190 180

function of 0.005 < S  0.008 170 135 120
sulfur content 0.008 < S  0.011 155 110 85
T  200°C 0.011 < S  0.015
(%) 135 85 55

Welded joints 170 135 120

Base metal, S  0.005 245 265 270

function of 0.005 < S  0.008 205 190 285
sulfur content 0.008 < S  0.011 190 160 240
T  50°C 0.011 < S  0.015
(%) 175 135 200

Welded joints 205 190 285

Table Z G 6141
Values of KJC and JIC for materials covered
under M 2110 and M 2120 and related welded joints.
Toughness values for intermediate temperatures
between 50°C and 200°C may be determined by linear interpolation.

 n° 137-2012 Annex Z G / 21
RCC-M - 2012 Edition Subsection Z

JR

1/3. dJ/da

JIC dJ/da

J = 4f a (f = 500 MPa)

0 0.2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 a

Figure Z G 6142
Illustration of JR-a resistance curve applicable to steels
covered in M 2110 and M 2120. Applicable JIC and dJ/da data
are given in table Z G 6141.

Z G 6200 TOUGHNESS PROPERTIES OF AUSTENITIC MATERIALS

(Later)

Annexe Z G / 22  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition Subsection Z

ANNEX Z H

ACCEPTABLE RULES FOR DETERMINING

USAGE FACTOR

The usage factor covered in B 3234.5.c) may be determined in accordance with the rules below.
When the provisions of this annex are applied, the cyclic variation of the seismic loads are to be
considered in accordance with the rules in B 3234.5.d).

Z H 100 FIRST METHOD:

TRANSIENT COMBINATIONS

Z H 110 FIXED DIRECTIONS OF PRINCIPAL STRESSES

The alternative methods presented within this paragraph have the following general structure:

a) Definition of the transients associated with each condition.

b) Combination of the transients and creation of fictitious transients (1) and (2).

c) Determination of the unit usage factor associated with each combination using the fictitious
transient (1), since fictitious transient (2) is recombined later with other conditions.

Z H 111 FIRST ALTERNATIVE METHOD*

a) A transient associated with each condition. It is composed, for each difference ij, of a pair of load
sets formed by associating the extremes for the total stress difference Sij with the extremes for the
corresponding linearised stress difference Slij.
Any sub-cycles associated with the total stress differences are considered independently in
accordance with the note to B 3234.5.c)1)a).

b) For each combination of two transients p and q, a fictitious transient (1) is determined for each
difference ij as follows:
Total stress differences:
[ Sij max (1) ]pq = max (Sij max (p), Sij max (q))
[ Sij min (1) ] pq = min (Sij min (p), Sij min (q))
___________________
* This method is basically identical to the one given in B 3234.5.c) 1) except that the fictitious transient (2) is retained
for later recombination, where the factor Ke is an envelope for the set of conditions contributing to the fictitious
transient considered during calculation of the unit usage factor.

 n° 137-2012 Annex Z H / 1
RCC-M - 2012 Edition Subsection Z

Linearised stress differences:

[ Slij max (1) ] pq = max (Slij max (p), Slij max (q))
[ Slij min (1) ] pq = min (Slij min (p), Slij min (q))
Fictitious transient (2), for each difference ij, is composed of the two total stress differences not
used in establishing the fictitious transient (1); the differences in the associated linearised stresses
however are identical to those used above.

c) The unit usage factor (u)pq for each combination of two transients p and q is determined in
accordance with B 3234.5.c) 1) b) with only the usage factor due to the fictitious transient (1)
retained.
The fictitious transient (2) is retained for later recombination with other conditions.
In this calculation, the elastoplastic stress correction factor (Ke)pq covered in B 3234.5.c) 1) is
determined in accordance with B 3234.6 using the maximum value of the three ranges of the
linearised stress differences associated with the fictitious transient (1).

d) The matrix (u)pq for the set of combinations of pairs of transients is established in accordance
with B 3234.5.c) 1) c). The maximum value (u)kl is determined for the set of (u)pq whose
associated number of occurrences (n)pq is not zero. For this combination (k, l), the usage
factor (U)kl is determined by the following relationship:
(U)kl = (u)kl (n)kl

e) A new set of transients is established after elimination of the transient figuring in the combination
selected in d) above, with the lowest number of occurrences; (n)kl occurrences are subtracted
from the remaining transient.
The transient whose number of occurrences has become zero is replaced by fictitious
transient (2)kl, which was not accounted for in step d) of the calculation; it is assigned (n)kl
number of occurrences.
The procedure is then repeated from step b) until all the occurrences assigned to the transients are
accounted for.

f) The cumulative usage factor is equal to the sum of the usage factors determined by applying the
above procedure.
This usage factor shall be less than 1.

Z H 112 SECOND ALTERNATIVE METHOD

This method is identical to the first except that for the following points:
a) In step a) of the procedure, the sub-cycles associated with the total stress differences give rise to
complete transients. These transients are formed by associating the extremes for total stresses,
with the extremes of the linearised stress differences corresponding to the entire condition. These
transients have the same number of occurrences as the condition from which they are taken.

Annex Z H / 2  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition Subsection Z

b) In step b) the definition of the fictitious transient (2) is modified: the linearised stress differences
and the total stress differences are associated as in step a).

Z H 113 THIRD ALTERNATIVE METHOD

a) A transient is defined for each condition. This transient is composed for each difference ij, of a
pair of load states corresponding to two times k and l which maximizes the following
function (i):
[ (Sp) ij (k, l) ] max ij [ (Ke)ij (k, l) ]
where:
(Sp)ij (k, l) = Sij (k) - Sij (l)
(Ke)ij (k, l) = elastoplastic stress correction factor determined in accordance with B 3234.6 using
the range |SIij (k) - Slij (l)| of the linearised stresses between times k and l.
Any sub-cycles associated with the total stress differences shall give rise to complete transients
using the same procedure; their number of occurrences shall be that of the condition to which
they belong.
The transients resulting from this operation are composed of a set of six load states each
characterized, at the point of the structure analyzed, by a total stress difference and three
linearised stress differences.

b) Two fictitious transients (1) and (2) are defined for each combination of two transients p and q:
transient (1) is composed, for each difference ij, of the two load states k and l, belonging to the
set of the four load states defined in accordance with a) above, and maximizing the function (1).
For each difference ij, the fictitious transient (2) is composed of the two remaining load states.

c) The unit usage factor (u) for each combination of two transients p and q, is determined in
accordance with B 3234.5.c) 1) b) retaining only the usage factor due to the fictitious
transient (1).
The fictitious transient (2) is retained for later combination with other conditions.
In the calculations the elastoplastic stress correction factor (Ke)pq covered in B 3234.5.c) 1) b) is
determined in accordance with B 3234.6 using the maximum value of the nine ranges of the
linearised stress differences associated with the fictitious transient (1).

d) Procedure d) to f) of Z H 111 is then applicable.

 n° 137-2012 Annex Z H / 3
RCC-M - 2012 Edition Subsection Z

Z H 120 VARIABLE DIRECTIONS OF PRINCIPAL STRESSES

In this case, the provisions of B 3234.5.c) 2) are applicable.

Z H 200 SECOND METHOD:

COMBINATIONS OF TIMES

This method is applicable to fixed or variable principal stress directions without modification.
The methods presented below have the following general structure:
a) selection of the significant times, to which load states correspond;
b) combination of these load states.

Z H 210 FIRST ALTERNATIVE METHOD

a) For each condition, a certain number of significant times are selected, in the analysis: in general
these times correspond to extremes of stress values in the zone analyzed. The extremes
associated with the sub-cycles are considered as fully significant times.
The number of occurrences associated with each time selected is equal to the number of
occurrences of the condition considered.
All conditions are thus considered and a list of times is established. These times are referred to
below as load states and are characterized by a total stress tensor and a linearised stress tensor.
The significant instants adopted for the analysis will also include those capable of maximizing
the value of Salt covered in b) below, which depends on the stress range, and the division into
"mechanical" and "thermal" parts imposed on this range.

b) For each combination of two load states p and q, a (Sp)pq is determined from the tensor
corresponding to the difference between the two total stress tensors for states p and q, by
selecting the maximum value of the three Sij determined from this tensor in accordance with the
rules of B 3232.1.
The corresponding alternating stress intensity is determined as follows:

(S alt ) pq 
1 
        
 K e mech nm S p mech pq  K e ther nm S p ther pq 
2  

where:
Sp mech (p,q): range of the mechanical part of the total stresses (Sp)pq, between the two instants p
and q or the maximum value of this mechanical part during the transient. It is
calculated from the loads of mechanical origin comprising pressure, weight,
earthquake (inertial and movement of anchors), as well as the effect of thermal
expansion.

Annex Z H / 4  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition Subsection Z

Ke mech (n,m) : elastoplastic stress correction factor for the mechanical part calculated in
compliance with B 3234.6 b, from the maximum range Sn of the three differences
of linearised stresses during the whole of the two situations m and n, and the value
of Sm defined in B 3234.2.
Sp ther (p,q) : range of the thermal part of the total stresses (Sp)pq , between the two instants p
and q or the maximum value of this thermal part during the transient. It is
calculated from the loads of thermal origin comprising those of temperature
gradients in the walls and the temperature variations on either side of thickness
and material discontinuities. It is acceptable to take as the value of Sp ther, the
difference between the total Sp and Sp mech adopted above.
Ke ther (m,n) : elastoplastic stress correction factor for the thermal part, calculated in the case of
austenitic stainless steels, by the following formula:

 1 
1.86 1  
K e ther  max  1.66  ( S n / S m ) 

from the maximum range Sn of the three differences of linearised stresses during
the whole of the two situations m and n, and the value of Sm defined in B 3234.2.
For ferritic steels, the formula used shall be validated on a case by case basis.
It is acceptable not to impose a mechanical/thermal division but to apply the expression of the
factor Ke mech for correction of the total stress Sp.
An upper limit on the global effect of plastic stress corrections can be introduced if the results of
elastoplastic studies are available, obtained for similar geometric configurations subjected to
envelope transients and loads, increasing the loads and transients taken into account in the
behaviour analyses.

c) In the set of (S'alt) obtained in this way, the maximum value (Salt)kl is selected; its number of
occurrences is equal to:
(n)kl = min (nk, nl)
where nk and nl are the number of occurrences for load states k and l, respectively.
This value (S'alt)kl is introduced into the fatigue curves of annex Z I, with the value Sa = (S'alt)kl
as ordinate.
These fatigue curves give the number of cycles which would be allowable if only this type of
combination were considered.
The usage factor due to (S'alt)kl is equal to:
(n ) kl
( N) kl

 n° 137-2012 Annex Z H / 5
RCC-M - 2012 Edition Subsection Z

d) A new set of load states is established after eliminating states k or l figuring in the combination
selected in c) above, with the lowest number of occurrences; (n)kl occurrences are subtracted
from the remaining loading state.
The procedure is then repeated from step c) until all the numbers of occurrences assigned to the
load states are accounted for.

e) The cumulative usage factor is equal to the sum of the usage factors determined by applying the
procedure above.

Z H 220 SECOND ALTERNATIVE METHOD

This method is identical to the one presented in Z H 210 except that the elastoplastic stress
correction factor (Ke)pq covered in step b) of the procedure is determined as follows:
If n and m are the conditions to which states p and q belong, coefficient (Ke)pq is determined from
the maximum range of the linearised stress differences associated with the set of two conditions
n and m.
The rules of B 3234.6 are used in calculating (Ke)pq.

Z H 230 THIRD ALTERNATIVE METHOD

The times may be selected in step a) of the procedure by taking load states m and n maximizing in
each condition the (Salt) mn covered in step b) of the calculation any sub-cycles shall also give rise
to the selection of load state pairs.

Annex Z H / 6  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition Subsection Z

ANNEX Z M

ALTERNATIVE DESIGN RULES FOR NICKEL-BASED

ALLOY TUBES SUBJECTED TO EXTERNAL PRESSURE

Z M 100 GENERAL

The rules given in this paragraph may be used to determine the resistance of steam generator and
heat exchanger tubes subjected to external pressure and governed by the provisions of Section I.

Tolerances for deviation from true circular form are given in F 4217.

The possible corrosion allowance is excluded from the analysis (situation of a corroded or worn
component).

Z M 200 REQUIREMENTS ASSOCIATED WITH

THE VARIOUS CRITERIA LEVELS

Where compliance with criteria levels A, B, C, D is required, the maximum external pressure for the
condition considered shall not exceed the following values:
P
Level 0 criteria: a
2.5
P
Level C criteria: a
2
Level D criteria: 0.9 Pa
Test conditions: 0.8 Pa

Pa is the allowable external pressure determined in accordance with the procedure below for the
condition considered.

Z M 300 DESIGN METHOD

Z M 310 NOMENCLATURE
The symbols used in this paragraph are defined as follows:

D0 : Outside diameter of the tube under consideration; in mm.

 n° 137-2012 Annex Z M / 1
RCC-M - 2012 Edition Subsection Z

c1 : manufacturing under-tolerance (absolute value).

c2 : manufacturing over-tolerance (absolute value).
Dmin = D0 - c1 : Minimum outside diameter of the non-loaded tube, allowing for manufacturing
tolerances; in mm.
Dmax = D0 + c2 : Maximum outside diameter of the non-loaded tube, allowing for manufacturing
tolerances; in mm.
P : Maximum external pressure for the condition under consideration, in MPa.
Pa : Allowable external pressure for the condition under consideration, in MPa.
T : Minimum required thickness for the tube, excluding allowance, in mm.
D max  D min
Dave =  T : tube neutral axis diameter; in mm.
2

Z M 320 SCOPE OF THE METHOD

The rules below may be used as an alternative to those given in ZVI 131 for nickel-based alloy heat
exchanger tubes meeting the following conditions:
- medium thickness tubes, i.e. 14 < Dave/T < 22
- out-of-roundness, o, between 0 and 6%.

Z M 330 DETERMINATION OF THE ALLOWABLE PRESSURE

The minimum thickness of heat exchanger tubes is determined by selecting a wall thickness, T, and
then verifying it using the following procedure:

1) Determination of out-of-roundness, o:
D max  D min
o
D ave

2) Determination of the collapse pressure, Pa:

Sy 1
Pa  
D ave / T  
0.5  o . 0.005 .  D ave / T  2  0.386 . D ave / T 
3) Compare Pa and P.

If Pa is less than P, the procedure shall be repeated taking a higher value for T until Pa is at least
equal to P.

Annex Z M / 2  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition Subsection Z

ANNEX Z S

CONSTRUCTIVE REQUIREMENTS LINKED

TO IN-SERVICE INSPECTIONS
(FOR MECHANICAL COMPONENTS OF
PWR POWER PLANT NUCLEAR ISLANDS)

Z S 100 INTRODUCTION

This document deals with the design, manufacture and installation requirements to be taken into
account by the Manufacturers when producing mechanical equipment for the nuclear island which is
subjected to in-service inspections, so that the inspection programme implemented by the Plant
Operator can be performed in the optimum reliability and repeatability conditions.
These requirements are hereinafter referred to as "constructive requirements".
This document does not define the equipment concerned by the inspection programmes, nor the
content of the programmes.
The list of equipment concerned, as well as the type and scope of the inspections, shall be defined in
the purchase contract and the application conditions for these constructive requirements shall, if
necessary, be stipulated in the equipment procurement specifications.
The requirements of this Annex concern both the design, construction and inspection of the
mechanical components covered by the RCC-M, and the general installation or in-service inspection
itself, which do not fall within the scope of the RCC-M.
The text not concerning the mechanical components covered by the RCC-M is expressed in italics.

Z S 200 DESIGN

Z S 210 GENERAL
The design studies shall take account of the requirements of the volumetric examinations (in
particular radiographic and ultrasonic examination) scheduled for the in-service inspections.
In particular, the position of the piping welds shall be chosen in such a way as to allow sufficient
access to the welds (welds outside handling openings, etc.).
Accessibility (platform, catwalk, scaffolding, handling gear, etc.) and any special equipment
required for the examinations (special positioning of the gammagraph source for example) shall be
taken into account in the design studies.

 n° 137-2012 Annex Z S / 1
RCC-M - 2012 Edition Subsection Z

Z S 220 CONSTRUCTIVE REQUIREMENTS LINKED TO COMPONENTS

Z S 221 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS CONCERNING
IN-SERVICE INSPECTIONS
The lagging shall comply with the requirements of chapter Z S 500 and shall be removable when
volumetric examination of welds or when external non-volumetric examination are prescribed.
Equipment shall be fitted with manholes and handholes allowing access to the internal walls,
internal equipment or tube bundle.
The size of manholes and handholes shall be such as to allow insertion of inspection and remote
control apparatus as well as entry of an Inspector wearing contaminated environment protective
clothing where necessary. Their diameters shall be specified in the equipment specification.
Radiographic examination hole plugs:
These leaktight devices are designed for the introduction of a gammagraph source inside piping in
sections classified as "non-separable" as defined in the equipment specification. They are positioned
100 mm from the weld to be subjected to radiographic examination and should allow four
consecutive disassemblies, unless otherwise specified in the equipment specification.
The opening passage diameter shall be 25 mm minimum.

Z S 222 SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS CONCERNING PERIODIC RETESTS

Recipients, pipes or shut-off valves subjected to periodic retests shall be:
- fully drainable,
- dryable if so mentioned in the equipment specification,
- fitted with a pressure tap (one per circuit) and a vent for complete evacuation of gases (during
periodic retests).
Recipients and pipes shall be located between shutoff valves sufficiently close to them and capable
of withstanding at least the test pressure.

Annex Z S / 2  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition Subsection Z

Z S 230 CONSTRUCTIVE REQUIREMENTS LINKED TO

TAPERING (TAPERS, PROFILE CHANGES)
Height differences shall be kept to a minimum over the areas examined (US, volumetric and
radiographic examinations).
In the case of radiographic examination, the maximum slope of 1/4 shall be respected.
A lower value may be required by the equipment specification, in particular for reactor vessel and
steam generator connection welds.

Z S 300 MANUFACTURE

Z S 310 SCOPE OF AREAS TO BE EXAMINED

The general rules given in the various paragraphs of SECTION IV, S 7700 of the RCC-M shall at
least apply to in-service inspections.
Nonetheless, special requirements specific to each type of equipment are given in this annex, as are
the steps to be taken if access is limited.

Z S 320 IDENTIFICATION - MARKING

Z S 321 GENERAL
The general requirements are given in chapters B and C 1300, MC 3149 and F 2000 of this Code.
The marking shall comprise:
- the identification number,
- the references.

 n° 137-2012 Annex Z S / 3
RCC-M - 2012 Edition Subsection Z

The location of the marking and the special requirements concerning it are given in the marking
specifications.
The marking shall be:
- permanent and in accordance with the requirements of F 2000,
- applied to the equipment in accordance with the marking drawings,
- visible and perfectly legible in normal examination conditions, prior to installation of the
lagging.

Z S 322 IDENTIFICATION NUMBER

All apparatus or areas subjected to in-service inspection shall have an identification number
(alphanumeric characters) chosen by the Manufacturer so as to provide clear and unambiguous
identification of the item concerned.

Z S 323 REFERENCE
All welds shall be referenced, in order to:
- establish the position of the weld,
- establish the width of the weld for accessible flush welds subject to inspection,
- indicate the direction of fluid flow,
- establish the position of the 0-point starting from which indications are recorded,
- indicate the direction in which indications are to be recorded.

This reference is represented by:

- a point for auxiliary piping, taps, radiographic examination hole plugs and supports,

- a point, a V-line and radiographic markers for primary circuit piping (hot/cold branches,
U-branches and expansion lines),
- a V-line or other method and radiographic markers for apparatus.
Note: The radiographic markers (radiograph order number) applied at the manufacturing stage concerning either piping
elements (cast elbows for example), or apparatus (primary pump bodies for example), or piping and apparatus
welds, should not be removed.

Z S 324 MARKING DRAWING

Drawings shall be made indicating the location of all markings and their title, as well as the location
of the reference points.

Annex Z S / 4  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition Subsection Z

Z S 330 RECORDING OF WELD BEADS

For accessible, flush and volumetrically examined welds, a dimensioned record of the weld beads,
including the overlap passes, shall be made before the beads are ground. The record shall give the
position of the theoretical axis of the weld and the distance measured between one edge of the bead
and the punched V-line serving as the datum.

Z S 340 SURFACE CONDITION

Z S 341 EXTERNAL SURFACES
- For welds thicker than 50 mm, the surfaces shall be made flush by appropriate machining.
For welds of thickness equal to or less than 50 mm, the surface condition required depends on the
inspections to be carried out:
. for liquid penetrant, magnetic particle and radiographic inspections, the surfaces shall be
smoothed. Smoothing is not imposed for TIG welds if their surface condition is compatible
with the requirements of paragraphs MC 3134 and MC 5143, and of subchapter MC 4200,
concerning the inspections to be performed.
. for ultrasonic examination, the surfaces shall be made flush by appropriate machining. The
surface roughness of the examination area shall be verified: Ra  6.3 µm.
- In all cases shot-blasting of the areas to be examined is forbidden.

Z S 342 INTERNAL SURFACES

Where accessible, the weld surface shall be treated in accordance with the requirements of ZS 341.
For each joint, the preparation concerns the area to be examined or that limited by the first
discontinuity.

Z S 343 SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS

- Pressuriser expansion line: the weld beads shall be flush.
- Eddy current examination of the steam generator tubes: the requirements of paragraphs 5 and 6
of product procurement specifications M 4101 and M 4105 of this Code shall apply.
- Cladding: the surface of the cladding shall be finished according to chapters S 7452 and S 7460
such as to allow the performance of the non-destructive examinations stipulated in the in-service
inspections. In addition, for the pressure vessel, the furrows between adjacent passes shall be
eliminated.

 n° 137-2012 Annex Z S / 5
RCC-M - 2012 Edition Subsection Z

Z S 350 REPAIRS
All repairs concerning a part of a component subjected to in-service inspection shall be recorded in
a repair file, even if the repair complies with the requirement of the contractual documents
(see A 3801 III - Note 3).
When repair welds are made, it must be possible to identify clearly the location of the repaired area
in relation of the existing markings (see Z S 320).
For castings, a map of excavations involved in "major" repairs shall be supplied (see M 3000 -
product procurement specification for castings).

Z S 360 REFERENCE PARTS

The following shall be performed:
- for US and Eddy Current examination and at the procurement stage, provide reference blocks and
tubes required for calibration of the scheduled examinations, as specified in chapters MC 2134
and MC 6134 of SECTION III,
- ensure that these reference parts are correctly made (same material, same heat treatment stage as
the components to be inspected).

Z S 400 GENERAL INSTALLATION (ERECTION)

The following requirements first of all apply not to the equipment Manufacturer, but to the person in
charge of the General Installation.

Z S 410 CLEARANCES
Z S 411 GENERAL
There should be a sufficient clearance around the areas to be inspected for positioning of the
necessary reference blocks and inspection, handling and access equipment.
In particular, there shall be sufficient clearance around manholes for insertion and removal of the
inspection equipment and the necessary handling gear.

Z S 412 DIRECT VISUAL EXAMINATION

The requirements concerning visual examination, described in chapter MC 7143, shall apply to the
examinations scheduled in the in-service inspections;

Annex Z S / 6  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition Subsection Z

The following additional requirements shall apply:

* Shall be compatible with the distance for lagging shrinkage

FIGURE Z S 412.1

Z S 413 REMOTE VISUAL EXAMINATIONS

It is sometimes necessary to use more elaborate instruments for certain checks (closed-circuit TV,
telescope, borescope, etc.). If no special systems are provided (for example guide rails), special
accessways should be fitted out for passage of these instruments.
For example:
- Optical systems: cylinder of dia. 80 mm,
- TV: Cylinder of dia. 180 mm and length 900 mm,
- Lighting to be installed.
Note: For direct or remote visual examinations, ensure that the level of lighting on the examined surface is greater
than 350 lux (see MC 7243).

Z S 414 SURFACE EXAMINATION - LIQUID PENETRANT

AND MAGNETIC PARTICLE
It must be possible for the operator to move 600 mm from the surface to be examined. The
requirements concerning liquid penetrant and magnetic particle examinations are described in
chapters MC 4000 and MC 5000 respectively.

Z S 415 MANUAL VOLUMETRIC EXAMINATIONS

For US examination, it must be possible for the operator to look at the surface to be examined and
the control screen alternately and in acceptable conditions. For example, an ultrasonic examination
box is a rectangle with dimensions of about 300 x 300 x 500 mm.

 n° 137-2012 Annex Z S / 7
RCC-M - 2012 Edition Subsection Z

For the gammagraphy inspection, the location envisaged for installation of the inspection
equipment should not be further than 15 meters from the area to be inspected (maximum length of
the gammatron transfer cable with its source ejection device).

Z S 416 MECHANICAL VOLUMETRIC EXAMINATIONS

Relatively inaccessible components or parts of components require a remote controlled volumetric
examination.
This remote control can be made easier by devices such as a mechanically attached circular guide
rail, or fitting out of a sufficiently large area for movement of a robot.
As a general rule, it is forbidden to weld the guide device to the equipment itself. If welding does
prove necessary, it shall comply with the requirements of A 4252. The design of this device attached
to the wall of the equipment shall be such that it does not cause crushing, excessive local bending
stresses or dangerous temperature gradients in the wall. It is important for attachments of this type
to be designed in such a way as to minimise concentrations of stresses if the number of stress cycles,
due both to pressure and thermal effects, is relatively high for the planned lifetime of the equipment.
Special case of containment bushing:
An example of the clearances to be obtained for pipe outside diameters greater than 300 mm are
given on the following figure.

FIGURE Z S 416

Annex Z S / 8  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition Subsection Z

Z S 420 ACCESSIBILITY, HEALTH PHYSICS

During the definition of the General Installation, the general and particular protection aspects
should be taken into consideration and a certain number of requirements established.
The main requirements concern the following points:
- Whenever possible, provide for permanent protection in the vicinity of the radioactive apparatus
to be inspected. Otherwise, mobile protection systems must be installed if the reduction in the
dose received during installation and removal of the protection system remains lower than the
dose received during the inspection operations (positive dosimetry balance). In this case,
installation of suitable platforms, and the corresponding storage area, may be provided in the
vicinity of certain radioactive components.
- Provide adequate lighting, in accordance with MC 7243.2. The lighting shall be permanently
fixed in high dose rate areas if the dose rate is greater than 0.14 10-6 Sv/s (50 mrem/hour).
- In general, the installation systems shall allow access as direct as possible to the areas
concerned by the inspections in order to minimise radiation exposure times.
- Provide electrical terminal boards (power supply, measurements, etc.) in areas subject to as low
a level of exposure as possible, to enable the apparatus to be connected prior to inspection.

Z S 430 SCAFFOLDING AND FIXED CATWALKS

Scaffolding and catwalks shall be determined according to inspection length, frequency and
procedures (e.g.: heavy and bulky inspection apparatus: accelerator, gammatron, etc.).
The operator shall forward in good time the characteristics of the equipment to be brought in.

Z S 440 SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS FOR PIPING

Z S 441 GENERAL
The following requirements shall be applied in order to facilitate the scheduled specific inspections,
unless impossible, in which case, special steps are to be taken (taps, elbows, supports, etc.).

Z S 442 CLEARANCES
After removal of the lagging:
- the axial clearance shall be as shown in figures Z S 442.1, Z S 442.2.1 and Z S 442.2.3.

 n° 137-2012 Annex Z S / 9
RCC-M - 2012 Edition Subsection Z

Z S 442.1 For all examinations except ultrasonic examination:

FIGURE Z S 442.1

Z S 442.2 Ultrasonic examination

FIGURE Z S 442.2.1

FIGURE Z S 442.2.2

Annex Z S / 10  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition Subsection Z

Z S 443 ERECTION
a) Piping alone

FIGURE Z S 443.2 FIGURE Z S 443.2

Clearance of 600 mm to facilitate access is required to check the hidden part of the welded joint

FIGURE Z S 443.3 FIGURE Z S 443.4

b) Pipe bundles
The pipes to be examined shall always be around the edges of a pipe bundle and in the lower
part if the bundle is suspended and the upper part if the bundle is floor mounted, so that
inspection can be conducted from a platform or from the floor.

 n° 137-2012 Annex Z S / 11
RCC-M - 2012 Edition Subsection Z

FIGURE Z S 443.5

The distance values given on the diagrams are the minimum values to be respected whatever
the pipe diameter. If the pipe to be inspected runs parallel with a lagged pipe, the distances
shown on the following sketch should be respected.

FIGURE Z S 443.6

c) Hopper piping
As a general rule, the hopper piping should be clear of all obstacles 250 mm on either side of
the outside surface of the hopper.

FIGURE Z S 443.7

Annex Z S / 12  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition Subsection Z

Z S 500 LAGGING

Z S 510 SCOPE
The rules of this paragraph apply to lagging of equipment or parts of equipment subjected to
periodic inspections or visits.

Z S 520 PRINCIPLES
The components or parts of equipment identified above shall be fitted with removable lagging boxes
designed for easy removal and installation.
In order to reduce the working time in the inspected areas, in particular for contaminated or
irradiated components, the following precautions should be taken:
- the various parts of the removable boxes are interconnected by lockable, snap fasteners with
reinforced attachment points,
- the unit weight of a lagging module should not exceed 25 kg,
- the removable parts shall be rigid: a lack of rigidity is likely to make installation difficult.
Furthermore, removal of any part should not cause an adjacent part to slip (for example with
vertical piping),
- the various removable lagging elements should be stackable without any risk of damaging the
shells. It is therefore advisable to plan the premises in such a way as to provide an adequate
removal area unlikely to hinder subsequent operations (inspection, maintenance),
- the lagging support clips should be situated so that they are outside the areas subjected to
periodic inspection examination,
- the removal elements should have no projecting parts. The carrying handles should for example
be foldable,
- the removable lagging elements should carry external markings for easy correspondence between
the elements and the welds to be checked, and they must be easily identifiable for quick
reinstallation in the case of switchgear lagging (tank bottom).

Z S 530 SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS FOR PIPING

TRACING REQUIREMENTS
Recap:
- Straight piping: disassembly must be possible in any direction perpendicular to the pipe axis.
- Elbows: the directions to be cleared are perpendicular to the elbow plane.
- Taps must be at the junction between two removable lagging shells.

 n° 137-2012 Annex Z S / 13
RCC-M - 2012 Edition Subsection Z

The clearance required for inspection shall comply with the requirements of paragraph ZS 441.
Applications:

FIGURE Z S 530.1

- In areas where there is a risk of spraying, the lagging should be sealed around the element joints,
wherever possible ensuring that they are on the sides rather than on the top.

FIGURE Z S 530.2

The supports shall be designed to prevent all penetration of water into the lagging.

Annex Z S / 14  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition Subsection Z

Z S 600 PUMPS AND VALVES

Z S 610 GENERAL
The general rules of the previous chapter shall apply to the valving subject to testing.

Z S 620 SPECIAL RULES APPLICABLE TO PRIMARY CIRCUIT PUMPS

To allow performance of ultrasonic examination during in-service inspections, holes shall be
provided for passage of probes through the motororised pump flywheels.

Z S 700 SUPPORTS

- For supports subjected to metrological examination, and in addition to ensuring that the lagging
is removable, provide easy access to these components.
- For those subjected to visual examination, the control indices shall be visible.
- As part of the systematic maintenance operations, the supports to be checked shall be separate
and of simple design (hangers are preferred over skid-type supports).
- Self-blocking devices shall be easily accessible for removal or replacement. Provide the
appropriate lifting means accordingly.
- Pipe welds shall be positioned so that their inspection is not impeded by the presence of a
support.
- Lagging shall be removable over an area of at least 150 mm on either side of the attachment or
bearing point of the inspectable supports.

 n° 137-2012 Annex Z S / 15
RCC-M - 2012 Edition Subsection Z

Annex Z S / 16  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition Subsection Z

ANNEX ZY

PROVISIONS APPLICABLE UNDER THE ORDER DATED

12 DECEMBER 2005 RELATING TO NUCLEAR
PRESSURE EQUIPMENT

ZY 100 PURPOSE

The chapter ZY 200 of this annex, which is a supplement to annex ZZ, shows correspondences
between the essential safety requirements of the order dated 12/12/2005 (ESPN) and the provisions
of the RCC-M dealing with the subject. The "observations" column gives the requirements that are
not covered directly by the RCC-M but which must be stated in the contractual documents between
the Customer and the Manufacturer as laid down by the RCC-M. Such contractual documents are
usually the equipment specifications.
The chapters ZY 300 to ZY 1000 define the main additional provisions which correspond to the
scope of the code and are to be taken into account when the essential safety requirements of the
Order dated 12 December 2005, relating to Nuclear Pressure Equipment (ESPN), become
obligatory.
This Annex applies entirely or partially, in addition to Annex ZZ, in accordance with the terms of
the contract and the equipment specifications defined between the Operator and the Manufacturer(s).

 n° 137-2012 Annex ZY / 1
RCC-M - 2012 Edition Subsection Z

ZY 200 CORRESPONDENCE BETWEEN THE ESSENTIAL

REQUIREMENTS OF THE ORDER DATED 12/12/2005
AND THE RCC-M.
ZY 210 – Correspondence between the essential requirements of Appendix 1
of the Order dated 12/12/2005 and the various sections of the RCC-M.

RCC-M
No. REQUIREMENTS OBSERVATIONS
Reference

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
ESSENTIAL SAFETY REQUIREMENTS Level N1 equipment is covered by
APPLICABLE TO NUCLEAR PRESSURE the provisions that apply to class 1
EQUIPMENT IN CATEGORIES I TO IV components in the
AND LEVEL N1 EXCLUDING CERTAIN RCC-M.
PIPING

The essential safety requirements applicable to The main primary system piping of
nuclear pressure equipment in categories I to IV ND  50 and the other piping of ND
and level N1, excluding the piping of the main  100 (main secondary system) may
primary system of the nuclear steam supply be subject to the provisions that apply
system of nominal dimensions ND up to and to class 2 components.
including 50 and the other piping up to and
including ND 100, are the requirements given in
appendix 1 of the aforementioned Decree dated
13 December 1999, detailed and supplemented as
follows.

1 Introduction and general information

The plant operator must provide the manufacturer The provisions concerned must be
with a description of all the conditions in which stipulated in the equipment
the equipment may be placed in line with the specifications.
safety report of the installation for which it is
intended, together with the associated files and
all the loads to be taken into consideration for
each condition.
The manufacturer must proceed with the hazard ZY 300
analysis covered in paragraph 3 of the ZZ 300
preliminary remarks of appendix 1 of the
aforementioned Decree dated 13 December 1999,
taking account of the data provided by the plant
operator and the radioactive nature of the fluid it
will contain.

2 Design
The equipment must be designed to minimize the B 3000
risk of loss of integrity by accounting for possible with the
alterations in materials. following
stipulations:
The design is based on suitable measures to ZZ 300
reduce the risk of failure and on a calculation
method that aims to check that the design does
guarantee the required level of safety.

Annex ZY / 2  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition Subsection Z

RCC-M
No. REQUIREMENTS OBSERVATIONS
Reference
These measures are implemented so as to reduce
the risks related to:
- low-cycle or high-cycle thermal fatigue;
- different thermal behavior of materials that have
been welded together;
- vibration fatigue;
- local pressure peaks;
B 3131
- creep; B 3622.5
- stress concentrations; ZY 500 The RCC-M applies within the
temperature limits given in appendix
- corrosion phenomena;
Z I, which corresponds to negligible
- harmful local thermo-hydraulic phenomena; B 3171 creep.
- draining of equipment in the case of piping B 3650
break.
The calculation method may be supplemented by Appendix Requirements to be given in the
an experimental design method. ZII equipment specifications on the basis
of safety studies.
The design takes into account ageing due to B 2000
irradiation. B 3000
Appendix
ZG

3 Manufacture
3.1 Forging and casting operations Section II The criteria must be stated on a case
by case basis in the TMPs of the
Welding repairs of casting defects after the last equipment concerned.
quality heat treatment are limited by criteria
specified by the manufacturer before the start of
casting operations.

The processes used to manufacture forged

components must ensure sufficient hot working
and adequate inclusion cleanliness, defined by
the manufacturer before the start of forging
operations. The level of inclusion cleanliness is
checked at the end of manufacturing as required.

3.2 Technical qualification

The manufacturer shall, prior to manufacture, M140 Qualification according to M 140

identify components where there is a risk of shall be performed depending on the
having heterogeneous characteristics due to the results of the part manufacture risk
elaboration of materials or the complexity of the analysis.
foreseen manufacturing operations. The set of
manufacturing operations must be technically
qualified.

 n° 137-2012 Annex ZY / 3
RCC-M - 2012 Edition Subsection Z

RCC-M
No. REQUIREMENTS OBSERVATIONS
Reference
The aim of this qualification is to ensure that
components produced under the conditions and
according to the methods laid down by the
qualification have the required characteristics.

3.3 Permanent assemblies and weld-deposited

cladding

Welds in areas subjected to significant irradiation B 3343

during operation are to be limited as much as
possible.

The provisions of the weld-deposited cladding S 3000

procedures aim at avoiding disbondment and the
appearance of cracking inside and under the
cladding.

Welding procedures including weld-deposited ZZ 400

cladding and the personnel implementing them
shall be approved by a notified body as specified
in the aforementioned Article 12 of directive
97/23/CE dated 29 May 1997.

Socket-weld piping connections are prohibited. B 3661.2 Socket-welds are only allowed
for diameters below 25 mm, i.e.
For welded joints, the joint coefficient is taken B 3350 for equipment for which N2
to be 1. requirements apply.

3.4 Non-destructive tests

The purpose of non-destructive tests is to detect Section II ;

manufacturing defects specified as unacceptable S 7700
Non-destructive tests on permanent assemblies
are performed by qualified personnel of a suitable
degree of ability that have been approved by a MC 8010;
third party body acknowledged as specified in the ZZ 480
aforementioned Article 13 of directive 97/23/CE
dated 29 May 1997.

Unless special justification is given:

- permanent assemblies having to withstand S 7700

pressure shall be subject to a complete
inspection of their volume;

- casting components shall be subject to a M 1111

complete inspection of their volume; M 1112
M 1114
M 1401
M 3401
M 3402
M 3403
M 3406

Annex ZY / 4  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition Subsection Z

RCC-M
No. REQUIREMENTS OBSERVATIONS
Reference
- an inspection of each of the final surfaces of the Appendix
components is performed using suitable means. ZY

3.5 Traceability

Traceability requirements apply to welding A 1300

materials and other assembly materials.

3.6 Final inspection

The hydrostatic pressure test, or strength test B 5000

performed with a fluid other than water for
equipment that should not contain water, is
performed on each item of equipment. It is
considered satisfactory if the pressure is
withstood without leakage or permanent
deformation visible in a direct visual inspection.

3.7 Marking and labeling

The rules on marking set by aforementioned ZZ 600

Decree dated 13 December 1999 apply with the ZY 600
exception of the rules on “CE” marking.

3.8 Operating instructions

Pressure equipment is accompanied by an ZY 500

instruction manual. ZZ 500
The instruction manual provides the specific
characteristics of the design that have a decisive
influence on the life of the equipment. These
characteristics include at least:
- for creep, the theoretical number of hours of The RCC-M applies within the
operation at specified temperatures; temperature limits given in appendix
Z I, which correspond to negligible
- for fatigue, the theoretical number of cycles at creep.
specified stress levels;

- for corrosion phenomena, the corrosion

allowance or characteristics of corrosion
protection;

- for thermal ageing, the theoretical number of

hours of operation at specified temperatures;

- for ageing due to irradiation, the theoretical B 3100

maximum fluence at specified irradiation
temperatures

 n° 137-2012 Annex ZY / 5
RCC-M - 2012 Edition Subsection Z

RCC-M
No. REQUIREMENTS OBSERVATIONS
Reference

4 Materials

Unless special justification is given the materials A 1100

are selected on the grounds of significant
experience of their satisfactory behavior during
manufacture and in service.

The materials should not in themselves lead to B 2200

excessive limitations of the possibilities of
manufacturing examination or in service
inspection.

The material manufacturer must draw up a A 3300

certificate for each material with a specific Section II
product check certifying conformity with the
requirements.

Materials with a ferritic structure other than Section II

bolding, including those in welds (acceptance
tests and weld test coupons), shall have an
elongation at rupture at ambient temperature of
20% or more, an impact energy on ISO V test-
piece at 0 °C of 40 J or more and, unless special
justification is given relating particularly to their
ductility, weldability and machinability, a tensile
strength at ambient temperature limited to 800
MPa. The limit of 40 J is increased to 60 J for
materials whose tensile strength at ambient
temperature is 600 MPa or more.

Materials with an austenitic or austenoferritic Section II

structure other than bolding shall have outside ZY 800
welds an elongation at rupture at ambient
temperature of 35% or more, an impact energy on
ISO V test-piece at ambient temperature of 100 J
or more and, unless special justification is given
relating particularly to their ductility, weldability
and machinability, a tensile strength at ambient
temperature limited to 800 MPa. There is no need
to check impact energy if rupture elongation is
45% or more. For welding material, the criterion
of 35% is reduced to 25% and the criterion of
100 J is replaced by a criterion chosen in
accordance with the capacities of the process as
established particularly by its qualification; this
criterion is not lower than 60 J on acceptance test
and 50 J on weld test coupons.

Annex ZY / 6  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition Subsection Z

RCC-M
No. REQUIREMENTS OBSERVATIONS
Reference
Materials with a martensitic structure other than Section II
bolding shall have an elongation at rupture at
ambient temperature of 14% or more, an impact
energy on ISO V test-piece at 0°C of 40 J or
more, a suitable transition temperature and,
unless special justification is given relating
particularly to their ductility and weldability, a
ratio between the value of the yield strength at
ambient temperature and that of the tensile
strength at ambient temperature of no more
than 0.85.

Bolding materials shall have an elongation at Section II

rupture at ambient temperature of 12% or more,
an impact energy on ISO V test-piece at 0 °C of
40 J or more and, if the elongation at rupture at
ambient temperature is less than 14%, necking of
at least 0.45. For materials with an austenitic
structure the impact energy criterion of 40 J at
0 °C may be replaced by a criterion of 50 J at
ambient temperature.

ZY 220 – Correspondence between essential requirements of Appendix 2

of the Order dated 12/12/2005 and the sections of the RCC-M

RCC-M
No. REQUIREMENTS OBSERVATIONS
Reference

ESSENTIAL SAFETY REQUIREMENTS

APPLICABLE TO NUCLEAR PRESSURE
EQUIPMENT IN CATEGORIES I TO IV
AND LEVEL N2 AS WELL AS TO
CERTAIN PIPING IN CATEGORIES I AND
II AND LEVEL N1
The essential safety requirements applicable to Level 2 equipment is covered by the
nuclear pressure equipment in categories I to IV provisions applicable to class 2
and level N2, the piping of the main primary components in the RCC-M.
system of the nuclear steam supply system of
nominal dimensions ND up to and including 50
and the other category I or II piping and level N1
of ND up to and including 100 are the
requirements given in appendix 1 of the
aforementioned Decree dated 13 December 1999,
detailed and supplemented as follows.

 n° 137-2012 Annex ZY / 7
RCC-M - 2012 Edition Subsection Z

RCC-M
No. REQUIREMENTS OBSERVATIONS
Reference
1 Introduction and general information

. The plant operator must provide the manufacturer

with a description of all the conditions in which
the equipment may be placed in line with the
safety report of the installation for which it is
intended, together with the associated files and
all the loads to be taken into consideration for
each condition.
The manufacturer must proceed with the hazard ZZ 300
analysis covered in paragraph 3 of the ZY 300
preliminary remarks of appendix 1 of the
aforementioned Decree dated 13 December 1999,
taking account of the data provided by the plant
operator and the radioactive nature of the fluid it
will contain.

2 Design

The equipment is designed to minimize the risk C 3000

of loss of integrity by accounting for possible ZZ 300
alterations in materials.

The design must take aging due to irradiation into B 3000 Note: does not apply to EPR
account.

3 Manufacture

Unless special justification is given the S 7000

permanent assemblies having to withstand
pressure shall be subject to a complete inspection
of their volume.

All weld ends and equipment flanges obtained by Section II TPSs relative to foundry products
casting are subjected to a suitable non-destructive
test.

The rules on marking set by aforementioned ZZ 600

Decree dated 13 December 1999 apply with the ZY 600
exception of the rules on “CE” marking.

4 Materials
Materials with a ferritic structure other than Section II
bolding are considered sufficiently ductile if their
elongation after rupture in a traction test carried
out according to a standardized procedure is at
least 14% and if their impact energy on ISO V
test-piece at 0 °C is 27 J or more.

Annex ZY / 8  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition Subsection Z

RCC-M
No. REQUIREMENTS OBSERVATIONS
Reference

Materials with an austenitic structure other than ZY 800

bolding are considered sufficiently ductile if their
elongation after rupture in a traction test carried
out according to a standardized procedure is at
least 25% and if their impact energy on ISO V
test-piece at 20 °C is at least 60 J or, for welding
material, 50 J on test coupons; where rupture
elongation is at least 45%, and for nickel-based
alloys, checking impact energy is not necessary.

Bolding materials shall have an elongation after

rupture at ambient temperature of at least 12%,
an impact energy on ISO V test-piece at 0 °C of
40 J or more and, if elongation after rupture at
ambient temperature is less than 14%, necking of
at least 0.45. For materials with an austenitic
structure the impact bending energy criterion of
40 J at 0 °C may be replaced by a criterion of
50 J at ambient temperature.

ZY 230 – Correspondence between essential requirements of Appendix 3 of the

Order dated 12/12/2005 and the sections of the RCC-M

RCC-M
No. REQUIREMENTS OBSERVATIONS
Reference

ESSENTIAL SAFETY REQUIREMENTS

APPLICABLE TO NUCLEAR PRESSURE
EQUIPMENT IN CATEGORIES I TO IV
AND LEVEL N3
Level 3 equipment is covered by the
The essential safety requirements applicable to
provisions applicable to class 3
nuclear pressure equipment in categories I to IV
components in the RCC-M.
and level N3 are the requirements listed in
appendix 1 of the aforementioned Decree dated
13 December 1999, detailed and supplemented as
follows.

 n° 137-2012 Annex ZY / 9
RCC-M - 2012 Edition Subsection Z

RCC-M
No. REQUIREMENTS OBSERVATIONS
Reference

1 Introduction and general information

The plant operator must provide the manufacturer
with a description of all the conditions in which
the equipment may be placed in line with the
safety report of the installation for which it is
intended, together with the associated files and
all the loads to be taken into consideration for
each condition.

The manufacturer must proceed with the hazard ZZ 300

analysis covered in paragraph 3 of the ZY 300
preliminary remarks of appendix 1 of the
aforementioned Decree dated 13 December 1999,
taking account of the data provided by the plant
operator and the radioactive nature of the fluid it
will contain.

2 Design

The equipment is designed to minimize the risk D 3000 Any additional requirements must be
of loss of integrity by accounting for possible listed in the equipment specifications
alterations in materials.

3 Manufacture

Welds required to withstand pressure are

S 7000
subjected to suitable non-destructive tests.

The rules on marking set by aforementioned ZZ 600

Decree dated 13 December 1999 apply with the ZZ 600
exception of the rules on “CE” marking.

ZY 240 – Correspondence between essential requirements of Appendix 4 of the

Order dated 12/12/2005 and the sections of the RCC-M

RCC-M
No. REQUIREMENTS OBSERVATIONS
Reference

INSTRUCTIONS FOR ESTABLISHING

RADIATION PROTECTION
REQUIREMENTS

1 Materials

The choice of materials is made taking into B, C,

consideration their possible activation and the D 2000
release of corrosion products that could, Section II
following activation, require radiation protection ZY 1000
measures during operation.

Annex ZY / 10  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition Subsection Z

RCC-M
No. REQUIREMENTS OBSERVATIONS
Reference

2 Design

The design of all equipment that will be subject Appendix

during use to corrosion, erosion, internal ZY
abrasion or other chemical attack must be
subjected to appropriate measures in order to
limit the release of products as far as possible
and prevent their activation.

3 Inspection and maintenance methods

The equipment is designed such that all the Appendix

operations required in application of title III of ZY and ZS
the Decree dated 12 December 2005 applicable
in France may be carried out in such a way as to
ensure, while complying with the principles and
rules laid down by the French Code of Public
Health and Labor Laws, the radioprotection of
persons implementing or supervising the said
operations.

ZY 300 HAZARDS ANALYSIS

For ESPN, the hazards analysis required in ZZ 300 must take into account the data provided by the
Operator, in compliance with the safety report and the associated documents. The hazards analysis
must also take into account the radioactive nature of the fluid which it will contain.

ZY 400 ACTIONS BY NOTIFIED BODIES, ACCEPTED BODIES,

ACCEPTED ORGANIZATIONS AND RECOGNIZED
THIRD PARTY ORGANIZATIONS
Accepted organizations (respectively inspection bodies) are the notified bodies under the terms of
article 12 of Directive 97/23/CE (respectively the users inspectorates under the terms of article 14 of
Directive 97/23/CE) and accepted by the national authority for conformity evaluation of nuclear
pressure equipment (ESPN).
For level 1 pressure equipment, the welding procedures, including weld-deposited cladding, and the
personnel applying the procedures, must be approved by a notified body under the terms of
article 12 of directive 97/23/CE dated 29 May 1997. For other equipment, approval may be granted
by a recognized third party organization under the terms of article 13 of Directive 97/23/CE.
Non destructive tests on permanent assemblies must be performed by qualified personnel, to the
appropriate degree of ability, approved by a recognized third party organization under the terms of
article 13 of directive 97/23/CE dated 29 May 1997.

 n° 137-2012 Annex ZY / 11
RCC-M - 2012 Edition Subsection Z

For category I to IV pressure equipments manufacturer is required to perform a particular material

appraisal. For category III and IV equipment under directive 97/23/CE dated 29 May 1997, the
particular material appraisal is approved by an accepted body responsible for conformity evaluation
procedures for the pressure equipment

ZY 500 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS

In addition to the instructions specified in ZZ 500, the following particular design characteristics
which determine the service life of the equipment shall be mentioned for level N1 equipment:
- for pressure and temperature in particular, including local pressure peaks;
- for creep, where applicable, the theoretical number of hours of operation at specified
temperatures;
- for fatigue, the theoretical number of cycles at specified stress levels;
- for corrosion phenomena, the corrosion allowance or characteristics of corrosion protection;
- for thermal ageing, the theoretical number of hours of operation at specified temperatures;
- for ageing due to irradiation, the theoretical maximum fluence at specified irradiation
temperatures.

ZY 600 IDENTIFICATION OF EQUIPMENT

Except for EC conformity marking (for equipment items other than valves), the provisions of
ZY 600 relating to marking shall apply.

ZY 700 EQUIPMENT AND ASSEMBLIES

All surfaces of level N1 components shall be examined using appropriate means. The examination
may be anticipated prior to final inspection. The equipment manufacturer shall provide specific
justification should this examination not be possible.
If it is possible to carry out hydrostatic tests on assemblies without harmful effects, the tests must be
carried out in accordance with the provisions of ZZ 700.

Annex ZY / 12  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition Subsection Z

ZY 800 MATERIALS

With regard to level 1 equipment, the equipment manufacturer must indicate:

- the rate of repair by welding after the last quality heat treatment for castings,
- for forged parts, the acceptable reduction ratio and inclusion cleanliness level of the material
depending on its usage.
For grades intended for pressure components covered by product procurement specifications (PPS)
M 4102, M 3206, M 3208, the equipment specification shall set out additional requirements.
For non-work-hardened austenitic stainless steel grades covered by PPS M 5110 and M 5140, an
impact test shall be required for levels 1 and 2 equipment.
Materials procured from stock as per M 111.2 and intended for N1 components shall meet the
following requirement: if the manufacturer is in possession of an NF EN 10204 type 3.1 or 3.2
certificate from the materials manufacturer, he may certify compliance of the material on condition
that, in the case of unmeasured values and of values guaranteed for the purpose of certification not
meeting ESPN decree guarantee requirements, he bases his decision on the results of additional tests
performed on the product, such tests being performed in sufficient number and on suitable sampling.

ZY 900 SMALL COMPONENTS

The small components referred to in A 4250 consist of pressure equipment referred to in:
- article 3.3 of directive 97/23/CE for components classified N3 under the terms of the Order dated
12/12/2005,
- article 3.3 of directive 97/23/CE for group 1 fluids for components classified N1 and N2 under
the terms of the Order dated 12/12/2005.
Level N1 and N2 small components are subject to the requirements of a professional guide
forwarded to the national authority. The provisions in subsection E are intended to meet these
requirements.

ZY 1000 RADIATION PROTECTION

The requirements intended to limit the release of products and prevent activation insofar as possible
are dealt with in a professional guide forwarded to the national authority.
This professional guide also covers the provisions intended to incorporate at the design stage, the
radiation protection of personnel performing or monitoring inspection operations or carrying out
maintenance upon equipment in operation.

 n° 137-2012 Annex ZY / 13
RCC-M - 2012 Edition Subsection Z

Annex ZY / 14  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition Subsection Z

ANNEX ZZ

PROVISIONS APPLICABLE BY WAY OF ANNEX 1 OF

DIRECTIVE 97/23/CE AND ITS TRANSPOSITION INTO
FRENCH LAW
(DECREE 99-1046 DATED 13/12/1999)
ZZ 100 PURPOSE

The chapter ZZ 200 of this annex gives the correspondence between the essential safety
requirements of the Annex 1of the directive 97/23/CE (PED) and the provisions of the RCC-M
dealing with the subject. The "observations" column gives the requirements that are not covered
directly by the RCC-M but which must be stated in the contractual documents between the
Customer and the Manufacturer as indicated in the RCC-M. Such contractual documents are usually
the equipment specifications.
The chapters ZZ 300 to ZZ 900 define the main additional provisions to be taken into account when
the essential safety requirements of annex 1 of European Directive 97/23/CE relative to Pressure
Equipment becomes compulsory, either contractual, or under the regulations of a Member State of
the European Union. This section is applicable in part or in whole, according to the terms of the
contract and the equipment specification defined between the Operator and the Manufacturer(s).
The regulatory requirements of this annex must be applied in addition to the code without interfering
with the application conditions of the general provisions of the Code, unless otherwise explicitly
stated.

 n° 137-2012 Annex ZZ / 1
RCC-M - 2012 Edition Subsection Z

ZZ 200 CORRESPONDENCE BETWEEN THE ESSENTIAL

REQUIREMENTS OF ANNEX 1 OF DIRECTIVE 97/23/CE
AND ITS TRANSPOSITION INTO FRENCH LAW
(DECREE 99-1046 DATED 13/12/1999) AND THE
SECTIONS OF THE RCC-M.

RCC-M
N° REQUIREMENTS OBSERVATIONS
Reference

GENERAL requirements The applicable codes and

additional requirements are listed
in the equipment specifications.

Preliminary observations
1. The obligations arising from the essential ZZ 700
requirements listed in this Annex for pressure
equipment also apply to assemblies where the
corresponding hazard exists.

2. The essential requirements laid down in the Subsec. A

Directive are compulsory. The obligations laid
ZZ 300
down in these essential requirements apply only
if the corresponding hazard exists for the pressure
equipment in question when it is used under
conditions which are reasonably foreseeable by
the manufacturer.

3. The manufacturer is under an obligation to

analyse the hazards in order to identify those
which apply to his equipment on account of
pressure; he must then design and construct it
taking account of his analysis.

4. The essential requirements are to be interpreted Subsec. A Periodical revision of the

and applied in such a way as to take account of RCC-M.
the state of the art and current practice at the time
of design and manufacture as well as of technical
and economic considerations which are
consistent with a high degree of health and safety
protection.

1 General
1.1 Pressure equipment must be designed,
manufactured and checked, and if applicable
equipped and installed, in such a way as to ensure
its safety when put into service in accordance
with the manufacturer's instructions, or in
reasonably foreseeable conditions.

Annex ZZ / 2  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition Subsection Z

RCC-M
N° REQUIREMENTS OBSERVATIONS
Reference

1.2 In choosing the most appropriate solutions, the Subsection A

manufacturer must apply the principles set out
Vol. B, C, D
below in the following order:
ZZ 500
- eliminate or reduce hazards as far as is
reasonably practicable,
- apply appropriate protection measures against
hazards which cannot be eliminated,
- where appropriate, inform users of residual
hazards and indicate whether it is necessary to
take appropriate special measures to reduce the
risks at the time of installation and/or use.

1.3 Where the potential for misuse is known or can

be clearly foreseen, the pressure equipment must
be designed to prevent danger from such misuse
or, if that is not possible, adequate warning given
that the pressure equipment must not be used in
that way.

DESIGN requirements
2 Design
2.1 General
The pressure equipment must be properly A.3000 The equipment specifications list
designed taking all relevant factors into account B, C, D 3100 the anticipated service
in order to ensure that the equipment will be safe conditions.
throughout its intended life.
The design must incorporate appropriate safety B, C, D 3000
coefficients using comprehensive methods which
and Annex Z
are known to incorporate adequate safety margins
against all relevant failure modes in a consistent
manner.

2.2 Design for adequate strength

2.2.1 The pressure equipment must be designed for B, C, D 3000
loadings appropriate to its intended use and other
With the
reasonably foreseeable operating conditions.
following
In particular, the following factors must be taken specific
into account: provisions:
- internal/external pressure, Annex Z IV
- ambient and operational temperatures, Annex ZG
- static pressure and mass of contents in
operating and test conditions,

 n° 137-2012 Annex ZZ / 3
RCC-M - 2012 Edition Subsection Z

RCC-M
N° REQUIREMENTS OBSERVATIONS
Reference

- traffic, wind, earthquake loading, Specific provisions for

earthquakes
- reaction forces and moments which result from
the supports, attachments, piping, etc.,
- corrosion, Subsection A Corrosion prevention in B, C,
D 2000
- and erosion, C, D 3000
Additional specifications to be
- fatigue, etc.
provided if necessary for class 3
components
- decomposition of unstable fluids. Not covered Not in RCC-M

Various loadings which can occur at the same A3100; A3203; B3130; B3161;
time must be considered, taking into account the C3110; C3130; C3620; D 3110;
probability of their simultaneous occurrence. D3620

2.2.2 Design for adequate strength must be based on: B, C, D 3000

- as a general rule, a calculation method, as + Sub. E
described in 2.2.3, and supplemented if
necessary by an experimental design method
as described in 2.2.4, or

- an experimental design method without Annex Z II The design validity shall in all
calculation, as described in 2.2.4, when the cases be based on a calculation
product of the maximum allowable pressure PS as required by the RCC-M
and the volume V is less than 6 000 bar 7L or
the product PS 7DN less than 3 000 bar.

2.2.3 Calculation method

a) Pressure containment and other loading aspects
The allowable stresses for pressure equipment
must be limited having regard to reasonably B, C, D 3000 Sections B, C, D 3000 refer to
foreseeable failure modes under operating the permissible stresses defined
conditions. To this end, safety factors must be in Annex Z I for materials
applied to eliminate fully any uncertainty arising procured in accordance with
out of manufacture, actual operational conditions, Section II "Material". The rule
stresses, calculation models and the properties used to define permissible
and behaviour of the material. stresses is given in annex Z III.

These calculation methods must provide

sufficient safety margins consistent, where
applicable, with the requirements of section 7.

Annex ZZ / 4  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition Subsection Z

RCC-M
N° REQUIREMENTS OBSERVATIONS
Reference

The requirements set out above may be met by

applying one of the following methods, as
appropriate, if necessary as a supplement to or in
combination with another method:
- design by formula,
- design by analysis,
- design by fracture mechanics;
b) Resistance
Appropriate design calculations must be used to
establish the resistance of the pressure
equipment concerned.

In particular:
- the calculation pressures must not be less than Subsections
the maximum allowable pressures and take B, C, D 3100
into account static head and dynamic fluid
pressures and the decomposition of unstable
fluids. Where a vessel is separated into
individual pressure-containing chambers, the
partition wall must be designed on the basis of
the highest possible chamber pressure relative
to the lowest pressure possible in the adjoining
chamber,
- the calculation temperatures must allow for
appropriate safety margins,
- the design must take appropriate account of all
possible combinations of temperature and
pressure which might arise under reasonably
foreseeable operating conditions for the
equipment,
- the maximum stresses and peak stress
concentrations must be kept within safe limits,

- the calculation for pressure containment must

utilize the values appropriate to the properties
of the material, based on documented data,
having regard to the provisions set out in
section 4 together with appropriate safety
factors. Material characteristics to be
considered, where applicable, include:

- yield strength, 0.2 % or 1.0 % proof strength as Annex ZI

appropriate at calculation temperature,
- tensile strength, Annex ZI

 n° 137-2012 Annex ZZ / 5
RCC-M - 2012 Edition Subsection Z

RCC-M
N° REQUIREMENTS OBSERVATIONS
Reference

- time-dependent strength, i.e. creep strength, The RCC-M applies within the
temperature limits given in
appendix Z I, which corresponds
to negligible creep
- fatigue data, Annex ZI
- Young's modulus (modulus of elasticity), Annex ZI
- appropriate amount of plastic strain, Annex ZI
- impact strength, Section II
- fracture toughness, Section II Complemented by Equipment
Annex ZG Specifications

- appropriate joint factors must be applied to the B, C, D 3000, The joint coefficient is
material properties depending, for example, on and S 7000 considered to be equal to 1 for
the type of non-destructive testing, the class 1 and 2 components.
materials joined and the operating conditions
envisaged,
- the design must take appropriate account of all Subsection A Complemented by Equipment
reasonably foreseeable degradation Specifications
mechanisms (e.g. corrosion, creep, fatigue)
commensurate with the intended use of the
equipment. Attention must be drawn, in the
instructions referred to in section 3.4, to
particular features of the design which are
relevant to the life of the equipment, for B, C, D 1200
example:
- for creep: design hours of operation at
specified temperatures,
- for fatigue: design number of cycles at
specified stress levels,
- for corrosion: design corrosion allowance;

Stability aspects :
Where the calculated thickness does not allow for B, C 3178 The introduction of a new section
adequate structural stability, the necessary B 3178 (and an identical section
measures must be taken to remedy the situation C 3178) is proposed:
taking into account the risks from transport and
"B.3178. Stability. Provisions
handling.
must be taken to ensure the
stability of equipment items
during packaging, shipping,
storage and maintenance in the
factory or on site prior to

Annex ZZ / 6  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition Subsection Z

RCC-M
N° REQUIREMENTS OBSERVATIONS
Reference

installation, taking into account

any provisions in the equipment
specifications"

2.2.4 Experimental design method

The design of the equipment may be validated, in Annexes Z II
all or in part, by an appropriate test programme ZZ 400
carried out on a sample representative of the
equipment or the category of equipment.
The test programme must be clearly defined prior
to testing and accepted by the notified body
responsible for the design conformity assessment
module, where it exists.
This programme must define test conditions and
criteria for acceptance or refusal. The actual
values of the essential dimensions and
characteristics of the materials which constitute
the equipment tested shall be measured before the
test.
Where appropriate, during tests, it must be
possible to observe the critical zones of the
pressure equipment with adequate
instrumentation capable of registering strains and
stresses with sufficient precision.
The test programme must include:
a) A pressure strength test, the purpose of which
is to check that, at a pressure with a defined
safety margin in relation to the maximum
allowable pressure, the equipment does not
exhibit significant leaks or deformation
exceeding a determined threshold. The test
pressure must be determined on the basis of the
differences between the values of the geometrical
and material characteristics measures under test
conditions and the values used for design
purposes; it must take into account the
differences between the test and design
temperatures;
b) where the risk of creep or fatigue exists,
appropriate tests determined on the basis of the
service conditions laid down for the equipment,
for instance hold time at specified temperatures,
number of cycles at specified stress-levels, etc.;
c) where necessary, additional tests concerning
other factors referred to in 2.2.1 such as
corrosion, external damage, etc.

 n° 137-2012 Annex ZZ / 7
RCC-M - 2012 Edition Subsection Z

RCC-M
N° REQUIREMENTS OBSERVATIONS
Reference

2.3 Provisions to ensure safe handling and operation

The method of operation specified for pressure Annexes ZZ;
equipment must be such as to preclude any ZZ 300; 500
reasonably foreseeable risk in operation of the
equipment. Particular attention must be paid,
where appropriate, to:
- closures and openings,
- dangerous discharge of pressure relief blow-
off,
- devices to prevent physical access whilst
pressure or a vacuum exists,
- surface temperature taking into consideration
the intended use,
- decomposition of unstable fluids.
In particular, pressure equipment fitted with an
access door must be equipped with an automatic
or manual device enabling the user easily to
ascertain that the opening will not present any
hazard. Furthermore, where the opening can be
operated quickly, the pressure equipment must be
fitted with a device to prevent it being opened
whenever the pressure or temperature of the fluid
presents a hazard.

2.4 Means of examination

a) Pressure equipment must be designed and B and C 3175 Requirements relating to
constructed so that all necessary Annex ZS operation surveillance must be
examinations to ensure safety can be carried out; listed in the equipment
specifications.
b) Means of determining the internal condition of
the equipment must be available, where it is
necessary to ensure the continued safety of the
equipment, such as access openings allowing
physical access to the inside of the pressure
equipment so that appropriate examinations can
be carried out safely and ergonomically;

c) Other means of ensuring the safe condition of

the pressure equipment may be applied:
- where it is too small for physical internal
access, or
- where opening the pressure equipment would
adversely affect the inside, or

Annex ZZ / 8  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition Subsection Z

RCC-M
N° REQUIREMENTS OBSERVATIONS
Reference

- where the substance contained has been shown

not to be harmful to the material from which
the pressure equipment is made and no other
internal degradation mechanisms are
reasonably foreseeable.

2.5 Means of draining and venting

Adequate means must be provided for the A 1100 Requirements relating to
draining and venting of pressure equipment B 3175 blowdown and ventilation must
where necessary: C 1100 be listed in the equipment
C 3175 specifications.
- to avoid harmful effects such as water hammer,
D 3110
vacuum collapse, corrosion and uncontrolled
chemical reactions. All stages of operation and
testing, particularly pressure testing, must be
considered,
- to permit cleaning, inspection and maintenance
in a safe manner.

2.6 Corrosion or other chemical attack

Where necessary, adequate allowance or B 3171
protection against corrosion or other chemical C 3171
attack must be provided, taking due account of D 3110
the intended and reasonably foreseeable use.

2.7 Wear Subsection A

Where severe conditions of erosion or abrasion B, C, D 3000 Additional specific requests must
may arise, adequate measures must be taken to: be listed in the equipment
specifications.
- minimize that effect by appropriate design, e.g.
additional material thickness, or by the use of
liners or cladding materials,

- permit replacement of parts which are most

affected,
- draw attention, in the instructions referred to
in 3.4, to measures necessary for continued
safe use.

 n° 137-2012 Annex ZZ / 9
RCC-M - 2012 Edition Subsection Z

RCC-M
N° REQUIREMENTS OBSERVATIONS
Reference

2.8 Assemblies A 2000

Assemblies must be so designed that: ZZ 600
- the components to be assembled together are
suitable and reliable for their duty,
- all the components are properly integrated and
assembled in an appropriate manner.

2.9 Provisions for filling and discharge

Where appropriate, the pressure equipment must Additional provisions stipulated
be so designed and provided with accessories, or in the specifications and service
provision made for their fitting, as to ensure safe instructions.
filling and discharge in particular with respect to
Specific test conditions are listed
hazards such as:
in B, C, D 5000.

a) on filling:
- overfilling or overpressurization having regard B 5131
in particular to the filling ratio and to vapour C 5230
pressure at the reference temperature, D 3110
- instability of the pressure equipment;
b) on discharge: the uncontrolled release of the
pressurized fluid;
c) on filling or discharge: unsafe connection and
disconnection.

SAFETY DEVICES requirements

2.10 Protection against exceeding the allowable limits B, C, D 6000,
of pressure equipment.
Where, under reasonably foreseeable conditions,
the allowable limits could be exceeded, the
pressure equipment
must be fitted with, or provision made
for the fitting of, suitable protective devices,
unless the equipment is intended to be protected
by other protective devices
within an assembly.
The suitable device or combination of such
devices must be determined on the basis of the
particular characteristics of the equipment or
assembly.

Annex ZZ / 10  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition Subsection Z

RCC-M
N° REQUIREMENTS OBSERVATIONS
Reference

Suitable protective devices and combinations

thereof comprise:
a) safety accessories as defined in article 1
point d);
b) where appropriate, adequate monitoring
devices such as indicators and/or alarms which
enable adequate action to be taken either
automatically or manually to keep the pressure
equipment within the allowable limits.

2.11 Safety accessories

2.11.1 Safety accessories must: B, C, D 6000
- be so designed and constructed as to be reliable
and suitable for their intended duty and take
into account the maintenance and testing
requirements of the devices, where applicable,
- be independent of other functions, unless their
safety function cannot be affected by such
other functions,
- comply with appropriate design principles in
order to obtain suitable and reliable protection.
These principles include, in particular, fail-safe
modes, redundancy, diversity and self-
diagnosis.

2.11.2 Pressure limiting devices B, C, D 6000 The RCC-M does not deal with
the design of indicators, security
These devices must be so designed that the
alarms, signaling or warning
pressure will not permanently exceed the
devices. It does not deal with the
maximum allowable pressure PS; however a
danger of overheating due to
short duration pressure surge in keeping with the
calorific input. It does not deal
specifications laid down in 7.3 is allowable,
with the maintenance of
where appropriate.
protective devices for pressurized
equipment.

2.11.3 Temperature monitoring devices - Not in RCC-M. Any additional

constructive provisions which
These devices must have an adequate response
may be required must be
time on safety grounds, consistent with the
stipulated in the equipment
measurement function.
specifications.

 n° 137-2012 Annex ZZ / 11
RCC-M - 2012 Edition Subsection Z

RCC-M
N° REQUIREMENTS OBSERVATIONS
Reference

2.12 External fire - Not in RCC-M. Any additional

constructive provisions which
Where necessary, pressure equipment must be so
may be required must be
designed and, where appropriate, fitted with
stipulated in the equipment
suitable accessories, or provision made for their
specifications.
fitting, to meet damage-limitation requirements
in the event of external fire, having particular
regard to its intended use.

MANUFACTURING requirements
3 Manufacturing
3.1 Manufacturing procedures Sections IV
and V
The manufacturer must ensure the competent
execution of the provisions set out at the design
stage by applying the appropriate techniques and
relevant procedures, especially with a view to the
aspects set out below.

3.1.1 Preparation of the component parts

Preparation of the component parts (e.g. forming F 3000
and chamfering) must not give rise to defects or F 4000
cracks or changes in the mechanical
characteristics likely to be detrimental to the
safety of the pressure equipment.

3.1.2 Permanent joining Section IV

Permanent joints and adjacent zones must be free
of any surface or internal defects detrimental to
the safety of the equipment.
The properties of permanent joints must meet the
minimum properties specified for the materials to
be joined unless other relevant property values
are specifically taken into account in the design
calculations.
For pressure equipment, permanent joining of
components which contribute to the pressure
resistance of equipment and components which
are directly attached to them must be carried out S 3000
by suitably qualified personnel according to
suitable operating procedures.

Annex ZZ / 12  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition Subsection Z

RCC-M
N° REQUIREMENTS OBSERVATIONS
Reference

For pressure equipment in categories II, III and

IV, operating procedures and personnel must be
S 4000
approved by a competent third party which, at the
manufacturer's discretion, may be a body, ZZ 400
authorized for that purpose according to the title
IV of the present decree or a body authorized in
the same conditions by the proper authorities of
another member state of the European
Community, and mentioned on the list published
in the official Journal of the European
Communities.
To carry out these approvals the third party must ZZ 400
perform examinations and tests as set out in the
appropriate harmonized standards or equivalent
examinations and tests or must have them
performed.

3.1.3 Non-destructive tests

For pressure equipment, non-destructive tests of Section II
permanent joints must be carried out by suitable MC 8000
qualified personnel.
For pressure equipment in categories III and IV, ZZ 400
this personnel must be approved by a body,
authorized for that purpose according to the title
IV of the present decree or a body authorized in
the same conditions by the proper authorities of
another member state of the European
Community, and mentioned on the list published
in the official Journal of the European
Communities.

3.1.4 Heat treatment

Where there is a risk that the manufacturing Section V
process will change the material properties to an
F 8000
extent which would impair the safety of the
pressure equipment, suitable heat treatment must
be applied at the appropriate stage of
manufacture.

3.1.5 Traceability
Suitable procedures must be established and B, C, D 1300
maintained for identifying the material making
up the components of the equipment which
contribute to pressure resistance by suitable
means from receipt, through production, up to the
final test of the manufactured pressure
equipment.

 n° 137-2012 Annex ZZ / 13
RCC-M - 2012 Edition Subsection Z

RCC-M
N° REQUIREMENTS OBSERVATIONS
Reference

3.2 Final assessment. - General

Pressure equipment must be subjected to final
assessment as described below.

3.2.1 Final inspection. Sections II

and V,
Pressure equipment must undergo a final
Subsection A
inspection, to assess visually and by examination
ZZ 720
of the accompanying documents, compliance
with the requirements of the Directive. Tests
carried out during manufacture may be taken into
account. As far as is necessary on safety grounds,
the final inspection must be carried out internally
and externally on every parts of the equipment,
where appropriate in the course of manufacture
(e.g. where examinations during the final
inspection is no longer possible).

3.2.2 Proof test

Final assessment of pressure equipment must B, C, D 5000 The requirement for creating a
include a test for the pressure containment aspect, synthesis of test results (STR) as
ZZ
which will normally take the form of a specified in B 5231 is covered by
hydrostatic pressure test at a pressure at least the documents prepared as part of
equal, where appropriate, to the value laid down ZZ 720.
in 7.4.
For category I series-produced pressure
equipment, this test may be performed on a
statistical basis.
Where the hydrostatic pressure test is harmful or
impractical, other tests of a recognized value may
be carried out. For tests other than the hydrostatic
pressure test, additional measures, such as non-
destructive tests or other methods of equivalent
validity, must be applied before those tests are
carried out.

3.2.3 Inspection of safety devices

For assemblies, the final assessment must also B, C, D 6000
include a check of the safety devices intended to
check full compliance with the requirements
referred to in 2.10.

Annex ZZ / 14  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition Subsection Z

RCC-M
N° REQUIREMENTS OBSERVATIONS
Reference

3.3 Marking and labelling

In addition to the CE marking referred to in ZZ 600
Article 15, the following information must be
provided
a) for all pressure equipment:
- the name and address or other means of
identification of the manufacturer and, where
appropriate, of his authorized representative
established within the Community,
- the year of manufacture,
- identification of the pressure equipment
according to its nature, such as type, series or
batch identification and serial number,
- essential maximum/minimum allowable limits;
b) depending on the type of pressure equipment,
further information necessary for safe
installation, operation or use and, where
applicable, maintenance and periodic inspection
such as:
- the volume V of the pressure equipment
in L,
- the nominal size for piping DN,
- the test pressure PT applied in bar and date,
- safety device set pressure in bar,
- output of the pressure equipment
in kW,
- supply voltage in V (volts),
- intended use,
- filling ratio kg/L,
- maximum filling mass in kg,
- tare mass in kg,
- the product group;
c) where necessary, warnings fixed to the
pressure equipment drawing attention to misuse
which experience has shown might occur.
The CE marking and the required information
must be given on the
pressure equipment or on a dataplate
firmly attached to it, with the following
exceptions:

 n° 137-2012 Annex ZZ / 15
RCC-M - 2012 Edition Subsection Z

RCC-M
N° REQUIREMENTS OBSERVATIONS
Reference

- where applicable, appropriate documentation

may be used to avoid repetitive marking of
individual parts such as piping components,
intended for the same assembly. This applies to
CE marking and other marking and labelling
referred to in this Annex;
- where the pressure equipment is too small, e.g.
accessories, the information referred to in (b)
may be given on a label attached to that
pressure equipment;
- labelling or other adequate means may be
used for the mass to be filled and the warnings
referred to in (c), provided it remains legible
for the appropriate period of time.

3.4 Operating instructions

a) When pressure equipment is placed on the ZZ 500
market, it must be accompanied, as far as
relevant, with instructions for the user, containing
all the necessary safety information relating to:
- mounting including assembling of different
pieces of pressure equipment,
- putting into service,
- use,
- maintenance including checks by the user;
b) Instructions must cover information affixed to
the pressure equipment in accordance with 3.3,
with the exception of serial identification, and
must be accompanied, where appropriate, by the
technical documents, drawings and diagrams
necessary for a full understanding of these
instructions;
c) If appropriate, these instructions must also
refer to hazards arising from misuse in
accordance with 1.3 and particular features of the
design in accordance with 2.2.3.

Annex ZZ / 16  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition Subsection Z

RCC-M
N° REQUIREMENTS OBSERVATIONS
Reference

MATERIAL requirements
4 Materials
Materials used for the manufacture of pressure Section II and
equipment must be suitable for such application
Section I, and
during the scheduled lifetime unless replacement
B,C,D 2000
is foreseen.
Welding consumables and other joining materials
need fulfil only the relevant requirements of 4.1,
4.2 (a) and the first paragraph of 4.3, in an
appropriate way, both individually and in a
joined structure.

4.1 Materials for pressurized parts must:

a) have appropriate properties for all operating Section II and
conditions which are reasonably foreseeable and
B,C,D 2000
for all test conditions, and in particular they
should be sufficiently ductile and tough. Where
appropriate, the characteristics of the materials
must comply with the requirements of 7.5.
Moreover, due care should be exercised in
particular in selecting materials in order to
prevent brittle-type fracture where necessary;
where for specific reasons brittle material has to
be used appropriate measures must be taken;
b) be sufficiently chemically resistant to the fluid
contained in the pressure equipment; the
chemical and physical properties necessary for
operational safety must not be significantly
affected within the scheduled lifetime of the
equipment;
c) not be significantly affected by ageing;
d) be suitable for the intended processing
procedures;
e) be selected in order to avoid significant
undesirable effects when the various materials
are put together.

4.2 a) The pressure equipment manufacturer must Annex Z I

define in an appropriate manner the values
necessary for the design calculations referred to
in 2.2.3 and the essential characteristics of the
materials and their treatment referred to in 4.1;

 n° 137-2012 Annex ZZ / 17
RCC-M - 2012 Edition Subsection Z

RCC-M
N° REQUIREMENTS OBSERVATIONS
Reference

b) the manufacturer must provide in his technical Subsections A

documentation elements relating to compliance and B,
with the materials specifications of the Directive C, D 1000.
in one of the following forms:
- by using materials which comply with
harmonized standards,
- by using materials covered by a European
approval of pressure equipment materials in
accordance with Article 11,
- by a particular material appraisal;

c) for pressure equipment in categories III and ZZ 400

IV, particular appraisal as referred to in the third
indent of (b) must be performed by the notified
body in charge of conformity assessment
procedures for the pressure equipment.

4.3 The equipment manufacturer must take Section II

appropriate measures to ensure that the material
Annex ZZ
used conforms with the required specification. In
particular, documentation prepared by the
material manufacturer affirming compliance with
a specification must be obtained for all materials.
For the main pressure-bearing parts of equipment
in categories II, III and IV, this must take the
form of a certificate of specific product control.
Where a material manufacturer has an
appropriate quality-assurance system, certified by
a competent body established within the
Community and having undergone a specific
assessment for materials, certificates issued by
the manufacturer are presumed to certify
conformity with the relevant requirements of this
section.

5 SPECIFIC PRESSURE EQUIPMENT NC

requirements

Annex ZZ / 18  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition Subsection Z

RCC-M
N° REQUIREMENTS OBSERVATIONS
Reference

6 Piping as referred to in article 3, point II 3)

Design and construction must ensure:
a) that the risk of overstressing from inadmissible B, C, D
free movement or excessive forces being 3600 ;
produced, e.g. on flanges, connections, bellows Subsection H
or hoses, is adequately controlled by means such
Annexes ZV
as support, constraint, anchoring, alignment and
and Z VI
pre-tension;

b) that where there is a possibility of Not in RCC-M. Any additional

condensation occurring inside pipes for gaseous constructive provisions which
fluids, means are provided for drainage and may be required must be
removal of deposits from low areas to avoid stipulated in the equipment
damage from water hammer or corrosion; specifications.
c) that due consideration is given to the potential B, C, D 3650
damage from turbulence and formation of
vortices; the relevant parts of 2.7 are applicable;
d) that due consideration is given to the risk of
fatigue due to vibrations in pipes;
e) that, where fluids of Group 1 are contained in B, C, D 3131 Not in RCC-M
the piping, appropriate means are provided to B, C, D 3622.5
isolate 'take-off` pipes the size of which
represents a significant risk;
f) that the risk of inadvertent discharge is
Not in RCC-M
minimized; the take-off points must be clearly
marked on the permanent side, indicating the
fluid contained;

g) that the position and route of underground Not in RCC-M

piping is at least recorded in the technical
documentation to facilitate safe maintenance,
inspection or repair.

QUANTITATIVE requirements
7 Specific quantitative requirements for certain
pressure equipment
The following provisions apply as a general rule.
However, where they are not applied, including
in cases where materials are not specifically
referred to and no harmonized standards are
applied, the manufacturer must demonstrate that
appropriate measures have been taken to achieve
an equivalent overall level of safety.

 n° 137-2012 Annex ZZ / 19
RCC-M - 2012 Edition Subsection Z

RCC-M
N° REQUIREMENTS OBSERVATIONS
Reference

This section is an integral part of Annex 1. The

provisions laid down in this section supplement
the essential requirements of sections 1 to 6 for
the pressure equipment to which they apply.

7.1 Allowable stresses

7.1.1 Symbols
Re/t, yield limit, indicates the value at the
calculation temperature of:
- the upper flow limit for a material presenting
upper and lower flow limits,
- the 1.0 % proof strength of austenitic steel and
non-alloyed aluminium,
- the 0.2 % proof strength in other cases.
Rm/20 indicates the minimum value of the
ultimate strength 20 °C.
Rm/t designates the ultimate strength at the
calculation temperature.

7.1.2 The permissible general membrane stress for B, C, D 3000

predominantly static loads and for temperatures
Annex ZI
outside the range in which creep is significant
must not exceed the smaller of the following Annex ZIII
values, according to the material used:
- in the case of ferritic steel including normalized
(normalized rolled) steel and excluding fine-
grained steel and specially heat-treated steel,
2/3 of Re/t and 5/12 of Rm/20;
- in the case of austenitic steel:
- if its elongation after rupture exceeds 30 %,
2/3 of Re/t
- or, alternatively, and if its elongation after
rupture exceeds 35 %, 5/6 of Re/t and 1/3 of
Rm/t;
- in the case of non-alloy or low-alloy cast steel,
10/19 of Re/t and 1/3 of Rm/20;
- in the case of aluminium, 2/3 of Re/t;

Annex ZZ / 20  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition Subsection Z

RCC-M
N° REQUIREMENTS OBSERVATIONS
Reference

- in the case of aluminium alloys excluding

precipitation hardening alloys 2/3 of Re/t and
5/12 of Rm/20.

7.2 Joint coefficients B, C, D 3000 The joint coefficient is

considered to be equal to 1 for
For welded joints, the joint coefficient must not
level 1 and 2 materials.
exceed the following values:
- for equipment subject to destructive and non-
destructive tests which confirm that thewhole
series of joints show no significant defects: 1,
- for equipment subject to random non-
destructive testing: 0.85,
- for equipment not subject to non-destructive
testing other than visual inspection: 0.7.
If necessary, the type of stress and the
mechanical and technological properties of the
joint must also be taken into account.

7.3 Pressure limiting devices, particularly for B, C, D 6000

pressure vessels
The momentary pressure surge referred to in
2.11.2 must be kept to 10 % of the maximum
allowable pressure.

7.4 Hydrostatic test pressure B, C, D 5000

For pressure vessels, the hydrostatic test pressure
referred to in 3.2.2 must be no less than:
- that corresponding to the maximum loading to
which the pressure equipment may be subject
in service taking into account its maximum
allowable pressure and its maximum
allowable temperature, multiplied by the
coefficient 1.25, or
- the maximum allowable pressure multiplied by
the coefficient 1.43, whichever is the greater.

 n° 137-2012 Annex ZZ / 21
RCC-M - 2012 Edition Subsection Z

RCC-M
N° REQUIREMENTS OBSERVATIONS
Reference

7.5 Material characteristics Section II

Unless other values are required in accordance ZZ 800
with other criteria that must be taken into
account, a steel is considered as sufficiently
ductile to satisfy 4.1 (a) if, in a tensile test carried
out by a standard procedure, its elongation after
rupture is no less than 14 % and its bending
rupture energy measured on an ISO V test-piece
is no less than 27 J, at a temperature not greater
than 20 °C but not higher than the lowest
scheduled operating temperature.

ZZ 300 HAZARDS ANALYSIS

The hazards analysis identifies all the dangerous phenomena due to the pressure and is used to
determine the applicable regulatory essential safety requirements.
The hazards analysis must be performed in view of:
- the sizing of the equipment and the choice of materials, before starting manufacture of the
equipment,
- justifying the design and producing the instruction manual.
In addition to the requirements of sub-chapter A 3100, any identified hazard for which the
provisions of the Code do not explicitly stipulate its elimination or reduction, or any essential
requirement which is not totally covered by the Code, must be covered by suitable measures by the
manufacturer.
This, for example, is the case with the handling parts used during manufacture (lifting lugs, etc.)
which are components of permanent assemblies but with a limited life, which must not affect the
integrity of the pressure equipment with respect to the pressure risk.

ZZ 400 ACTION BY NOTIFIED BODIES AND RECOGNIZED

THIRD PARTY ORGANIZATIONS

The conformity evaluations relative to the essential safety requirements mentioned in annex 1 of
Directive 97/23/CE must be performed by notified bodies under the terms of article 12 of the
Directive, or by user inspectorates under the terms of article 14 of the Directive.
When an experimental design method is implemented, the test program must be defined before the
test and be accepted by the notified body.
The procedures for permanent assembly, including weld-deposited cladding, and the personnel
applying the procedures, must be approved by a notified body under the terms of article 12 of
Directive 97/23/CE dated May 29, 1997, or an user inspectorate under the terms of article 13 of
the Directive.

Annex ZZ / 22  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition Subsection Z

The non-destructive tests for permanent assemblies must be performed by qualified personnel, with
the appropriate level of ability, approved by a recognized third party organization under the terms of
article 13 of Directive 97/23/CE dated May 29, 1997.

For category I to IV pressure equipments manufacturer is required to perform a particular material

appraisal. For category III and IV equipment under directive 97/23/CE dated 29 May 1997, the
particular material appraisal is approved by an accepted body responsible for conformity evaluation
procedures for the pressure equipment.

For qualification process established in accordance with a referential anterior to the last applicable
code edition, additional tests to the ones required as per sub-chapter S 2900 could be necessary to
obtain an equivalent technical qualification.

ZZ 500 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS

The pressure equipment must be accompanied where necessary by an instruction manual intended
for the operator, containing all the necessary information for safety as concerns:
- erection, including the assembly of the various pressure equipment,
- commissioning,
- operation,
- maintenance, including the checks by the operator.
The instruction manual must include the information marked on the pressure equipment, in
compliance with ZZ 600, and where applicable must be accompanied by the technical
documentation and the drawings and diagrams necessary for correct understanding of these
instructions.
Where applicable, the instruction manual must also draw attention to the dangers of incorrect use,
identified by way of the analysis conducted as per ZZ 300, and to the specific design characteristics.
Hazards which could not be eliminated at design or which could not be covered by appropriate
protective measures must be indicated to the operator, and must form the subject of
recommendations regarding the appropriate measures aimed at reducing the risks at the time of
installation and/or use.
Considering the restrictions and limitations regarding access and the qualifications of the personnel
authorized by the Operator to enter the various areas of the Nuclear Island, the following specific
risks must be taken into account in the instruction manuals for the equipment or assemblies:
- risks associated with the closing and opening devices, in particular for pressure equipment fitted
with removable closure members which must be equipped with an automatic or manual device
allowing the Operator to easily check that opening does not present a danger. In addition, if the
opening device can be operated rapidly, the pressure equipment must be equipped with a device
which inhibits opening as long as the pressure or temperature of the fluid presents a danger;
- risks associated with dangerous emissions from pressure relief valves;
- risks associated with surface temperatures, taking into account the use envisaged;
- risks associated with the decomposition of unstable fluids.
The taking into account of these risks within the scope of work procedures drawn up in cooperation
with the manufacturer of the equipment or assembly concerned, and the Operator, is aimed at
eliminating or significantly reducing the risks due to the handling of the equipment.

 n° 137-2012 Annex ZZ / 23
RCC-M - 2012 Edition Subsection Z

ZZ 600 IDENTIFICATION OF EQUIPMENT

All the mechanical components must be marked or labeled in a legible, permanent and indelible
manner, without affecting their physical and chemical properties, as indicated in section F.2000. The
language used must be that accepted by the Operator.

a) For all the pressure equipment or assemblies:

- the name and address of or other means of identifying the manufacturer and, where
applicable, of his agent established in the European Union;
- the year of manufacture;
- the identification of the pressure equipment according to its nature, for example, the type,
identification of the series or batch and the manufacturing number;
- the permissible maximum/minimum essential limits.

b) According to the type of pressure equipment, the additional information necessary for the safety
of the installation, operation or use, and, where applicable, for maintenance and periodic
inspection, such as:
- the volume V of the pressure equipment, expressed in liters;
- the nominal dimension DN of the piping;
- the applied test pressure PT, expressed in bars, and the date;
- the opening pressure of the safety device, expressed in bars;
- the power of the pressure equipment, expressed in kW;
- the power supply voltage, expressed in Volts;
- the intended use;
- the filling ratio, expressed in kg/1;
- the maximum filling weight, expressed in kg;
- the tare, expressed in kg;
- the group (1 or 2) of products with reference to Directive 97/23/CE.

c) Where applicable, warnings on the pressure equipment, which draw attention to incorrect use
revealed by experience.
The required information must be marked on the pressure equipment or on a plate solidly
attached to the equipment, except in the following cases:
- if necessary, a suitable document can be used to avoid repeated marking of individual items,
such as piping components, intended for the same assembly;
- if the pressure equipment is too small, for example, for accessories, the information required
in point b) can be indicated on a label attached to the pressure equipment;
- a label or any other suitable means can be used to identify the filling weight and to indicate
the warnings required in point c), as long as they remain legible over the appropriate period.

Annex ZZ / 24  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition Subsection Z

ZZ 700 EQUIPMENT AND ASSEMBLIES

ZZ 710 GENERAL
The rules applicable to the mechanical equipment in the Code also apply to the pressure equipment
assemblies, manufactured under the responsibility of one single Manufacturer.
When each pressure equipment comprising the pressure assembly has been covered by a declaration
of conformity to this Code, the rules applicable to the assembly include:
- a hazards analysis specific to the pressure risks generated by integrating the equipment items
together, so that they are suited and reliable in their service conditions;
- the constitution of an "end of manufacturing file" for the assembly, with reference to the End of
Manufacturing Report of each equipment item, and specifying the technical integration
conditions. In particular, each integration assembly is subject to the rules in this Code concerning
the assemblies and the examinations. The assembly must successfully undergo an integration test:
hydrostatic strength test or pneumatic leak-tightness test, and the pressure relief device must
undergo a final examination which includes a check of the overpressure relative to the assembly
to be protected;
- the drawing up of technical instructions as defined in this Code, dedicated to the assembly, and
intended for the Operator;
- the protection of the assembly against overpressure, in order to avoid the redundant or
unnecessary individual protection of each pressure equipment, as defined in the hazards analysis
for the assembly.
The manufacturer of the assembly must issue a declaration of conformity as defined in this Code,
listing all the mechanical components necessary for the function of the pressure assembly.

ZZ 720 FINAL CHECK

The final check shall consist in:
- examination of the accompanying documentation, which shall comprise the following documents
as a minimum:
. evidence of the qualification of NDT personnel appropriate to equipment category,
. evidence of the qualification of personnel relative to the permanent assembly appropriate to
equipment category,
. data related to heat treatment (e.g. diagram of temperature records),
. inspection documents for base materials and consumables,
. procedures to insure material traceability,
. reports and NDT, including radiographic films,
. destructive test reports (e.g. test coupons),
. reports on defects or deviations detected during manufacture,
. data related to the manufacture of components (e.g. forming, chamfering),
. evidence of the qualification of procedures for permanent assembly,
. equipment and manufacturing drawings, as well as schemas of components, subassemblies,
circuits, etc.,

 n° 137-2012 Annex ZZ / 25
RCC-M - 2012 Edition Subsection Z

. results of design calculations carried out or test results in the case of a design based on an
experimental approach,
- visual examination of the equipment
- a hydrostatic test.

ZZ 721 TEST PRESSURES

ZZ 721.1 INDIVIDUAL TEST PRESSURE FOR VESSELS
a) Vessels composed of a single material
The test pressure for a vessel must be at least equal to the maximum operating pressure(1) PS × k,
with:
k = max (1.43; 1.25 Sm,TEH / Sm,TS)

Sm = allowable stress for the material in cases where Subsections B or C 3200 are used.
Allowable stress S must be used in other cases. The values for S and Sm are given in
Annex Z I,
TEH = test temperature,
TS = maximum operating temperature(2) for the equipment.
In the event that a number of operating conditions characterised by different PS, TS pairs apply,
the pair leading to the most severe test pressure shall be selected.

b) Vessels consisting of several materials

When determining the test pressure required in ZZ 721.1.a, the minimum value of the
Sm,THE / Sm,TS ratios for each of the materials used in the main parts of the vessels (shells, bases,
lids, nozzles, end pieces, tube sheets, tube bundles) shall be selected.

ZZ 721.2 TEST PRESSURE FOR AN ASSEMBLY

If required, tests on an assembly shall be performed at a pressure selected in accordance with the
rules in ZZ 721.1.a as a function of the operating pressure (PS) for the assembly, but without
exceeding the admissible stresses for test conditions given in B, C or D.3000.
If the components have been tested individually, the test on the assembly may be replaced by a
volumetric examination of the permanent assemblies used to construct the assembly.

1
The design pressure defined in B 3132.1 may be substituted for PS when determining the test rate.
2
The design temperature defined in B 3232.2 may be substituted for TS.
Annex ZZ / 26  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition Subsection Z

ZZ 800 MATERIALS

Inspection Document: For the procurement of the pressure parts or products, and for the essential
parts for equipment integrity, such as specified in the equipment specification, the inspection
document will be an acceptance certificate with indications corresponding at least to the indications
required in the type 3.1 specific acceptance certificate in accordance with standard EN 10204.
Approval of the Quality System for the procurement of materials: For the issue of a specific
inspection certificate, the material Manufacturer's quality assurance system shall be certified by an
appropriate organization set up in the European Union, or by his local agent, and will have
undergone a specific evaluation for materials.
For grades intended for pressure components covered by product procurement specifications (PPS)
M 4102, M 3206, M 3208, the equipment specification shall set out additional requirements.

ZZ 900 SMALL COMPONENTS

The small components addressed to in A 4250 comprises the pressure equipment covered by
article 3.3 of Directive 97/23/CE.

 n° 137-2012 Annex ZZ / 27
RCC-M - 2012 Edition Subsection Z

Annex ZZ / 28  n° 137-2012